Mercedes e Class Estate 2008 s211 Owners Manual 01

Disclaimer
All
Daslanguage
folgende versions of the für
PDF-Dokument following PDF document for
dieses Fahrzeugmodell this sich
bezieht vehicle model
in allen
relate
The solely toversion
Sprachversionen
following vehicles intended
nur aufofdie for sale
theFahrzeuge,
Owner‘s on the
die für
Manual den German allmarket
deutschen
describes Marktand
models, which
bestimmt
series and
correspond
special to German
sind undequipment
die den regulations.
deutschen
of your Vorschriften entsprechen. Bitte
vehicle. Country-specific wenden
language Sie sich an
variations are
Ihren autorisierten
possible. Mercedes-Benz
Please note Servicestützpunkt,
that your vehicle might not be um equipped
ein gedrucktes
withExemplar
all the
Please
describedcontact
für andere your authorised
Fahrzeugmodelle
functions. Mercedes-Benz
und affects
This also Fahrzeugmodelljahre Service
safety-relevant Centreand
zu erhalten.
systems to obtain
functions.
a printed
Please version
contact forauthorised
your other vehicle models and vehicle
Mercedes-Benz model
dealership years.
if you Thislike
would PDF
document
Dieses
to receive aisprinted
the latest
PDF-Dokument version.
stellt
Owner‘s Possible
die Manual
aktuelle variations
Version
for otherdar. to your
Mögliche
vehicle vehicle
Abweichungen
models mayzu
and vehicle not
be taken
Ihrem
model into account
konkreten
years. Fahrzeugaskönnten
Mercedes-Benz constantlysein,
nicht berücksichtigt updates their vehicles to
da Mercedes-Benz
the
seinestate of the art
Fahrzeuge and introduces
ständig dem neuesten changes
Standinderdesign andanpasst,
Technik equipment.sowiePlease
therefore
The onlinenote
Änderungen that this
in Form
Owner‘s und PDF is
Manual document
Ausstattung in no
vornimmt.
the current way
and replaces
Bitte
validbeachten the
version. Itprinted
Sie daher,
is version
dass
possible that
which was affecting
deviations deliveredyour
dieses PDF-Dokument with yourFall
in keinem vehicle.
specific das gedruckte
vehicle could Exemplar ersetzt,
not be taken intodas mit
account
dem
as Fahrzeug ausgeliefert
Mercedes-Benz wurde.
constantly adapts its vehicles according to the latest
technology and makes changes to the form and the equipment.
Please also read the printed Owner‘s Manual, supplementary documents and
the digital Owner‘s Manual in the vehicle.
Copyright
All rights reserved. All texts, images and graphics are subject to copyright
and other laws for the protection of intellectual property. They may not be
copied or changed for any commercial use or for the purpose of being passed
on nor used on other webistes.
Internal use only

Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; preflight
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 1

mkalafa, Version: 2.9.4
Thank you for choosing Mercedes-Benz. and pass them on to the new owner if you sell
Before you drive off, familiarise yourself with the vehicle.
your vehicle and read the Operating Instruc- The technical documentation team at
tions. This will help you to obtain the maxi- Daimler AG wishes you safe and pleasant
mum pleasure from your vehicle and to avoid motoring.
endangering yourself and others. i You can get to know the important fea-
Items of optional equipment are marked with tures of your vehicle in German and in
an asterisk *. English in the interactive Owner's Manual
The equipment in your vehicle may vary, on the Internet at:
depending on the model, the ordered items, www.mercedes-benz.de/betriebsanlei-
the country specifications and availability. tung
The illustrations in this manual show a left-
hand-drive vehicle. The arrangement of the
switches, levers, stowage compartments,
etc. will differ accordingly in a right-hand-
drive vehicle.
Mercedes-Benz is constantly updating its
vehicles to the state of the art and therefore
reserves the right to introduce changes in
design, equipment and technical features at
any time. You cannot, therefore, base any
claims on the data, illustrations or descrip-
tions in this manual.
Please consult a Mercedes-Benz Service
Centre if you have any questions.
The Owner’s Manual, Brief Instructions,
Service Booklet and supplements specific to
vehicle equipment belong with the vehicle.
You should always keep them in the vehicle
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 2

Contents
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
At a glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Practical advice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
2
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 3

Index
1, 2, 3 ... System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Air pump, electric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255

Windowbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Ambient lighting
4MATIC (permanent four-wheel Air cleaner Setting (on-board computer) . . . . . 136
drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 Antifreeze concentration . . . . . 389, 390
7G–TRONIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Air conditioning Anti-lock braking system
2-zone Thermatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 see ABS
A 4-zone Thermotronic . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Anti-theft alarm system
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) . . . . . 58 Activating/deactivating . . . . . . . . . 169 see ATA
Display message . . . . . . . . . . 258, 269 Activating/deactivating air-recir- Anti-theft systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 culation mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Acceleration Air-recirculation mode with con- ASSYST PLUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354 venience opening/closing feature . 176 ATA (anti-theft alarm system) . . . . . . 62
Accident Auxiliary heating/ventilation . . . . . 177 Switching off the alarm . . . . . . . . . . 62
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 Controlling automatically . . . . . . . . 170 Audible warning signal . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Active Service System Cooling with air dehumidification . . 169 AUTO lights
see ASSYST PLUS Demisting the windscreen . . . . . . . 174 Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
ADAPTIVE BRAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Malfunction indicator lamp . . . . . . 283 Automatic car wash . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Adaptive brake lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Misted-up windows . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Automatic transmission
Adaptive damping system Rear compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Changing gear yourself . . . . . . . . . 116
see ADS Rear window heating . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Display in the speedometer . . . . . . 115
ADS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Setting the air distribution . . . . . . . 173 Driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Airbag Setting the airflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Emergency running mode . . . . . . . 297
Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Setting the air vents . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Control unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Setting the temperature . . . . . . . . . 170 One-touch gearshifting . . . . . . . . . 116
Driver's . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Setting the temperature (rear Program selector button . . . . . . . . 117
Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 compartment) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 Releasing the parking lock man-
Front passenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Switching the residual heat func- ually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF warning tion on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Selector lever positions . . . . . . . . . 115
lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 see Climate control Shift ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Sidebags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Airmatic DC (Dual Control) . . . . . . . . 156 Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
3
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 4

Index
Automatic transmission Display Removing/fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332 Brake lamps

message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 Vehicle battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 Adaptive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Auxiliary heating . . . . . . . . . . . . 177, 304 Voltage (on-board computer) . . . . . 127 Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 Belt force limiters Brake system
Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Display message . . . . . . . . . . 268, 269
Setting (on-board computer) . . . . . 133 Belt height adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Auxiliary ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Belt reel (Easy-Pack fix kit) . . . . . . . . 203 Bulb
Axle load, maximum permissible Belt tensioners Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314, 315
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370, 371, 372, 373, 374 Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Dipped-beam headlamps . . . . . . . . 314
Belt warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Licence plate lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
B Bonnet Main-beam headlamps . . . . . . . . . . 314
Bonnet catch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 Parking lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Ball coupling
Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Side lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Folding in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 Turn signal lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Opening/closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Folding out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 see Lamp
Bonnet release lever
BAS (Brake Assist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Bulbs
Release lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Battery Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Boot
Changing (auxiliary heating
Emergency release . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
remote control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Locking separately . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 C
Changing (key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Opening/closing (manually) . . . . . . . 70
Changing (KEYLESS GO key) . . . . . 310 Calling up a malfunction
Boot/luggage compartment
Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332 see Message memory menu
Opening/closing (automatically) . . . 73
Checking (key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Boot lid
Checking (KEYLESS GO key) . . . . . 310 Automatic car wash . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Check lamp (key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 Distronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Brake
Check lamp (KEYLESS GO key) Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69, 310 High-pressure cleaners . . . . . . . . . 245
Brake Assist
Disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 Parktronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
see BAS
Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 Plastic trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Maintenance (vehicle) . . . . . . . . . . 329 Rear window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Reconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333 Side windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
4
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 5

Index
Tail pipes (AMG vehicles) . . . . . . . . 247 Child seat Cornering light

Trailer tow hitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Automatic recognition . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
CD player/CD changer Automatic recognition (malfunc- Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Operating (on-board computer) . . . 129 tion) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Central locking Integrated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Cup holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Automatic locking (on-board com- ISOFIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
puter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 D
From the luggage compartment Suitable positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Cigarette lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 Dashboard
(outside) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Cockpit see Cockpit
KEYLESS GO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68, 69 see Instrument cluster
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Central locking/unlocking button . . . 70 Date
Collapsible wheel
Central unlocking Setting (on-board computer) . . . . . 134
Pumping up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Daytime driving lights
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Storage location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
KEYLESS GO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68, 69 Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365 see Constant headlamp mode
Centre console COMAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Delayed switch-off
Lower section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 On-board computer . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Exterior lighting (on-board com-
Upper section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 see separate operating instructions puter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Changing a wheel Constant headlamp mode Interior lighting (on-board com-
puter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
see Flat tyre Setting (on-board computer) . . . . . 135
Consumption statistics (on-board Diesel
Child-proof locks
computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Low outside temperatures . . . . . . . 221
Rear doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Diesel engine
Side windows (rear) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Convenience closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Winter driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Children Digital speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Checking the level . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Fastening seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Dipped-beam headlamps
Display message . . . . . . . . . . 267, 271
in the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Mixture ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388 Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Restraint systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Symmetrical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Displaying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
5
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 6

Index
Service display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 ADAPTIVE BRAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 E

Symbol messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 Adaptive brake lamps . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Text messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 BAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Easy-entry/exit feature
up (AMG menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 EBV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Activating/deactivating (on-
Distance warning function . . . . . . . . 149 ESP® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 board computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Distance warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Driving system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Easy-entry feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Distronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 4MATIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Easy-exit feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Cleaning the sensors . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Airmatic DC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Easy-Pack fix kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Easy-Pack stowage box . . . . . . . . . . 204
Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 Distronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Easy-Pack system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Distance warning function . . . . . . . 149 HOLD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 EBV (electronic brake-power distri-
Driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Parktronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 bution) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 Speedtronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Door Driving tip Electrical/electronic equipment
Automatic locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 Retrofitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Distronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Electronic brake-power distribution
Emergency locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 Driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 see EBV
Emergency unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . 306 Driving on flooded roads . . . . . . . . 238 Electronic Stability Program
Opening (from the inside) . . . . . . . . 69 Driving on wet roads . . . . . . . . . . . 238 see ESP®
Door control panel Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 e mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 Emergency engine starting . . . . . . . 339
Drinks holder DVD audio Emergency key element
see Cup holder Operating (on-board computer) . . . 129 Lost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Driver's airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 DVD video Emergency locking
Driver's door Operating (on-board computer) . . . 130 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Unlocking (KEYLESS GO) . . . . . . . . . 69 Dynamic driving seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Emergency running mode
Driver's seat position . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Selecting seat adjustment (on- Automatic transmission . . . . . . . . . 297
Driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 board computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Driving safety system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
ABS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
6
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 7

Index
Emergency unlocking Exterior lighting Foglamps

Boot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 Delayed switch-off (on-board Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Folding bench seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 Exterior mirror parking position Folding out/folding back . . . . . . . . . 87
Engine Storing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92, 94 Fording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 Exterior mirrors Frequencies
Running irregularly . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296 Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Garage door opener . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Starting problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 Anti-dazzle mode (automatic) . . . . . 92 Telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Starting with KEYLESS GO . . . . . . . 111 Folding in/out (automatically) . . . . . 92 Front airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Starting with the key . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Folding in/out (electrically) . . . . . . . 91 Front-passenger airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348 Folding in when locking (on-board Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Engine diagnostic warning lamp . . . 288 computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Engine electronics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345 Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 Parking position . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92, 94 Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Engine number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347 Resetting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385 Storing settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Fuel consumption . . . . . . . . . . . 379, 380
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 Exterior view Fuel filler flap
Checking the oil level (dipstick) . . . 224 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Opening/closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Checking the oil level (on-board Fuel line
computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 F Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 Fuel tank
Fastening seat belts
Display message . . . . . . . . . . 224, 277 Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Filler neck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 Range (on-board computer) . . . . . . 140
Fire extinguisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Temperature display (on-board Fuse allocation chart . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
First-aid kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Fuse box
Flat tyre
Topping up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 Boot/luggage compartment . . . . . 341
MOExtended run-flat system . . . . . 328
ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) . 60 Dashboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Preparing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Activating/deactivating . . . . . . . . . . 60 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
TIREFIT kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Display message . . . . . . . . . . 260, 269
Floormat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60, 285
7
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 8

Index
G NECK-PRO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

Removing (rear) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26, 28
Garage door Head restraints Selecting the language (on-board
Opening/closing (with the remote Resetting triggered NECK-PRO computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 Instrument lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Garage door opener . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 Heating Integrated child seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Clearing the memory . . . . . . . . . . . 216 see Air conditioning Intelligent Light System . . . . . . . . . . 103
Frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391 High-pressure cleaners . . . . . . . . . . . 245 Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Programming the remote control . . 214 HOLD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Menu (on-board computer) . . . . . . 137
Gear indicator (on-board computer) 126 Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 Interior lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Gearshift program Ambient (on-board computer) . . . . 136
HomeLink®
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Automatic control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
see Garage door opener
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts . . . . . 344 Delayed switch-off (on-board
Glove compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
I
Gross vehicle weight, maximum Manual control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
permissible . . . . 369, 371, 372, 373, 374 Immobiliser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Reading lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Indicator and warning lamp Interior motion sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
H Brakes (red) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 ISOFIX child seat securing system . . 54
Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Headlamp Distronic (red) . . . . . . . . . . . . 149, 286
Misting up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 J
Engine diagnostic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Headlamps Jack
ESP® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60, 285
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF . . . . 49, 283
Cleaning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Storage location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Reserve fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Headlamps delayed switch-off Jump-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
see Exterior lighting delayed switch-off Jump leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
SRS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41, 289
Head restraint
Tyre pressure monitor . . . . . . . . . . 289
Adjusting (front) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79, 80 K
Indicator and warning lamps . . . . . . 285
Adjusting (rear) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Indicator lamp Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Luxury . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79, 81
see Indicator and warning lamp Changing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . 310
8
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 9

Index
Checking the battery . . . . . . . . . . . 310 Lashing eyelets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Locking

Convenience closing . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Licence plate lighting Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 Emergency locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Factory setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66, 67 Lighting From the inside (central locking
Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 see Lights button) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 Lights Luggage compartment enlarge-
Modifying the programming . . . . . . . 66 Active light function . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 ment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
KEYLESS GO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Automatic headlamp mode . . . . . . 100 Luggage compartment floor
Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Constant headlamp mode . . . . . . . . 99 extending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Changing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . 310 Cornering light function . . . . . . . . . 103 opening/closing . . . . . . . . . . 193, 195
Checking the battery . . . . . . . . . . . 310 Dipped-beam headlamps . . . . . . . . . 99 removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Closing the boot lid automatically . . 74 Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 stowage well, under . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Convenience closing . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100, 104 Luggage cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Factory settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Hazard warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . 102 Luggage net
Losing the key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 Headlamp flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Front-passenger footwell . . . . . . . . 190
Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 Headlamp range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Luggage well
Modifying the programming . . . . . . . 68 Light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Removing/fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Main-beam headlamps . . . . . . . . . . 101 Lumbar support
Key positions Motorway mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 see Lumbar support
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Rear foglamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Luxury head restraint . . . . . . . . . . 79, 81
KEYLESS GO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Switching off (display message) . . . 275
Kickdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117, 119 Turn signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 M
LIM indicator lamp
Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Main-beam headlamps
L
Distronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Lamp Main fuse box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Variable Speedtronic . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 Maintenance
Load compartment load, maximum
Lamps Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370, 371, 372, 373, 374
see Indicator and warning lamp Malfunction memory
Loading guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Language see Message memory menu
Selecting (on-board computer) . . . 133
9
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 10

Index
Manual gearshift program . . . . . . . . 118 Mirror N

Manual transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Sun visor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Massage function (PULSE) . . . . . . . . . 85 see Exterior or rear-view mirror Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Maximum speed Mobile phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 Navigation menu (on-board com-
Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 puter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Memory card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 see separate operating instructions
Operating (on-board computer) . . . 129 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345 NECK-PRO head restraint . . . . . . . . . . 47
see separate operating instructions Own number sending . . . . . . . . . . . 212 Resetting triggered NECK-PRO
Memory function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Run-on time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Menu (on-board computer) . . . . . . . . 124 Stowage compartment . . . . . . . . . . 206
AMG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Telephone menu (on-board com- O
Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 puter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Oil
Distronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Modifying the programming Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Topping up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Message memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 KEYLESS GO key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Oil level
Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 MOExtended run-flat system* . 229, 328 Checking (dipstick) . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Resetting to factory settings . . . . . 132 MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Checking (on-board computer) . . . 223
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Operation (on-board computer) . . . 129 On-board computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Standard display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 see separate operating instructions AMG menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Submenu overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Multi-contour seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Audio menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Multi-function display . . . . . . . . 120, 123 Convenience submenu . . . . . . . . . . 133
Trip computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Multi-function steering wheel . . . . . 122 Display messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Distronic menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Message DVD menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
see Display message Dynamic driving seat submenu . . . 139
see Indicator and warning lamp Factory settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
see Message memory menu Heating submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Minispare emergency spare wheel Instrument cluster submenu . . . . . 132
Storage location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 Lighting submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365 Message memory menu . . . . . . . . . 131
10
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 11

Index
Navigation menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Parking lamps PRE-SAFE® System

Settings menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Standard display menu . . . . . . . . . 125 Parking lock Program selector button
Telephone menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Releasing manually (automatic Automatic transmission . . . . . . . . . 117
Time/date submenu . . . . . . . . . . . 132 transmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 Pulling away . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Trip computer menu . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Parking position
TV menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Exterior mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 R
Vehicle submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Parktronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
One-touch gearshifting . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Activating/deactivating . . . . . . . . . 160 RACETIMER (on-board computer) . . 127
Operating system Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 Radio
see On-board computer Range of the sensors . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Changing a station (on-board
Outside temperature display . . . . . . 121 Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
On-board computer . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Warning display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 see separate operating instructions
Overhead control panel PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF warning Radio-controlled equipment
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49, 283 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Own number sending (mobile Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 Rain closing feature
phone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 Permanent four-wheel drive Sliding/tilting sunroof . . . . . . . . . . 182
see 4MATIC Rain sensor
P Permanent Speedtronic . . . . . . . . . . 154 Windscreen wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Petrol Range (on-board computer) . . . . . . . 140
Paint code number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346 R button
Minimum grade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Panorama sliding sunroof . . . . . . . . . 183 see Reset button
Plastic hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Opening/closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 Rear bench seat
Plastic trim
Raising/lowering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Folding forward/back . . . . . . 195, 198
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Resetting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 Rear foglamp
Power supply (trailer) . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Power windows
Parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Rear seat backrest
see Side window
Parktronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Pre-emptive occupant safety system
Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 see PRE-SAFE®
PRE-SAFE® system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
11
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 12

Index
Rear-view mirror Restraint System Seat belt

Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 see SRS Adjusting the height . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Anti-dazzle (manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Restraint systems Fastening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Anti-dazzle mode (automatic) . . . . . 92 For children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97, 290
Rear window Retaining hooks (boot) . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Seat cushion
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 Rev counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Removing (rear bench seat) . . 197, 200
Rear window blind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 Reverse gear Seat heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Rear window heating . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Engaging (automatic transmission) 115 Seat ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Malfunction indicator lamp . . . . . . 283 Engaging (manual transmission) . . 115 Malfunction indicator lamp . . . . . . 282
Rear window wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Reversing lamp Securing a load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Replacing the wiper blade . . . . . . . 316 Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 Selector lever
Refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 Roller sunblind Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Remote control Opening/closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Auxiliary heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Rear side window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 Service
Changing the batteries (auxiliary Rear window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
heating) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311 Roof load, maximum Service display
Garage door opener . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370, 371, 372, 373, 374 see ASSYST PLUS
Programming (garage door Roof rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Service indicator
opener) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 Run-on time (mobile phone) . . . . . . . 212 see ASSYST PLUS
Replacing the wiper blades . . . . . . . 315 Service products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Reserve S Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Safety net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Reserve fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378 Windscreen washer fluid . . . . . . . . 390
Seat
Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 Settings
Fuel tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378 Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77, 78, 80
Calling up a stored setting . . . . . . . . 94
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 Correct driver's seat position . . . . . . 97
Factory (key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66, 67
Reset button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Storing settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Factory (KEYLESS GO) . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Restraint system Factory (on-board computer) . . . . . 132
Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
12
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 13

Index
Shift ranges Speedometer Centre console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

Automatic transmission . . . . . . . . . 116 Digital speedometer (on-board Centre console (rear) . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Display in the speedometer . . . . . . 115 computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Glove compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Sidebags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Segments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Rear seat armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Side window Setting the unit (on-board com- Stowage compartments
Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 puter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Opening/closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Speedtronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Stowage space
Resetting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Cup holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Side windows Permanent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Stowage well
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 Variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Boot floor (underneath) . . . . . . . . . 192
Skibag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 SRS (Supplemental Restraint Sys- underneath luggage compart-
Sliding/tilting sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . 180 tem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 ment floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Rain closing feature . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Submenu (on-board computer) . . . . 132
Resetting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 Standard display (on-board com- Convenience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Sliding sunroof puter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Dynamic driving seat . . . . . . . . . . . 139
see Panorama sliding/tilting sunroof Selecting the display . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
see Sliding/tilting sunroof Station Instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 see Radio Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Socket Status line (on-board computer) . . . 123 Time/date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Cockpit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 Selecting the display . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Rear compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 Steering wheel Summer opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Spare wheel Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Sun visor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 Buttons (on-board computer) . . . . . 122 Supplemental Restraint System
Storage location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 Storing settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 see SRS
Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365 Steering wheel gearshift paddles . . 118 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Spectacles compartment . . . . . . . . . 206 Steering wheel heating . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Speed Malfunction indicator lamp . . . . . . 283 Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 Stowage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . 205 Surround lighting
Speed limiter Armrest (in front) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Switching on/off (on-board com-
Speedtronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Armrest (under) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 puter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
13
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 14

Index
Switching off the alarm Thermatic Trailer loads

ATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Malfunction indicator lamp . . . . . . 283 Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Thermotronic Trailer tow hitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
T Malfunction indicator lamp . . . . . . 283 Notes on care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Third brake lamp Trailer towing
Tailgate
Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 Driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Through-loading feature . . . . . . . . . . 195 Mounting dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Emergency unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Tightening torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 Parktronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Limiting the opening angle . . . . . . . . 76
Time Transmission output (maximum)
Opening/closing (manually) . . . . . . . 70
Lap time (on-board computer) . . . . 127 Telephone/two-way radio . . . . . . . 345
Tail lamps
Setting (on-board computer) . . . . . 134 Transport (vehicle) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Setting the time (on-board com- Trip computer
Tank capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
puter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Menu (on-board computer) . . . . . . 139
Technical data
Timer (on-board computer) . . . . . . . 127 Trip meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
TIREFIT kit Resetting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Storage location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 Turn signal lamps
Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 Display message . . . . . . . . . . 273, 274
Trailer loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Total distance recorder TV
Tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27, 29 Operating (on-board computer) . . . 130
Vehicle dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Resetting the trip meter . . . . . . . . . 121 Two-way radio
Vehicle weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Tow-away protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 Tyre grip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Telephone
Towing eye Tyre pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
see Mobile phone
Fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338 Calling up (on-board computer) . . 232
Telescopic lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 Display message . . . . . . . . . . 262, 278
Telescopic rod (Easy-Pack fix kit) . . 204
Tow-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 Table (see Fuel filler flap) . . . . . . . . 219
Temperature
Trailer see Tyre pressure
Engine oil (on-board computer) . . . 126
7-pin connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 Tyre pressure loss warning system 230
Outside temperature . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Display message . . . . . . 268, 272, 273 Tyre pressure monitor
Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
14
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 15

Index
Tyre pressures Vehicle battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 Wheels

Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356 Vehicle dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366 General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Tyres Vehicle electronics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345 Interchanging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Direction of rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 Vehicle identification number Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346, 347 Windowbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357 Vehicle identification plates . . . . . . 346 Windows
Tyre tread . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 Vehicle level Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Cleaning the windscreen . . . . . . . . 246
U Setting (AIRMATIC DC) . . . . . . . . . 156 Side windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Vehicle tool kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 Windscreen
Unit for distance
Vehicle weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Setting (on-board computer) . . . . . 133
Infrared reflecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Unladen weight
W Windscreen washer fluid . . . . . . . . . 390
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369, 370, 372, 373, 374
Topping up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Unlocking Warning and indicator lamp Windscreen washer fluid reservoir
Emergency unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . 306 ABS (yellow) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226, 390
From the inside (central unlocking LIM (Cruise control) . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Windscreen washer reservoir
button) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 LIM (Distronic) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Up (display message) . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 LIM (variable Speedtronic) . . . . . . . 152 Windscreen washer system . . . . . . . 390
Warning signal
Windscreen wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
V Audible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Warning triangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Variable Speedtronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Washer fluid Replacing the wiper blades . . . . . . 315
Vehicle
Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 Winter diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Emergency unlocking . . . . . . . 306, 307
Wearing seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Winter driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234, 235
Individual settings (on-board com-
Wheel bolts Winter tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
puter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Tightening torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 Limiting the speed (on-board com-
Leaving parked up . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Wheel chock puter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Tow-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Transporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
15
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 16

Introduction
Protection of the environment

Protection of the environment RDo not carry any unnecessary weight in Returning used vehicles
the vehicle.
Mercedes-Benz will take back your
H Environmental note RKeep an eye on the vehicle’s fuel con- Mercedes-Benz to dispose of it in an environ-
Daimler's declared policy is one of integra- sumption. mentally-responsible manner, in accordance
ted environmental protection. RRemove roof racks once you no longer with the European Union (EU) End of Life
Our objectives are to use the natural need them. Vehicles Directive.
resources which form the basis of our exis- RA
The End of Life Vehicles Directive applies to
regularly serviced vehicle will contrib-
tence on this planet sparingly and in a man- vehicles of up to 3.5 t gross vehicle weight, in
ute to environmental protection. You
ner which takes the requirements of both accordance with national regulations. For
should therefore adhere to the service
nature and humanity into consideration. several years, Mercedes-Benz has been
intervals.
You too can help to protect the environ- meeting all the legal requirements for a
RAlways have maintenance work carried design which allows for recycling and re-use.
ment by operating your vehicle in an envi-
ronmentally responsible manner. out at a qualified specialist workshop, There is a network of return points and dis-
e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. assembly plants which can recycle your vehi-
Fuel consumption and the rate of engine,
transmission, brake and tyre wear depend Personal driving style cle in an environmentally-responsible man-
on the following factors: RDo not depress the accelerator pedal ner. The options for recycling vehicles and
ROperating conditions of your vehicle when starting the engine. parts are constantly being developed and
improved. This means that your Mercedes-
RYour personal driving style RDo not warm up the engine when the Benz will also continue to meet even the
vehicle is stationary. increased recycling quotas in the future in
You can influence both factors.
Therefore, please bear the following in RDrive carefully and maintain a safe dis- good time. You can obtain further information
mind: tance from the vehicle in front. from your national Mercedes-Benz homepage
RAvoid
or your national hotline number.
Operating conditions frequent, sudden acceleration.
RAvoid short trips as these increase fuel RChange gear in good time and only use
consumption. each gear for up to 2 / 3 of its maximum
RMake sure that the tyre pressures are engine speed.
always correct. RSwitch off the engine in stationary traffic.
16
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 17

Introduction
Operating safety
Operating safety under coverings, could cause the safety electronic systems are networked via inter-
systems of your vehicle to stop working faces. Tampering with these electronic sys-
Safety notes properly. The safety systems would thus no tems could cause malfunctions in systems
G Risk of accident and injury longer protect you and other persons as which have not been modified. Such mal-
intended. In addition, there is the danger functions can seriously jeopardise the vehi-
All work on the vehicle and, in particular,
that you may lose control of your vehicle cle’s operating safety and your own safety
work relevant to safety or on safety-related
and thus cause an accident. as well.
systems must be carried out at a qualified
specialist workshop. The specialist work- All work and alterations to the vehicle, e.g. Therefore have all work on and modifica-
shop must have the necessary specialist installations or modifications, should there- tions to electronic components carried out
knowledge and tools to carry out the work fore be carried out at a qualified specialist by a qualified workshop.
required. Mercedes-Benz recommends workshop.
that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service
Centre for this purpose. G Risk of accident Vehicle registration
A heavy impact to the underbody, tyres or
G Risk of accident and injury wheels, for example when bottoming out on Mercedes-Benz may ask its Service Centres
rough terrain or driving over an obstacle at to carry out technical inspections on certain
Some safety systems only function when
high speed, could damage your vehicle. As vehicles to improve their quality or safety.
the engine is running. Therefore, do not
switch off the engine when driving. Other- a result, you could cause an accident. This If you did not purchase your vehicle from an
wise, the safety systems in your vehicle also applies to vehicles which are equipped authorised specialist dealer and your vehicle
may no longer function correctly and with underbody protection. has never been inspected at a Mercedes-
thereby not provide you or others with the For this reason, drive slowly over obstacles, Benz Service Centre, it is possible that your
intended degree of protection. This also avoid bottoming out the vehicle in rough vehicle is not registered in your name with
increases the danger of your losing control terrain and, if necessary, have your vehicle Mercedes-Benz. Mercedes-Benz can only
of your vehicle and thereby the risk of caus- checked at a qualified specialist workshop. inform you about vehicle checks if it has your
ing an accident. registration data.
G Risk of accident It is advisable to register your vehicle with a
G Risk of accident and injury If work on electronic equipment and its Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
Work carried out incorrectly, or alterations software is carried out incorrectly, this
equipment could stop functioning. The Z
made to the vehicle, e.g. rerouting of cables
17
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 18

Introduction
Operating safety
Inform Mercedes-Benz as soon as possible
about any change in address or vehicle own-
ership.
Correct use
Observe the following information when using
your vehicle:
RThe safety notes in this manual
RThe "Technical data" section in this manual
RNational road traffic regulations

RNational road traffic licensing regulations
G Risk of injury
Various warning stickers are affixed to your
vehicle. Their purpose is to draw your atten-
tion, and the attention of others, to various
dangers. Therefore, do not remove any
warning stickers unless the sticker clearly
states that you may do so.
If you remove the warning stickers, you or
others could be injured by failing to recog-
nise certain dangers.
18
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 19

At a glance
Exterior view ....................................... 20

Cockpit ................................................. 22
Instrument cluster .............................. 26
Multi-function steering wheel ............ 30
Centre console .................................... 31
Overhead control panel ...................... 34
Door control panel .............................. 35
Stowage compartments ..................... 36
19
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 20

At a glance
Exterior view
Exterior view
20
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 21

At a glance
Exterior view
Function Page Function Page
1 Luggage compartment/ 8 Exterior mirrors 91

boot
Parking aid* 92
Opening and closing 70
9 Windscreen wipers, opera-
Spare wheel 254 tion 105
Vehicle tool kit 254 Cleaning the wiper blades 246
Vehicle battery 329 Replacing the wiper blades 315
2 Rear lights 311 a Opening the bonnet 222
3 Rear window heating 175 Engine oil 223
4 Fuel filler flap 218 Coolant 225
Fuel requirements 219 b Front lights 311

5 Opening and closing the c Fitting the front towing eye 337
doors 66
d Tyres and wheels 227
6 Demisting the windscreen 174
Checking the tyre pressure 229
Cleaning the windows 246
Flat tyre, fitting the spare
7 Sliding/tilting sunroof* 180 wheel 317
Panorama sliding sunroof* 183 e Fitting the rear towing eye 337
* optional
21
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 22

At a glance
Cockpit
Cockpit
Cockpit, left-hand-drive vehicles
22
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 23

At a glance
Cockpit
Function Page Function Page Function Page
1 Combination switch with: 7 Parktronic* warning dis- g Adjusts the steering wheel
play 160 manually 89
• Main-beam headlamps 101
8 Controls Thermatic or 4- h Adjusts the steering wheel
• Turn signals 101 zone Thermotronic* 164 electrically* 89
• Windscreen wipers 105 Switches the rear window Switches the steering
• Estate: rear window heating on/off 175 wheel heating* on/off 90
wiper 106 j Parking brake
9 Overhead control panel 34 113
2 Cruise control lever for:
a Glove compartment 205 k Opens the bonnet 222
• Cruise control 143
b Opens the glove compart- l Releases the parking brake 113
• Distronic* 145 ment 205
m Door control panel 35
• Speedtronic 152 c Opens the spectacles com-
partment/mobile phone n Light switch 99
3 Instrument cluster 26 compartment 206
o Adjusts the headlamp
4 Multi-function steering d Controls COMAND APS* range 102
wheel 30 and the audio system*, see
the respective operating
5 Horn instructions
6 Linguatronic lever* – see e Centre console 31
separate operating instruc-
tions f Ignition lock 76
* optional
23
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 24

At a glance
Cockpit
Cockpit, right-hand-drive vehicles
24
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 25

At a glance
Cockpit
1 Overhead control panel 34 6 Instrument cluster h Adjusts the steering wheel

electrically* 89
2 Controls Thermatic or 4- 7 Multi-function steering
zone Thermotronic* 164 wheel 30 Switches the steering
wheel heating* on/off 90
Switches the rear window 8 Horn
heating on/off 175 j Parking brake 113
9 Linguatronic lever* – see
3 Parktronic* warning dis- separate operating instruc- k Centre console 31
play 160 tions
l Controls COMAND APS*
4 Combination switch with: a Adjusts the headlamp and the audio system*, see
range 102 the respective operating
• Main-beam headlamps 101 instructions
b Light switch 99
• Turn signals 101 m Opens the spectacles com-
c Door control panel 35 partment/mobile phone
• Windscreen wipers 105
compartment 206
d Releases the parking brake 113
• Estate: rear window
wiper 106 n Opens the glove compart-
e Opens the bonnet 222 ment 205
5 Cruise control lever for: f Ignition lock 76 o Glove compartment 205
• Cruise control 143 g Adjusts the steering wheel
• Distronic* 145 manually 89
• Speedtronic 152
* optional
25
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 26

At a glance
Instrument cluster
Instrument cluster
Instrument cluster, kilometres
26
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 27

At a glance
Instrument cluster
1 Turn signal indicator lamp, d Rev counter 121 n Engine diagnostic warning
left 101 lamp 288
e Multi-function display 123
2 ESP® warning lamp 285 o Tyre pressure warning
f Trip meter 121 lamp* 289
3 Segments
g Depending on the setting in p Brake system warning lamp 286
4 Distance warning lamp*1 286 the on-board computer: 134
q Clock 135
5 Turn signal indicator lamp, • Outside temperature2
right 101 r Reserve fuel warning lamp 291
• Digital speedometer
6 SRS warning lamp 289 s Fuel gauge
h Standard display 125
7 ABS warning lamp 285 t Reset button 120
j Automatic transmission*:
8 Seat belt warning lamp 290 gearshift program display 115 u Diesel engine: preglow indi-
cator lamp 111
9 Coolant temperature gauge 120 k Total distance recorder
a Coolant warning lamp 287 l Automatic transmission*:

selector lever position dis-
b Main-beam indicator lamp 101 play 115
c Dipped-beam indicator m Speedometer
lamp 99
1 On vehicles without Distronic*, the symbol lights up briefly but has no function.
2 Vehicles for the United Kingdom: the speed in km/h is always shown instead of the outside temperature.
* optional
27
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 28

At a glance
Instrument cluster
Instrument cluster, miles
28
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 29

At a glance
Instrument cluster
1 Turn signal indicator lamp, d Rev counter 121 n Engine diagnostic warning
left 101 lamp 288
e Multi-function display 123
2 ESP® warning lamp 285 o Tyre pressure warning
f Trip meter 121 lamp* 289
3 Segments
g Depending on the setting in p Brake system warning lamp 286
4 Distance warning lamp*3 286 the on-board computer: 134
q Clock 135
5 Turn signal indicator lamp, • Outside temperature4
right 101 r Reserve fuel warning lamp 291
• Digital speedometer
6 SRS warning lamp 289 s Fuel gauge
h Standard display 125
7 ABS warning lamp 285 t Reset button 120
j Automatic transmission*:
8 Seat belt warning lamp 290 gearshift program display 115 u Diesel engine: preglow indi-
cator lamp 111
9 Coolant temperature gauge 120 k Total distance recorder
a Coolant warning lamp 287 l Automatic transmission*:

selector lever position dis-
b Main-beam indicator lamp 101 play 115
c Dipped-beam indicator m Speedometer
lamp 99
3 On vehicles without Distronic*, the symbol lights up briefly but has no function.
4 Vehicles for the United Kingdom: the speed in km/h is always shown instead of the outside temperature.
* optional
29
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 30

At a glance
Multi-function steering wheel

Multi-function steering wheel Function Page Function Page
1 j Press briefly to k scrolling through the

k scroll back and forth telephone book.
in a menu.
2 Multi-function display 123
In the Audio/TV*/
DVD*menu: selects 3 æ • Selects submenus
a stored station, an - in the Settings
audio track or a menu
video scene*.
In the Telephone* • Adjusts the values
menu: switches to
the phone book and • Adjusts the volume
selects a name or
4 s Accepts or rejects/
phone number.
t ends a call*
j Press and hold in
5 è Selecting menus:
the Audio/TV*/
ÿ scrolls back and
DVD* menu:
forth
selects the next/
previous station or
selects an audio
track or a video
scene* using rapid
scrolling.
In the Telephone*
menu: starts rapid
* optional
30
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 31

At a glance
Centre console
Centre console Function Page Function Page
Lower section 1 Opens/closes the stowage 7 Sets the vehicle level* 156
compartment 206
8 Distronic*: sets the speci-
Opens/closes the ash- fied distance 148
tray* 209
9 Distronic*: switches the
2 KEYLESS GO* button 77 distance warning function
on/off 149
3 Manual transmission: gear
lever 115 a Automatic transmission*:
selects the gearshift pro-
Automatic transmission*: gram 117
selector lever 115
4 Vehicles with automatic

transmission*: switches
the auxiliary heating*/ven-
tilation* on/off 177
5 Deactivates Parktronic* 160
6 Sets AIRMATIC DC* 157

Vehicles with manual trans-
mission: switches the aux-
iliary heating*/ventilation*
on/off 177
* optional
31
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 32

At a glance
Centre console
Upper section
32
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 33

At a glance
Centre console
Function Page Function Page
1 Switches the seat heating* 9 Switches the seat ventila-

on the left-hand side on/off 85 tion* on the right-hand side
on/off 85
2 Saloon: rolls the rear win-
dow blind* up/down 208 a ATA indicator lamp* 62
3 Saloon: folds back the rear b Locks the vehicle 70

seat head restraints 82
c Opening button for CD
4 Switches the hazard warn- changer* – see separate
ing lamps on/off 102 operating instructions
5 5 PASSENGER AIRBAG d Switches the seat ventila-
OFF warning lamp5 49 tion* on the left-hand side
on/off 85
6 Unlocks the vehicle 70
7 Deactivates/activates
ESP® 60
8 Switches the seat heating*

on the right-hand side on/
off 85
5 The warning lamp lights up briefly when you turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock, even on vehicles which do not have automatic child seat recognition* on
the front-passenger seat. In that case it has no function and does not indicate that the front-passenger seat is equipped with automatic child seat recognition*.
* optional
33
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 34

At a glance
Overhead control panel

Overhead control panel Function Page Function Page
1 ò Switches the rear 9 Transmitter buttons for

interior lighting on/off 104 garage door opener* 214
2 ¡ Switches the auto- a Primes/deactivates tow-

matic interior lighting on/ away protection* 63
off 104
b Ambient light* 104
3 ð Switches the front
interior lighting on/off 104 c Interior light 104
4 X Switches the right- d X Switches the left-

hand reading lamp on/off 104 hand reading lamp on/off 104
5 Opens/closes the sliding/

tilting sunroof* 180
or
Opens/closes the pano-

rama sliding sunroof* 183
6 Primes/deactivates the
interior motion sensor* 63
7 Rear-view mirror 91
8 Reading lamp 104
* optional
34
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 35

At a glance
Door control panel

Door control panel Function Page
1 Opens the door 69
2 Adjusts the seat electri-

cally* 78
3 Stores settings for the seat,

exterior mirrors and steer-
ing wheel* 93
4 Adjusts the exterior mirrors 91
5 Opens/closes the side win-

dows 107
6 Saloon: unlocks the boot lid 70

Saloon with remote boot lid
closing feature*: automati-
cally opens or closes the
boot lid 73
Estate with remote boot lid
closing feature*: automati-
cally opens the tailgate 73
* optional
35
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 36

At a glance
Stowage compartments
36
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 37

At a glance
1 Glove compartment 205 e Driver's seat stowage com- l Stowage compartment/

partment with fire extin- telephone compartment
2 Front-passenger seat stow- guisher* 253 under the armrest 206
age compartment with first-
aid kit 253 f Sun visor card clip 207 m Stowage compartment in
the centre console at the
3 Door stowage pocket g Stowage compartment in rear 207
the centre console 206
4 Ashtray* 209 Socket 210
Socket 210
5 Ruffled pocket n Cup holder in the rear seat
Ashtray* 209 armrest 186
6 Door stowage pocket
Cigarette lighter* 209 o Stowage compartment in
7 Luggage net the rear seat armrest 207
h Spectacles compartment/
8 Stowage well under the mobile phone compart-
boot floor 192 ment 206
9 Hooks at the top of the boot 195 j Luggage net in the front-
passenger footwell 190
a Door stowage pocket
k Stowage compartment in
b Ruffled pocket front of the armrest 206
c Ashtray* 209 Cup holder* in the centre
console 186
d Door stowage pocket
* optional
37
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 38

At a glance
Function Page
1 EASY-PACK stowage box* 204
2 Stowage well underneath

the front section of the lug-
gage compartment floor 192
3 Bag hooks
4 Luggage net
5 Stowage well underneath

the rear section of the lug-
gage compartment floor 192
6 Loading tray
7 Folding box
8 Luggage net
* optional
38
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 39

Safety
Occupant safety .................................. 40

Driving safety systems ....................... 58
Anti-theft systems .............................. 62
39
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 40

Safety
Occupant safety
Occupant safety However, airbags are only an additional G Risk of accident and injury
restraint system which complements, but Always have maintenance work carried out
Notes on occupant safety does not replace, the seat belt. All vehicle at a qualified specialist workshop which
Seat belts, together with belt tensioners, belt occupants must wear their seat belt cor- has the necessary specialist knowledge
force limiters and airbags, are coordinated rectly at all times, even if the vehicle is and tools to carry out the work required.
restraint systems. They reduce the risk of equipped with airbags. This is because - on
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use
injury in defined accident situations and the one hand - airbags are not deployed in
a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this
thereby increase occupant safety. However, all types of accident, as in some situations
purpose.
seat belts and airbags generally do not pro- airbag deployment would not increase the
protection afforded to vehicle occupants, In particular, work relevant to safety or on
tect against objects penetrating the vehicle
provided they are wearing their seat belt safety-related systems must be carried out
from the outside.
correctly. On the other hand, airbag deploy- at a qualified specialist workshop. If this
To ensure that the restraint systems can work is not carried out correctly, the oper-
ment only provides increased protection if
deliver their full potential protection, you ating safety of your vehicle may be affec-
the seat belt is worn correctly because:
should ensure that: ted. There is a risk of an accident and injury.
Rthe seat belt helps to keep the vehicle
Rthe seat and head restraint are adjusted occupant in the best position in relation G Risk of injury
properly (Y page 77) to the airbag
Rthe
The restraint system may not work as inten-
seat belt has been fastened properly Rfor example, in a head-on collision, the ded if the following components have been
(Y page 95) seat belt can more adequately prevent modified or work on these components has
Rthe airbags can inflate properly if they are the occupant from being propelled not been performed correctly:
deployed (Y page 43) towards the force of the impact, and is Rrestraint system, consisting of the seat
Rthe steering wheel is adjusted properly thus better suited to prevent injury
belts and anchorages, belt tensioners,
(Y page 89) Therefore, in accident situations where an belt force limiters, airbags
Rthe restraint systems have not been modi- airbag is deployed, it only provides protec- Rwiring
fied tion in addition to the seat belt if the seat
belt is being worn correctly. Rnetworked electronic systems
i An airbag increases the protection of Airbags or belt tensioners could then fail,
vehicle occupants wearing a seat belt. e.g. in the event of an accident in which the
40
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 41

Safety
Occupant safety
deceleration force would normally be high The 1 warning lamp in the instrument depending on the vehicle's rate of longitudi-
enough to trigger the systems, or they cluster lights up when the ignition is switched nal deceleration in a collision, the airbag con-
could be triggered unintentionally. Never on. It goes out no later than a few seconds trol unit pre-emptively triggers the belt
carry out any modifications on the restraint after the engine is started. tensioners in the first stage.
systems. G Risk of injury i The front belt tensioners can only be trig-
Never tamper with electronic components If SRS is malfunctioning, individual systems gered if the belt tongue is correctly
and their software. may be activated unintentionally or not be engaged in the seat belt buckle.
triggered in the event of an accident with The front airbags are only deployed if there is
heavy braking. an even higher rate of vehicle deceleration in
SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) A malfunction has occurred if the 1 a longitudinal direction.
The SRS reduces the risk of occupants com- warning lamp: Your vehicle has adaptive, dual stage front
ing into contact with the vehicle's interior in Rdoes not light up when you switch on the airbags. When the first activation threshold
the event of an accident. It can also reduce ignition has been reached, the front airbag is filled
the forces to which occupants are subjected Rdoes not go out after the engine has been
with enough propellant gas to minimise the
during an accident. risk of injury. The front airbag is only fully
running for a few seconds
The SRS consists of: inflated if a second threshold is reached
Rlights up again once the engine is running within a few milliseconds, due to the control
Rthe 1 warning lamp
In this case, have SRS checked immedi- unit having detected further deceleration.
Rbelt tensioners ately at a qualified specialist workshop. Criteria for triggering belt tensioners and
Rbelt force limiters airbags
Rairbags In the first stage of a collision, the airbag con-
Triggering of belt tensioners, belt force
limiters and airbags trol unit evaluates the duration and direction
The 1 warning lamp of vehicle acceleration or deceleration in
In the event of a collision, the sensor in the order to determine whether it is necessary to
The SRS functions are checked regularly airbag control unit evaluates important phys- trigger the belt tensioner and/or airbag.
when you turn on the ignition and when the ical data such as duration, direction and force
The belt tensioner and airbag triggering
engine is running. Malfunctions can therefore of the vehicle deceleration or acceleration.
thresholds are variable and are adapted to the Z
be detected in good time. Based on the evaluation of this data, and
rate of deceleration of the vehicle. This proc-
41
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 42

Safety
Occupant safety
ess is pre-emptive in nature as the airbag Rthe deformation characteristics of the vehi- tensioner could be activated in an emer-
must be deployed during – and not at the end cle gency.
of – the collision. Rthe characteristics of the object with which If the seat belt is also equipped with a belt
i Airbags are not deployed in all types of the vehicle has collided, e.g. the other vehi- force limiter, the force exerted by the seat
accidents. They are controlled by complex cle belt on the seat occupant is reduced.
sensor technology and evaluation logic. Factors which can only be seen and measured Belt tensioners tighten the seat belts in an
This process is pre-emptive in nature as after a collision has occurred do not play a accident, pulling them close against the body.
airbag deployment must take place during decisive role in the deployment of an airbag, i Belt tensioners do not correct incorrect
the impact and must be adapted to provide nor do they provide an indication of it. seat positions or incorrectly fastened seat
calculated, additional protection for the The vehicle may be deformed significantly, belts.
vehicle occupants. Not all airbags are e. g. on the bonnet or the wing, without an
deployed in an accident. Belt tensioners do not pull occupants back
airbag being deployed. This is the case if only towards the backrest.
The different airbag systems work inde- parts which are relatively easily deformed are
pendently of each other. However, the affected and the necessary deceleration does The front belt force limiters are synchronised
deployment of each individual system will not occur. Conversely, airbags may be with the front airbags, which distribute the
depend on the type of accident determined deployed even though the vehicle suffers only forces exerted by the belt force limiters on
by the control system in the first stages of minor deformations. This is the case if, for the occupant over a greater area.
the collision (head-on collision, side impact example, very rigid vehicle parts such as lon- When the ignition is switched on, the belt ten-
and overturn) and the extent of the acci- gitudinal body members are affected and suf- sioner is triggered:
dent (in particular, the vehicle's rate of ficient deceleration occurs as a result. Ronly if the restraint systems are operational
deceleration or acceleration).
(the 1 warning lamp lights up after the
The rate of vehicle deceleration or accelera- Belt tensioners, belt force limiters ignition is switched on and goes out once
tion and the direction of the force are basi- the engine is running) (Y page 41)
cally determined by: The front seat belts and the outer seat belts
in the rear are equipped with belt tensioners. Rfor each three-point seat belt in the front of
Rthe distribution of forces during the colli- the vehicle when the belt tongue is
sion ! Do not engage the seat belt tongue in the engaged in the buckle
buckle on the front-passenger seat if the
Rthe collision angle Rin the event of a head-on or rear-end colli-
seat is not occupied. Otherwise the belt
sion if the vehicle decelerates or acceler-
42
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 43

Safety
Occupant safety
ates rapidly in a longitudinal direction your hearing, and a small amount of powder away from the middle of the driver's front
during the initial stages of the impact may also be released. The 1 warning lamp airbag cover as possible.
Rin certain situations if the vehicle over- lights up. RMove the front-passenger seat as far
turns, and the system determines that it The SRS/AIRBAG symbol indicates the loca- back as possible, especially if a child is
can provide additional protection tion of the airbags. secured in a child restraint system on the
When the belt tensioners are triggered you G Risk of injury seat.
will hear a bang, which will not cause any Airbags provide additional protection; they RVehicle occupants – in particular, chil-
harm to your hearing, and a small amount of are not, however, a substitute for seat dren – must not lean their head into the
powder may also be released. The 1 warn- belts. area of the window in which the sidebag/
ing lamp lights up. Observe the following notes to reduce the windowbag is deployed.
G Risk of injury risk of serious or even fatal injury if an air- RRearward-facing child restraint systems
If the seat belt tensioners have been trig- bag is deployed: must not be fitted to the front-passenger
gered, they provide no additional protec- RAll vehicle occupants — in particular preg- seat unless the front-passenger front air-
tion in the event of another accident. nant women — must wear their seat belt bag has been disabled. On the front-
Therefore, have belt tensioners which have correctly at all times and lean back passenger seat, the front-passenger
been triggered replaced at a qualified spe- against the backrest, which should be front airbag is only deactivated if a child
cialist workshop. positioned as close to the vertical as pos- restraint system with automatic child
Comply with safety regulations when dis- sible. The head restraint must support seat recognition is fitted to the front-
posing of belt tensioners. Any Mercedes- the back of the head at about eye level. passenger seat*. The 5 PASSENGER
Benz Service Centre can provide details of RAlways secure children less than AIRBAG OFF warning lamp must be con-
these regulations. 1.50 m tall or under 12 years of age in stantly lit.
suitable child restraint systems. If either the rearward-facing child
RAll
restraint system or the front-passenger
Airbags vehicle occupants must select a seat
position that is as far away from the air- seat* of your vehicle do not have auto-
Airbag deployment slows down and restricts bag as possible. The driver's seat posi- matic child seat recognition, children
the movement of the vehicle occupant. tion must allow the vehicle to be driven must be secured in a child restraint sys-
When the the airbags are triggered you will safely. The driver's chest should be as far tem on a suitable seat in the rear. If you
Z
hear a bang, which will not cause any harm to
* optional
43
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 44

Safety
Occupant safety
secure a forward-facing child restraint RDo not hang any hard objects, for exam- In order to prevent potential breathing dif-
system to the front-passenger seat, you ple coat hangers, on the grab handles or ficulties you should leave the vehicle as
must move the front-passenger seat as coat hooks. soon as it is safe to do so. You can also open
far back as possible. RDo not attach accessories, e.g. cup hold- the window to allow fresh air to enter the
RMake sure there are no heavy or sharp- ers, to the doors. interior. The powder does not constitute a
edged objects in pockets of clothing. health hazard and does not indicate that
It is not possible to rule out a risk of injuries there is a fire in the vehicle.
RDo not lean forwards, e.g. over the cover caused by an airbag due to the high speed
of the driver's front airbag, particularly at which the airbag is required to deploy. G Risk of injury
when the vehicle is in motion. The airbag parts are hot after the airbag has
RDo
G Risk of injury been deployed. Do not touch them, other-
not put your feet on the dashboard.
The airbag's functionality can only be guar- wise you may burn yourself.
ROnly hold the steering wheel by the rim. anteed if the following parts are not cov-
This allows the airbag to inflate fully. You Have the airbags checked at a qualified
ered and no badges or stickers are
could be injured if the airbag is deployed specialist workshop. Otherwise, occupants
attached to them:
and you are holding the inside of the are not protected by the airbags in the
RPadded steering wheel boss event of another accident.
steering wheel.
RFront-passenger front airbag cover
RDo not lean on the doors from inside the
vehicle. ROuter side of front seats Front airbags
RMake
The front airbags are designed to increase
sure that there are no people, ani- RRear door trims
protection for the driver's and front-
mals or objects between the vehicle
passenger head and chest.
occupants and the area of deployment of G Risk of injury
the airbag. When an airbag deploys, a small amount of
RDo not place any objects between the powder is released. The powder may cause
seat backrest and the door. short-term breathing difficulties to persons
suffering from asthma or other pulmonary
conditions.
44
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 45

Safety
Occupant safety
The driver's front airbag and front-passenger Driver's front airbag 1 deploys in front of the Appropriate seat covers can be obtained
front airbag are deployed: steering wheel; front-passenger front airbag from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
Rat the start of an accident with a high rate 2 deploys in front of and above the glove
compartment. The purpose of sidebag deployment is to
of vehicle acceleration or deceleration in a
enhance the level of protection for the thorax
longitudinal direction On vehicles with automatic child seat recog-
(but not the head, neck or arms) of the vehicle
Rif the system determines that airbag nition in the front-passenger seat*, the front-
occupants on the side of the vehicle on which
deployment can offer additional protection passenger front airbag 2 is only deployed if
the impact occurs.
to that provided by the seat belt the 5 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF warning
lamp in the centre console is not lit
Rif the seat belt is fastened (Y page 49). This means that there is not a
Rindependently of other airbags in the vehi- child restraint system with automatic child
cle seat recognition* fitted to the front-
Rif the vehicle overturns, but only if the sys- passenger seat or that a child restraint sys-
tem detects high vehicle deceleration in a tem with automatic child seat recognition*
longitudinal direction has been fitted to the front-passenger seat
incorrectly.
Sidebags
G Risk of injury Saloon shown as an example
If you wish to use seat covers, Mercedes- 1 Front sidebag
Benz recommends that, for safety reasons, 2 Rear sidebag*
you only use seat covers that have been
approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. The sidebag inflates next to the backrest side
cushions.
The seat covers must be equipped with a
special tear seam for sidebags. Otherwise,
the sidebag cannot deploy correctly and
1 Driver's front airbag would therefore fail to provide the intended
2 Front-passenger front airbag protection in the event of an accident. Z
* optional
45
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 46

Safety
Occupant safety
Sidebags 1 and 2 are deployed: PRE-SAFE® system
Ron the side on which an impact occurs PRE-SAFE® system takes pre-emptive meas-
Rat the start of an accident with a high rate ures to protect you in certain hazardous sit-
of lateral vehicle deceleration or accelera- uations.
tion, e.g. in a side impact PRE-SAFE® intervenes in the event of:
Rindependently of seat belt use Remergency braking situations, e.g. if BAS
Rindependently of the front airbags Brake Assist intervenes
Rindependently of the belt tensioners Rcritical situations involving driving dynam-
Rif
ics, e.g. if the vehicle oversteers or under-
the vehicle overturns, but only if the sys-
Saloon shown as an example steers significantly due to physical limits
tem detects high vehicle deceleration in a
1 Windowbag being exceeded
lateral direction and determines that side-
bag deployment can offer additional pro- Windowbags 1 are deployed: If you are driving faster than approximately
tection to that provided by the seat belt Rat the start of an accident with a high rate 30 km/h, PRE-SAFE® takes the following
of vehicle acceleration or deceleration in a measures in the aforementioned situations:
Windowbags lateral direction RIt tensions the front seat belts.
The purpose of the windowbags is to enhance
Ron the side on which an impact occurs RVehicles with memory functions*: it
the level of protection for the head (but not
chest or arms) of the vehicle occupants on Rindependently of the front airbags adjusts the front-passenger seat if this is in
the side of the vehicle on which the impact an unfavourable position.
Rregardless of whether the front-passenger
occurs. RIf the vehicle skids, it closes the sliding/
seat is occupied
The windowbags are integrated into the side tilting sunroof* and side windows so that
Rif the vehicle overturns and the system
of the roof frame and run from the front door only a small gap remains.
determines that windowbag deployment
(A-pillar) to the rear door (C-pillar). If the hazardous situation passes without
can offer additional protection to that pro-
vided by the seat belt resulting in an accident, PRE-SAFE® releases
the belt pretensioning. You can then reverse
all settings made by PRE-SAFE® again.
* optional
46
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 47

Safety
Occupant safety
If the seat belts are not released: restraints cannot provide the intended level G Risk of injury
X Move the backrest or the seat back slightly of protection. Do not use head restraint Do not leave children unsupervised in the
until the belt tension is reduced. covers. vehicle, even if they are secured in a child
The locking mechanism releases. restraint system. Children could injure
If the NECK-PRO head restraints are triggered
themselves on parts of the vehicle. They
G Risk of injury in an accident, you must reset the head
could also be seriously or even fatally
restraints on the driver's and front-passenger
Make sure when adjusting the seat that injured by prolonged exposure to extreme
seats (Y page 309). Head restraints that have
nobody can become trapped. heat or cold.
been triggered are tilted forwards.
Do not expose the child restraint system to
! Make sure that there are no objects in the direct sunlight. The metallic parts of the
footwell or behind the seats when adjusting Children in the vehicle child restraint system could heat up and the
the seats. You could otherwise damage the child could be burned by them.
seats and the objects. If a child is travelling in your vehicle, secure
the child using a child restraint system which If children open a door, they could injure
is appropriate to the size and age of the child themselves and others. They could get out
and recommended for Mercedes-Benz vehi- and injure themselves or be injured by a
NECK-PRO head restraint passing vehicle.
cles. Preferably, you should fit the restraint
NECK-PRO head restraints are designed to system to a suitable rear seat. Ensure that the Please also observe the information on
increase protection to the driver's and front- child is strapped in throughout the trip. HOLD. Relevant information can be found
passenger's head and neck. To this end, the You can obtain information about the correct in the index.
head restraints on the driver's and front- child restraint system from any Mercedes-
passenger seats are moved forwards and G Risk of injury
Benz Service Centre.
upwards in the event of a rear-end collision in An unsecured or incorrectly positioned load
the direction of travel. This provides better i It is advisable to use Mercedes-Benz care increases the risk of injury to the child in
head support. products to clean child restraint systems. the event of:
Information about this can be obtained
G Risk of injury Ran accident
from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
Head restraint covers prevent the NECK- Ra braking manoeuvre
PRO head restraints from triggering cor-
Ra sudden change of direction
rectly. Consequently, the NECK-PRO head Z
47
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 48

Safety
Occupant safety
Do not carry heavy or hard objects inside RIf you secure a child restraint system to Child restraint systems should preferably
the vehicle unless they are secured. You the front-passenger seat without auto- be fitted to the rear seats. Children are gen-
will find further information under "Loading matic child seat recognition*, you must erally better protected there.
guidelines" in the index. move the front-passenger seat as far The entire base of the child restraint system
back as possible. must always rest on the seat cushion.
RChildren must never travel sitting on the Never place objects, e.g. a cushion, under
Child restraint systems the child restraint system.
lap of another occupant. Due to the
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only forces occurring in the event of a sudden Only use child restraint systems with their
use the child restraint systems listed under change of direction, heavy braking or an original covers. Only replace damaged cov-
(Y page 53). accident, it would not be possible to ers with genuine Mercedes-Benz covers.
G Risk of injury restrain the child. The child could be For safety reasons, you should only use
To reduce the risk of serious or even fatal thrown against parts of the vehicle inte- child restraint systems which have been
injury to the child in the event of a sudden rior and be seriously or even fatally approved for use in Mercedes-Benz vehi-
change in direction, braking or an accident: injured. cles.
RChildren less than 1.50 m tall and under
G Risk of injury Child seat on the front-passenger seat
twelve years of age must always be
secured in special child restraint systems If the child restraint system is not correctly
on a suitable vehicle seat. This is neces- fitted to a suitable vehicle seat, it cannot
sary because the seat belts are not perform its protective function. The child
designed for children of this size. cannot be restrained in the event of a sud-
den change of direction, heavy braking or
RDo not secure children under twelve an accident. This may lead to serious or
years of age on the front-passenger seat. even fatal injuries. For this reason, when
Exception: the child is secured in a vehi- fitting a child restraint system, observe the
cle with automatic child seat recognition manufacturer's installation instructions
on the front-passenger seat* and is and the correct use of the child restraint
secured in a child restraint system with system.
automatic child seat recognition. Warning on the front-passenger sun visor
* optional
48
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 49

Safety
Occupant safety
rearward-facing child restraint system on Information about recommended child
a suitable rear seat. restraint systems is available at any
Ralways move the front-passenger seat to Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
the rearmost position if you secure a
child in a forward-facing child restraint Automatic child seat recognition on the
system on the front-passenger seat. front-passenger seat*
The front-passenger front airbag is not dis- If your vehicle does not have automatic child
abled: seat recognition on the front-passenger seat,
this is indicated by a special sticker. The
Ron vehicles without automatic child seat
sticker is affixed to the side of the dashboard
Warning symbol for a rearward-facing child recognition in the front-passenger seat* on the front-passenger side. It is visible when
restraint system Ron vehicles with automatic child seat rec- you open the front-passenger door.
G Risk of injury ognition on the front-passenger seat* if The warning lamp6 is located on the centre
If the front-passenger front airbag is not there is no child restraint system with console.
disabled: automatic child seat recognition fitted to
the front-passenger seat.
Ra child secured in a child restraint system
Ron vehicles with automatic child seat rec-
on the front-passenger seat could be
seriously and even fatally injured by the ognition on the front-passenger seat* if
front-passenger airbag deploying. This is the 5 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF warn-
especially likely if the child is in the imme- ing lamp is not lit.
diate vicinity of the front-passenger front To draw attention to this danger, there is an
airbag when it is deployed. appropriate warning sticker on the dash-
Ra child must never be secured on the board as well as on both sides of the sun
front-passenger seat in a rearward-facing visor on the front-passenger side.
child restraint system. Only secure a 1 5 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF warning
lamp
Z
6 Vehicles without automatic child seat recognition in the front-passenger seat: the warning lamp lights up briefly when you turn the key to position 2 in the ignition
lock. However, it has no function and does not indicate that there is automatic child seat recognition on the front-passenger seat.
* optional
49
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 50

Safety
Occupant safety
The front-passenger seat sensor system for or still active even when the front-passenger
child restraint systems detects whether a Ronly use a forward-facing child restraint front airbag is disabled.
special Mercedes-Benz child seat with auto- system on the front-passenger seat and
matic child seat recognition has been fitted. G Risk of injury
move the front-passenger seat to its rear- Do not place items of electronic equipment
In such cases, 5 PASSENGER AIRBAG most position.
OFF indicator lamp 1 lights up. The front- on the front-passenger seat, e.g.:
Rhave the automatic child seat recognition
passenger airbag is deactivated. Rlaptops, when switched on
checked at a qualified specialist work-
G Risk of injury shop. Rmobile phones
If the 5 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF warn- To ensure that the automatic child seat rec- Rcards with transponders, e.g. ski passes
ing lamp does not light up when the child ognition on the front-passenger seat func- or access cards
restraint system is fitted, the front- tions correctly, never place objects (such Signals from electronic equipment can
passenger front airbag has not been disa- as a cushion) under the child restraint sys- cause interference in the automatic child
bled. If the front-passenger front airbag is tem. The entire base of the child restraint seat recognition sensor system. This can
deployed, the child could be seriously or system must always rest on the seat cush- lead to a system malfunction. This may
even fatally injured. ion. An incorrectly fitted child restraint sys- cause the 5 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF
Proceed as follows: tem cannot perform its intended protective warning lamp to light up without there
Rdo not use a rearward-facing child function in the event of an accident, and being a child seat with automatic child seat
restraint system on the front-passenger could lead to injuries. recognition fitted. This means that the
seat. front-passenger airbag is not deployed dur-
Rfit
i The windowbag, the sidebag and the belt ing an accident. It is also possible that the
a rearward-facing child restraint sys-
tem on a suitable rear seat. tensioner on the front-passenger side are 5 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF warning
lamp will not light up briefly if you turn the
key in the ignition lock to position 2.
50
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 51

Safety
Occupant safety
Suitable positioning of the child restraint system
Saloon
Weight categories and Child restraint system Child restraint system Child restraint system Child restraint system on
ages on the front-passenger on the left-hand and on the centre rear seat the centre rear seat with
seat right-hand rear seats without through-load- through-loading fea-
ing feature* ture*
Group 0: up to 10 kg; Vehicles with automatic Universal or as recom- Universal or as recom- As recommended
Up to approximately child seat recognition* mended mended
9 months on the front-passenger
seat: as recommended7
Group 0+: up to 13 kg;
Up to approximately
18 months
Group I: 9 to 18 kg; Universal8 or as recom- Universal or as recom- Universal or as recom- Universal9 or as recom-
Between approximately mended mended mended mended
8 months and 4 years
Group II/III: 15 to 36 kg;

between approximately 3½
and 12 years
7 Only use child restraint systems with automatic child seat recognition.
Z
8 Move the front-passenger seat to its rearmost position.
9 Forward-facing child restraint systems in the "Universal" category.
* optional
51
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 52

Safety
Occupant safety
Estate
Weight categories and ages Child restraint system on the Child restraint system on the Child restraint system on the
front-passenger seat left-hand, right-hand and folding bench seat*
centre rear seats
Group 0: up to 10 kg; Vehicles with automatic child Universal or as recommended Not permissible
Up to approximately 9 months seat recognition* on the front-
passenger seat: as recommen-
Group 0+: up to 13 kg; ded10
Up to approximately 18 months
Group I: 9 to 18 kg; Universal11 or as recommended Universal or as recommended As recommended12

Between approximately 8 months
and 4 years
Group II/III: 15 to 36 kg; As recommended12 with the fol-

between approximately 3½ and lowing restrictions: permitted
12 years weight 15 to 25 kg, permitted
age 3½ to 7½ years
10 Onlyuse child restraint systems with automatic child seat recognition.

11 Move the front-passenger seat to its rearmost position.
12 Do not use a rearward-facing child restraint system.
* optional
52
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 53

Safety
Occupant safety
"Universal" category child restraint systems
can be recognised by their orange approval
label.
Example of an approval label on the child restraint

system
Recommended child restraint systems
Weight categories and Manufacturer Type Approval number Daimler order num- Automatic child seat
ages ber recognition
Group 0: up to 10 kg; Britax-Römer BABY SAFE PLUS E1 03 301146 A 000 970 10 00 Yes
Up to approximately
9 months
Group 0+: up to 13 kg; Britax-Römer BABY SAFE PLUS E1 03 301146 A 000 970 10 00 Yes
Up to approximately
18 months
Z
53
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 54

Safety
Occupant safety
Weight categories and Manufacturer Type Approval number Daimler order num- Automatic child seat
ages ber recognition
Group I: 9 to 18 kg; Britax-Römer DUO PLUS E1 03 301133 A 000 970 11 00 Yes

Between approximately
8 months and 4 years A 000 970 16 00 No13
Group II/III: 15 to 36 kg; Britax-Römer KID E1 03 301148 A 000 970 12 00 Yes

between approximately
3½ and 12 years A 000 970 17 00 No13
ISOFIX* child seat securing system in the child weighs more than 22 kg, secure On the rear seats, only use child restraint
the rear the child restraint system using a lap-shoul- systems with an ISOFIX child seat securing
ISOFIX is a standardised securing system for der belt. system which have been recommended for
specially-designed child restraint systems on use in Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
G Risk of injury An incorrectly fitted child restraint system
the rear seats. Securing rings for two child
restraint systems are fitted on the left and If the child restraint system is not correctly could come loose and seriously or even
right rear seats. fitted to a suitable vehicle seat, it cannot fatally injure the child or other vehicle occu-
perform its protective function. The child pants. When fitting the child restraint sys-
G Risk of injury cannot be restrained in the event of a sud- tem, make sure that it is engaged in the
A child restraint system secured by the ISO- den change of direction, heavy braking or securing rings on both sides.
FIX child seat securing system does not an accident. This may lead to serious or
provide sufficient protection for children even fatal injuries. For this reason, when G Risk of injury
weighing more than 22 kg. For this reason, fitting a child restraint system, observe the Please note that child restraint systems
do not secure children weighing more than manufacturer's installation instructions cannot provide a protective function if they
22 kg in a child restraint system secured by and the correct use of the child restraint or their retaining systems are damaged or
the ISOFIX child seat securing system. If system. have been subjected to a load in an acci-
13 For child restraint systems without automatic child seat recognition, move the front-passenger seat to the rearmost position.
* optional
54
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 55

Safety
Occupant safety
dent. This can result in serious or even fatal Integrated child seat* by the centre of the head restraint at
injury to the secured child in the event of The child seats are integrated into the right about eye level.
an accident, heavy braking or a sudden and left-hand sides of the seats of the rear RReplace an integrated child seat or pad-
change in direction. bench seat. They comply with the legal ded table that has been damaged or sub-
For this reason, have child restraint sys- requirements of ECE Regulation 44.03. jected to a heavy load as the result of an
tems and their anchorages which are dam- Mercedes-Benz recommends the integrated accident
aged or which have been subjected to a child seat for children from approximately RBe aware that children under two years
load in an accident checked immediately at two to twelve years or with a body weight of of age require a different child restraint
a qualified specialist workshop. 12.5 kg to 36 kg. system. Information about other child
For children between approximately two and restraint systems is available from any
! When fitting the child restraint system,
four years of age or weighing between Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
make sure that the seat belt for the middle
approximately 12.5 kg and 18 kg, you must RThe rear seat backrest in the vehicle
seat does not become trapped. It could
also use a padded table which has been spe- must be securely locked in position.
otherwise be damaged.
cially approved for the integrated child seat.
G Risk of injury
To reduce the risk of serious or even fatal
injury to the child in the event of a sudden
change in direction, braking or an accident:
RYou must follow the manufacturer's
installation instructions for the child seat
when fitting the padded table and fas-
tening the seat belt.
RDo not modify the integrated child seat
or padded table.
1 Securing rings
RWhen the child seat is occupied, adjust 1 Release handle
the head restraint to a position at which 2 Hook
the back of the child's head is supported Z
* optional
55
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 56

Safety
Occupant safety
Folding out the child seat Also observe the assembly instructions for Child-proof locks
X Pull release handle 1 forwards. the padded table and the additional warn- If children are travelling in the vehicle, you can
ings and information about risk of injury. activate the child-proof locks for the rear
X Push the child seat upwards and back until
it engages. doors.
X Pull the belt smoothly from the belt reel.
X Guide the lower lap section of the belt Child-proof locks for the rear doors
Fastening a child's seat belt
through hook 2. The child-proof locks on the rear doors enable
G Risk of injury you to secure each door individually. A locked
To reduce the risk of serious or even fatal X Engage the belt tongue in the buckle.
door cannot be opened from the inside. The
injury to the child in the event of a sudden X If the integrated child seat is being used door can be opened from the outside if the
change in direction, braking or an accident: without the padded table, make sure that vehicle is unlocked.
RThe shoulder belt section of the seat belt the belt:
G Risk of accident and injury
must be routed across the middle of the Ris routed as low as possible across the pel-
If children are travelling in the vehicle, acti-
child's shoulder – never across the vic area, in front of the hips vate the child-proof locks for the rear doors
child's neck – and be pulled tight against Ris tightened across the lap by pulling and the override switch for the rear win-
the child's chest. The lap section of the upwards on the child's shoulder belt dows. The children could otherwise open
seat belt must be routed across the the doors or windows while the vehicle is in
Ris tight and is routed across the middle of
child's pelvis – not across the abdomen motion and injure themselves or others.
– and be pulled tight against the child's the child's shoulder
body; retighten the belt strap if neces- Ris not twisted and does not pass across the
sary. child's neck or under the child's arm
RNever secure more than one child at a X Adjust the head restraint (Y page 81)
time in the child restraint system.
RThe belt must be routed through the Folding in the child seat
hook. X Pull release handle 1 forwards.
RThe belt strap must not be trapped or X Push the child seat back into the seat until
twisted, nor rub against any sharp edges. it engages.
56
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 57

Safety
Occupant safety
otherwise open the tailgate, doors or win- Override feature for the rear windows
dows while the vehicle is in motion and G Risk of accident and injury
injure themselves or others. If children are travelling in the vehicle, acti-
The child-proof lock for the tailgate prevents vate the child-proof locks for the rear doors
the tailgate from being opened from the and the override switch for the rear win-
inside. dows. The children could otherwise open
the doors or windows while the vehicle is in
motion and injure themselves or others.
Saloon shown as an example

1 To activate
2 To deactivate
X To activate: press locking lever upwards

1.
X Make sure that the child-proof locks are
working properly. 1 To activate
2 To deactivate
X To deactivate: press locking lever down-
1 Button
wards 2. X To activate: push the locking lever to the
left 1. 2 Indicator lamp
Child-proof lock for the tailgate (Estate) X Check that the child-proof lock is working X To activate: press button 1.
G Risk of accident and injury properly. Indicator lamp 2 lights up. The rear side
Activate the child-proof locks for the tail- windows can only be operated using the
X To release: press safety lever to the right
gate and the rear doors and the override switches on the driver's door.
2.
switch for the rear windows if children are
travelling in the vehicle. The children could Z
57
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 58

Safety
Driving safety systems

X To deactivate: press button 1. Driving safety systems For this reason, always adapt your driving
Indicator lamp 2 goes out. You can oper- style to suit the prevailing road and weather
Overview of driving safety systems conditions. Maintain sufficient distance
ate the rear side windows using the
switches in the rear compartment. In this section, you will find information about from other road users and objects on the
the following driving safety systems: road.
RABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
RBAS (Brake Assist System)

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
RAdaptive brake lamps
ABS regulates brake pressure in such a way
RESP® (Electronic Stability Program) that the wheels do not lock when you brake.
REBV (electronic brake-power distribution) This allows you to continue steering the vehi-
RADAPTIVE cle when braking.
BRAKE
ABS works from a speed of about 8 km/h
i In wintry road conditions, always use win- upwards, regardless of road surface condi-
ter tyres (M+S tyres) and, where necessary, tions. ABS works on slippery surfaces, even
snow chains. Only in this way will the driv- when you only brake gently.
ing safety systems described in this section G Risk of accident
work as effectively as possible. Do not depress the brake pedal several
G Risk of accident times in quick succession (pumping).
The risk of an accident is significantly Depress the brake firmly and evenly. Pump-
increased by driving too fast. This is partic- ing the brake pedal reduces the braking
ularly the case when cornering as well as effect.
on wet or slippery roads or when driving too
close to the vehicle in front. Braking
The driving safety systems described in this
section cannot reduce this risk nor override If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel
the laws of physics. a pulsing in the brake pedal.
58
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 59

Safety

X If ABS intervenes: continue to depress the BAS (Brake Assist) Adaptive brake lamps
brake pedal with force until the braking sit- BAS operates in emergency braking situa- i Adaptive brake lamps are only available in
uation is over. tions. If you depress the brake pedal quickly, certain countries.
BAS automatically boosts the braking force,
X To make a full brake application: If you brake sharply from a speed of more
thus shortening the stopping distance.
depress the brake pedal with full force. than 50 km/h or if braking is assisted by BAS,
X Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed until the brake lamps flash rapidly. In this way,
G Risk of accident the emergency braking situation is over. traffic travelling behind you is warned in an
If ABS is faulty, the wheels could lock when ABS prevents the wheels from locking. even more noticeable manner.
braking. This limits the steerability of the The brakes will function as usual once you If you brake sharply from a speed of more
vehicle when braking and the braking dis- release the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated. than 70 km/h to a standstill, the hazard warn-
tance may increase. ing lamps are activated automatically. If the
If ABS is deactivated due to a malfunction,
G Risk of accident
brakes are applied again, the brake lamps
then BAS and ESP are also deactivated. If BAS has malfunctioned, the braking sys- light up continuously. The hazard warning
There is an increased risk of your vehicle tem remains available with full brake boost- lamps switch off automatically if you drive
skidding in certain situations. ing effect. However, braking force is not faster than 10 km/h again. You can also
automatically increased in emergency switch off the hazard warning lamps using the
You should always adapt your driving style
braking situations and the stopping dis- hazard warning switch button (Y page 102).
to suit the prevailing road and weather con-
tance may increase.
ditions.
59
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 60

Safety

ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) ESP® cannot reduce the risk of an accident G Risk of accident
if you drive too fast. ESP® cannot override Activate ESP® as soon as the situations
ESP® monitors driving stability and traction,
the laws of physics. described above no longer apply. ESP® will
i.e. power transmission between the tyres
and the road surface. otherwise not be able to stabilise the vehi-
! If the vehicle is to be towed with the front cle if the vehicle starts to skid or a wheel
If ESP® detects that the vehicle is deviating or rear axle raised, the ignition must be starts to spin.
from the direction desired by the driver, one switched off (key in position 0 or 1 in the
or more wheels are braked to stabilise the If you deactivate ESP®:
ignition lock). Application of the brakes by
vehicle. The engine output is also modified, if
ESP® could otherwise destroy the brake RESP® no longer improves driving stability.
necessary, to keep the vehicle on the desired
system on the front or rear axle. Rengine
course within physical limits. ESP® assists torque is not limited and the drive
the driver when pulling away on wet or slip- ! Vehicles with 4MATIC* may not be towed wheels are able to spin. The spinning
pery roads. ESP® can also stabilise the vehi- with the front or rear axle raised. wheels produce a cutting effect for better
cle during braking. traction.
When ESP® intervenes, the v warning i Only use wheels with the recommended Rtraction control is still activated.
lamp flashes in the instrument cluster. tyre sizes. Only then will ESP® function RESP® still provides support when you
properly.
G Risk of accident brake.
If the v warning lamp in the instrument
Deactivating/activating ESP® i If ESP® is deactivated and one or more
cluster flashes, proceed as follows:
wheels start to spin, the v warning lamp
RDo not deactivate ESP® under any cir-
ESP® is activated automatically when the in the instrument cluster flashes. In such
cumstances. engine is running. situations ESP® will not stabilise the vehi-
ROnly depress the accelerator pedal as far It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the fol- cle.
as necessary when pulling away. lowing situations:
RAdapt your driving style to suit the pre- Rwhen using snow chains
vailing road and weather conditions. Rin deep snow
The vehicle could otherwise go into a skid. Ron sand or gravel
* optional
60
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 61

Safety

X To activate: press button 1. ADAPTIVE BRAKE
The v warning lamp in the instrument Due to its higher level of braking safety,
cluster goes out. ADAPTIVE BRAKE offers exceptional braking
comfort. In addition to the braking function,
ADAPTIVE BRAKE also features the conveni-
EBV (electronic brake-power distribu- ence function HOLD (Y page 155). For fur-
tion) ther information, see Driving tips
EBV monitors and controls the brake pres- (Y page 236).
sure on the rear wheels to improve driving
stability under braking.
1 Deactivating/activating ESP®
G Risk of accident
X To deactivate: press button 1. If EBV is malfunctioning, the brake system
The v warning lamp in the instrument is still available with full brake boosting
cluster lights up. effect. However, the rear wheels can still
lock, e.g. under full braking. This could
G Risk of accident cause you to lose control of your vehicle
If the v warning lamp in the instrument and cause an accident. You should there-
cluster is continuously lit when the engine fore adapt your driving style to the different
is running, ESP® is deactivated or not avail- handling characteristics.
able due to a malfunction. There is an
increased risk of your vehicle skidding in
certain situations.
You should always adapt your driving style
to suit the prevailing road and weather con-
ditions.
61
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 62

Safety
Anti-theft systems
Anti-theft systems ATA* (anti-theft alarm system) button on the door handle/boot lid/tail-
gate can also be used.
Immobiliser A visual and audible alarm is triggered if the
Indicator lamp 1 flashes. The alarm sys-
alarm system is primed and you open:
The immobiliser prevents your vehicle from tem is primed after approximately 15 sec-
being started without the correct key. Ra door onds.
Ra door using the emergency key element X To deactivate: unlock the vehicle using the
Activating the immobiliser Rthe boot lid/tailgate key. On vehicles with KEYLESS GO*, you
X With the key: remove the key from the Rthe
can also unlock the vehicle by opening the
bonnet
ignition lock. door/boot lid/tailgate.
The alarm is not switched off even if you close
X With KEYLESS GO*: press the KEYLESS an open door again.
Switching off the alarm
GO button on the selector lever.
The engine switches off. X With the key: insert the key into the igni-
tion lock.
Deactivating the immobiliser The alarm is switched off.
or
X With the key: turn the key to position 2 in
the ignition lock.
X Press the Œ or ‹ button on the key.
The alarm is switched off.
X With KEYLESS GO*: press the KEYLESS
GO button on the selector lever twice with- X With KEYLESS GO*: pull the door handle.
out depressing the brake. The key must be outside the vehicle.
1 Indicator lamp The alarm is switched off.
i The immobiliser is always deactivated
To prime: lock the vehicle using the key. or
when you start the engine. X
On vehicles with KEYLESS GO*, the locking X Press the KEYLESS GO button on the selec-
tor lever. The key must be inside the vehi-
cle.
The alarm is switched off.
* optional
62
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 63

Safety
Anti-theft systems
Tow-away protection* Interior motion sensor*
An audible and visual alarm is triggered if your If the interior motion sensor is primed, a vis-
vehicle's angle of inclination is altered while ual and audible alarm is triggered if move-
tow-away protection is primed. This happens ment is detected in the vehicle interior while
if the vehicle is jacked up on one side, for the vehicle is locked. This occurs, for exam-
example. ple, if someone breaks the side windows of
your vehicle or reaches into the vehicle's inte-
Priming tow-away protection rior.
X Lock the vehicle using the key. On vehicles
Priming the interior motion sensor
with KEYLESS GO*, the locking button on 1 To deactivate tow-away protection
the door handle/boot lid/tailgate can also X Make sure that:
2 Indicator lamp
be used. Rthe side windows are closed
Tow-away protection is primed after X Remove the key from the ignition lock. Rthe sliding/tilting sunroof* or panorama
approximately 30 seconds. Press button 1.
X sliding sunroof* is closed
Indicator lamp 2 lights up briefly. Rthere are no objects, e.g. mascots, hang-
To deactivate tow-away protection ing on the rear-view mirror or on the
When you unlock your vehicle using the key with KEYLESS GO*, the locking button on grasp handles on the roof trim.
or KEYLESS GO*, tow-away protection is the door handle/boot lid/tailgate can also This will prevent false alarms.
automatically deactivated. be used. X Lock the vehicle using the key. On vehicles
Deactivate tow-away protection manually to Tow-away protection remains deactivated with KEYLESS GO*, the locking buttons on
prevent a false alarm if your vehicle: until the vehicle is unlocked and locked the door handle/boot lid/tailgate can also
Ris being transported again. be used.
Ris being loaded, e.g. onto a ferry or car The interior motion sensor is primed after
transporter approximately 30 seconds.
Ris being parked on a movable surface, e.g. Z
split-level garages
* optional
63
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 64

Safety
Anti-theft systems
To deactivate the interior motion sen- the door handle/boot lid/tailgate can also
sor be used.
To prevent a false alarm, deactivate the inte- The interior motion sensor remains deacti-
rior motion sensor if you lock your vehicle and vated until the vehicle is unlocked and
locked again.
Rpeople or animals remain in the vehicle
Rthe windows remain open
Rthe sliding/tilting sunroof* or panorama
sliding sunroof* remains open.
1 To deactivate the interior motion sensor

2 Indicator lamp
X Remove the key from the ignition lock.

X Press button 1.
Indicator lamp 2 flashes briefly.
with KEYLESS GO*, the locking button on
* optional
64
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 65

Controls
Opening and closing ........................... 66 Driving and parking .......................... 110

Key positions ....................................... 76 Transmission ..................................... 114
Seats .................................................... 77 Instrument cluster ............................ 120
Steering wheel .................................... 89 On-board computer .......................... 121
Mirrors ................................................. 91 Driving systems ................................ 142
Memory functions* ............................. 93 Air conditioning ................................. 162
Seat belts ............................................. 95 Sliding sunroof .................................. 180
Lights ................................................... 99 Loading and stowing ........................ 186
Windscreen wipers ........................... 105 Features ............................................. 207
Side windows .................................... 107
65
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 66

Controls
Opening and closing

Opening and closing Factory settings
Key X To unlock centrally: press the k but-
ton.
The vehicle's equipment includes two keys
The turn signals flash once. The locking
with remote control. Each key contains an
knobs in the doors pop up. The anti-theft
emergency key element.
alarm system* is deactivated.
The key is configured at the factory to cen-
When it is dark, the surround lighting also
trally lock and unlock the following:
comes on if it is activated in the on-board
Rthe doors computer.
Rthe boot lid/tailgate
1 j To lock the vehicle i If you do not open either a door or the
Rthe fuel filler flap 2 i To unlock the boot lid/tailgate* boot lid/tailgate after you have unlocked
G Risk of accident 3 k To unlock the vehicle the vehicle, it will automatically relock after
If children are left unsupervised in the vehi- 4 Battery check lamp
approximately 40 seconds.
cle, they could: X To lock centrally: press the j button.
Ropen a door from the inside at any time, i You can also open and close the side win-
The turn signals flash three times if the
even if it has been locked dows and the sliding/tilting sunroof* or the doors and boot lid/tailgate are closed. The
Rstart
panorama sliding sunroof* with the key. locking knobs in the doors drop down. The
the vehicle using a key which has
You can open them using the summer anti-theft alarm system* and the immobil-
been left in the vehicle
opening feature (Y page 109). You can iser are primed.
Rrelease the parking brake close them using the convenience closing
They could endanger themselves and oth- feature (Y page 109).
ers. Never leave children unsupervised in Individual settings
the vehicle. Always take the key with you You can change the setting of the locking
when leaving the vehicle, even if you are system in such a way that pressing the
only leaving it for a short time. k button only unlocks the driver's door
and the fuel filler flap. This could be useful if
you frequently travel on your own.
* optional
66
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 67

Controls
Opening and closing

X To change the setting: press the k KEYLESS GO key* is in the vehicle and they press the KEY-
and j buttons simultaneously for LESS GO button on the gear selector lever.
approximately six seconds until the battery The optional equipment supplied with your
They could endanger themselves and oth-
check lamp flashes twice. vehicle includes two KEYLESS GO keys. KEY-
ers. Never leave children unsupervised in
LESS GO allows you to lock/unlock and start
the vehicle. Switch off the engine and take
The key now functions as follows: the vehicle simply by carrying the KEYLESS
the KEYLESS GO key with you, even if you
To unlock the driver's door: press the GO key with you. When you touch the surface
X are only leaving the vehicle for a short time.
k button once. of the sensors on the vehicle's door handles,
KEYLESS GO establishes a radio connection
X To unlock centrally: press the k but- between the vehicle and the key.
ton twice. When you touch the inner surface of the door
X To lock centrally: press the j button. handle or press the button on the tailgate
handle (Estate), your vehicle unlocks cen-
trally if the factory settings have not been
Restoring the factory settings
changed:
X Press the k and j buttons simulta- Rthe doors
neously for approximately six seconds until Rthe boot lid/tailgate
the battery check lamp flashes twice.
Rthe fuel filler flap
When starting the engine and whilst driving, 1 j To lock the vehicle
KEYLESS GO also checks whether a valid 2 i To unlock the boot lid/tailgate*
KEYLESS GO key is in the vehicle by periodi- 3 k To unlock the vehicle
cally establishing radio contact. 4 Battery check lamp
G Risk of accident
If children are left unsupervised in the vehi- i You can also use the KEYLESS GO key to
cle, they could open a door from the inside, open and close the side windows and the
even if it has been locked. Or they could sliding/tilting sunroof* or the panorama
start the vehicle if a valid KEYLESS GO key sliding sunroof*. You can open them using
the summer opening feature Z
* optional
67
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 68

Controls
Opening and closing

(Y page 109). You can close them using Factory settings
the convenience closing feature
X To unlock centrally: pull the door handle.
(Y page 109).
The turn signals flash once. The locking
i If the vehicle has been parked for a long knobs in the doors pop up. The anti-theft
time, you must pull the door handle to acti- alarm system* is deactivated.
vate the KEYLESS GO functions. When it is dark, the surround lighting also
comes on if it is activated in the on-board
Important notes computer.
RIf the KEYLESS GO key is removed from the i If you do not open either a door or the
vehicle (e.g. in luggage or an article of boot lid/tailgate after you have unlocked 1 Locking button on the door handle
clothing), it will no longer be possible to the vehicle, it will automatically relock after
X To lock centrally: press locking but-
lock or start the vehicle. approximately 40 seconds.
ton 1 on the door handle without touching
RIf the KEYLESS GO key is removed from the
i There is a danger of the vehicle being the inside of the handle.
vehicle while the engine is running, e.g. if
unlocked unintentionally. This could occur The turn signals flash three times. The lock-
the front passenger leaves the vehicle with
if the KEYLESS GO key is within one metre ing knobs in the doors drop down. The anti-
the KEYLESS GO key, the following mes-
of the vehicle and the door handle is theft alarm system* and the immobiliser
sage will appear in the multi-function dis-
splashed with water. This could also occur are primed.
play as you pull away: Key not detec-
when cleaning the door handle.
ted.
RIf the KEYLESS GO key is in the vehicle, the
Individual settings
vehicle can be started at any time. If you You can change the setting of the locking
have left the KEYLESS GO key in the vehi- system. If you now touch the inside surface
cle, the following message will appear in of the door handle on the driver's door, you
the multi-function display when you lock will only unlock the driver's door and the fuel
the vehicle: Key still in vehicle. filler flap. This could be useful if you fre-
quently travel on your own.
* optional
68
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 69

Controls
Opening and closing

X To change the setting: press the k Locking centrally from the luggage Locking from the boot/luggage com-
and j buttons simultaneously for compartment* (Estate) partment (vehicles with remote boot lid
approximately six seconds until the battery closing*)
check lamp flashes twice. i If the vehicle is locked centrally while the
tailgate is open, the tailgate will be locked On vehicles with KEYLESS GO and remote
The KEYLESS GO key will now function as fol- automatically when it is closed. boot lid closing*, you can close the boot lid/
lows: tailgate automatically and thereby centrally
i If you leave the KEYLESS GO key in the lock your vehicle (Y page 74).
X To unlock the driver's door: pull the door
vehicle, the tailgate will not lock.
handle on the driver's door.
X To unlock centrally: pull the door handle Opening the doors from the inside
on the front-passenger door or on the rear
You can open a door from the inside at any
doors.
time, even if it has been locked.
X To lock centrally (Saloon): press locking
button 1 on the door handle, without
touching the inside of the handle.
X To lock centrally (Estate): press the lock-
ing button on the door handle or the tail-
gate.
1 Locking button on the tailgate

Restoring the factory settings
X Press locking button 1 above the licence
X Press the k and j buttons simulta-
plate recess on the tailgate.
neously for approximately six seconds until
the battery check lamp flashes twice. The vehicle locks centrally. 1 Locking knob
2 Door handle
* optional
69
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 70

Controls
Opening and closing

X Pull door handle 2. Locking/unlocking the vehicle from Boot/luggage compartment (vehicles
If the door is locked, locking knob 1 pops the inside without remote boot lid closing fea-
up. The door is unlocked and can be You can centrally lock or unlock the vehicle ture*)
opened. from the inside. This feature may be useful if, G Risk of poisoning
for example, you wish to unlock the
Exhaust fumes could enter the vehicle inte-
passenger door from the inside or lock the
Automatic locking feature rior if the engine is running and the boot lid
vehicle before you pull away.
is open. This could poison you. Therefore,
The vehicle will lock automatically once you G Risk of accident you should make sure that the boot lid/
have pulled away. tailgate is always closed when the engine
Do not leave children unsupervised in the
You can switch off the automatic locking vehicle. They could open a door from the is running.
function via the on-board computer inside – even if it is locked – and thereby
(Y page 137). endanger themselves and others. G Risk of accident
i The vehicle is locked automatically when Estate
the ignition is switched on and the wheels Do not leave children unsupervised in the
begin to turn. There is therefore a risk of vehicle. They could open the tailgate from
being locked out when the vehicle is being the inside and thereby endanger them-
pushed or tested on a dynamometer. selves and others.
! The boot lid/tailgate swings upwards and

to the rear when opened. Therefore, make
sure that there is sufficient clearance
above and behind the boot lid/tailgate.
1 Unlocking button Opening from the outside

2 Locking button You can only open the boot lid/tailgate after
X To unlock: press button 1. unlocking it first.
X To lock: press button 2.
* optional
70
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 71

Controls
Opening and closing

X To unlock centrally: press the k but- X Pull handle 1.
ton on the key. X Raise the boot lid/tailgate.
Opening from the outside using the key

(Saloon)
You can unlock and open the boot lid simul-
taneously with the key when the vehicle is
stationary.
X Press and hold the i button on the key
until the boot lid opens. Saloon
1 Recess
Saloon Closing from the outside

1 Handle G Risk of injury
Make sure that nobody can become trap-
ped as you close the tailgate.
i Do not leave the key in the boot/luggage

compartment. You could otherwise lock
yourself out.
Estate
1 Recess
Estate
1 Handle Z
71
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 72

Controls
Opening and closing

X Pull the boot lid/tailgate down using Opening the tailgate from inside the i The tailgate cannot be opened from the
recess 1. vehicle (Estate with a folding bench outside if you slide locking catch 2 in the
X Lock the vehicle if necessary using seat*) handle to the right.
the j button on the key or with KEY- ! The tailgate swings upwards and to the
LESS GO*. rear when opened. Therefore, ensure that Locking the boot separately (Saloon)
there is sufficient clearance above and You can lock the boot separately14. If you then
Opening from the inside (Saloon) behind the tailgate. unlock the vehicle centrally, the boot remains
You can simultaneously unlock and open the i You can only open the tailgate from the locked and cannot be opened.
boot from the driver's seat when the vehicle inside if the child-proof locks have not been X Close the boot lid.
is stationary. activated (Y page 56). X Remove the emergency key element from
the key (Y page 306).
1 Remote opening button

1 Handle
X Pull remote operating button 1 until the 2 Locking catch $ Basic position
boot lid opens. % To lock separately
X Pull the upper section of handle 1.
The indicator lamp in the button lights up
and stays lit until the boot is closed again. X Swing the tailgate upwards.
14 Not available in all countries.
* optional
72
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 73

Controls
Opening and closing

X Insert the emergency key element fully into G Risk of poisoning
the boot lock. Exhaust fumes could enter the vehicle inte-
X Turn the emergency key element clockwise rior if the engine is running and the boot lid
to position %. is open. This could poison you. Therefore,
X Remove the emergency key element. you should make sure that the boot lid/
tailgate is always closed when the engine
is running.
Boot/luggage compartment (vehicles
G Risk of accident
with remote boot lid closing feature*)
Estate
The remote boot lid closing feature* opens Do not leave children unsupervised in the Saloon
and closes the boot lid/tailgate automati- vehicle. They could open the tailgate from 1 Handle
cally. You can stop the automatic opening and the inside and thereby endanger them-
closing procedure at any time: selves and others.
RSaloon: by pulling or pressing the remote
operating button at the driver's seat ! The boot lid/tailgate swings upwards and
Estate: by pulling the remote operating but- to the rear when opened. Therefore, make
ton at the driver's seat again sure that there is sufficient clearance
Rby pressing the i button on the key above and behind the boot lid/tailgate.
Rby pulling the handle on the boot lid/tail-
gate Opening from the outside
Rby pressing the closing button in the boot You can only open the boot lid/tailgate after
lid/tailgate unlocking it first.
Estate
X To unlock centrally: press the k but-
On Estate vehicles, you will hear a warning 1 Handle
tone as the tailgate is opening or closing. ton on the key.
X Pull handle 1.
The boot lid/tailgate opens. Z
* optional
73
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 74

Controls
Opening and closing

Opening from the outside using the key Closing from the outside and locking
X Press and hold the i button on the key
centrally (using KEYLESS GO*)
until the boot lid/tailgate opens. You can close the boot lid/tailgate from the
outside using the closing button in the boot
Closing from the outside (without KEY- lid/tailgate, or you can close and centrally
lock the vehicle simultaneously with the KEY-
LESS GO*)
LESS GO button*.
You can close the boot lid/tailgate from the
G Risk of injury
outside using the closing button in the boot
lid/tailgate. Monitor the boot lid/tailgate closing pro-
cedure to make sure that nobody can
G Risk of injury Saloon
become trapped. To halt the closing proce-
Monitor the boot lid/tailgate closing pro- 1 Closing button
dure, press the closing switch in the boot
cedure to make sure that nobody can lid/tailgate again, or press the i button
become trapped. To halt the closing proce- on the key.
dure, press the closing switch in the boot
lid/tailgate again, or press the i button i Do not leave the key in the boot/luggage
on the key. compartment. You could otherwise lock
yourself out.
i Do not leave the key in the boot/luggage
compartment. You could otherwise lock
yourself out.
Estate
1 Closing button
X Press closing button 1.

The boot lid/tailgate closes automatically.
* optional
74
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 75

Controls
Opening and closing

X To close: press closing button 1.
X To close and lock centrally: press KEY-
LESS GO button* 2.
i If you leave a KEYLESS GO key* in the

boot/luggage compartment, the boot lid/
tailgate will not lock.
Opening and closing from inside the

vehicle
Saloon Saloon
1 Closing button Saloon: 1 Remote operating button
2 KEYLESS GO button* You can open and close the boot lid from the
driver's seat when the vehicle is stationary.
Estate:
You can open the tailgate from the driver's
seat when the vehicle is stationary.
Saloon:
G Risk of injury
Monitor the boot lid closing procedure to
make sure that nobody can become trap-
ped. Release the remote operating button
to stop the closing procedure.
Estate
Estate 1 Remote operating button
1 Closing button
2 KEYLESS GO button*
Z
* optional
75
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 76

Controls
Key positions
X To open: pull remote operating button 1 slightly and press the closing button again Key positions
until the boot lid/tailgate opens. until you hear a tone.
Key
X To close (Saloon): press remote operating
Deactivating
button 1 until the boot lid is closed.
X Press and hold the closing button in the
tailgate until you hear two brief tones.
Limiting the opening angle of the tail-
gate* (Estate)
Opening the tailgate from inside the
You can limit the opening angle of the tailgate vehicle (Estate with a folding bench
in the top half of its opening range. This could seat*)
be useful, for example, when there is insuffi-
cient space above the tailgate. On Estate vehicles with a folding bench
seat*, you can open the tailgate from the
Activating inside (Y page 72).
X To open the tailgate: pull the handle.
Ignition lock
Locking the boot separately (Saloon) } To remove the key

X To stop the opening procedure: pull the
handle again. $ Power supply for some consumers, such
You can lock the boot separately
as the windscreen wipers
X Move the tailgate manually to the desired (Y page 72)15.
position. % Ignition (power supply for all consumers)
and drive position
X Press and hold the closing button in the
tailgate until you hear a tone. & To start the engine
The opening angle limiter is switched on.
The tailgate will now stop in the saved posi-
tion when opening.
i If you do not hear a tone, it was not pos-

sible to save the position. Open the tailgate
15 Not available in all countries.
* optional
76
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 77

Controls
Seats
KEYLESS GO* If KEYLESS GO button 1 has not yet been Seats
pressed, this corresponds to "key removed"
If you press the KEYLESS GO button repeat- or position 0. Points to remember
edly without depressing the brake pedal, its
X Position 1: press KEYLESS GO button 1 You will find information about folding down
function corresponds to the different key
once. the rear bench seat in the following sections:
positions in the ignition lock.
It is now possible to switch on the wind- RThrough-loading feature in the rear bench
If you depress the brake pedal and press the
screen wipers, for example. seat (Saloon) (Y page 195)
KEYLESS GO button, the engine starts imme-
diately. RLuggage compartment enlargement
i If you now press KEYLESS GO button 1 (Estate) (Y page 198)
i In order for the engine to be started using twice, the power supply is disconnected
the KEYLESS GO button, the KEYLESS GO again. Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the
key must be in the vehicle. seats can adjusted either manually/electri-
X Position 2 (ignition): press KEYLESS GO cally or electrically*.
i If there is a key in the ignition lock, it has button 1 twice.
G Risk of injury
priority over the KEYLESS GO function.
i If you now press KEYLESS GO button 1 The seats can still be adjusted when there
once, the power supply is disconnected is no key in the ignition lock. For this rea-
again. son, children should never be left unsuper-
vised in the vehicle. They could become
trapped when adjusting a seat.
G Risk of accident
Only adjust the driver's seat when the vehi-
cle is stationary. You will otherwise be dis-
tracted from the road and traffic conditions
and you could lose control of the vehicle as
a result of the seat moving. This could
1 KEYLESS GO button cause an accident.
Z
* optional
77
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 78

Controls
Seats
G Risk of injury Adjusting the seats manually and Seat fore-and-aft adjustment
Make sure that nobody can become trap- electrically X Lift handle 4 and slide the seat forwards
ped when you adjust the seat. or backwards.
Observe the notes concerning the airbag X Release handle 4 again.
system.
Make sure that you hear the seat engage
Secure children as recommended; see into position.
"Children in the vehicle" section.
! When you move the seats, make sure that Backrest angle
there are no objects in the footwell or X Slide the button forwards or back in direc-
behind the seats. Otherwise, you could tion of arrow 3.
damage the seats and the objects.
i The head restraints in the front seats are Seat height

fitted with the NECK-PRO system X Slide the button up or down in direction of
(Y page 47). For this reason, it is not pos- arrow 2.
sible to remove the head restraints from
the front seats.
1 Seat cushion angle Seat cushion angle
For design reasons, some rear-compart-
ment head restraints cannot be removed 2 Seat height
Adjust the angle so that your thighs are gently
(Y page 83). 3 Backrest angle supported.
Please contact a Mercedes-Benz Service 4 Seat fore-and-aft adjustment X Slide the button up or down in direction of
Centre for more information. arrow 1.
78
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 79

Controls
Seats
Head restraint height Head restraint position
G Risk of injury
Make sure that the central area of the head
restraint supports the back of your head at
about eye level. You could seriously injure
your neck if your head is not correctly sup-
ported by the head restraint in the event of
an accident. Never travel without a cor-
rectly adjusted and engaged head restraint.
1 To adjust the head restraint side bolsters

2 To move the head restraint back and forth
X Push or pull the head restraint in direction
of the arrow. X To adjust the side bolsters of the head
restraint: push or pull the right and/or left-
hand side bolster 1 into the desired posi-
Luxury head restraint* tion.
G Risk of injury X To move the head restraint back and
When folding back the head restraint side forth: push or pull the head restraint in
bolsters, do not put your hands between direction of arrow 2.
1 Release catch
the side bolster and the cushion holder.
There is a danger of entrapment.
X To raise: pull the head restraint up to the
desired position.
X To lower: press release catch 1 in direc-
tion of arrow and push the head restraint
down to the desired position.
Z
* optional
79
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 80

Controls
Seats
Adjusting the seat electrically* i Estate with memory function*/saloon Head restraint height
with the through-loading feature* and
memory function*: G Risk of injury
Make sure that the central area of the head
When the rear seat backrest is folded
restraint supports the back of your head at
forward, the front-passenger seat is moved
forwards slightly if necessary to prevent
your neck if your head is not correctly sup-
contact with the backrest.
ported by the head restraint in the event of
an accident. Never travel without a cor-
Seat height rectly adjusted and engaged head restraint.
X Slide the button up or down in the direction X Slide the button up or down in the direction
of arrow 3.
of arrow 1.
1 Head restraint height
2 Seat cushion angle Seat cushion angle
Head restraint position
3 Seat height
Adjust the angle so that your thighs are gently
4 Seat fore-and-aft adjustment supported.
5 Backrest angle
X Slide the button up or down in the direction
i On vehicles with the memory function*, if of arrow 2.

PRE-SAFE® is triggered, the front-
passenger seat will be moved to a better Backrest angle
position if it was previously in an unfavour- X Slide the button forwards or back in the
able position.
direction of arrow 5.
Seat fore-and-aft adjustment

X Slide the button forwards or back in the X Push or pull the head restraint in the direc-
direction of arrow 4. tion of the arrow.
* optional
80
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 81

Controls
Seats
Luxury head restraint* Lumbar support Rear seat head restraints
G Risk of injury The lumbar support for the driver's seat can G Risk of injury
When folding back the head restraint side be adjusted to provide optimum support for Only transport occupants on seats with
bolsters, do not put your hands between your back. head restraints fitted. If a seat is occupied,
the side bolster and the cushion holder. pull the head restraint up from the stowed
There is a danger of entrapment. position into the user position. This helps
to reduce the risk of injury to occupants in
the event of an accident.
Folding up the head restraints
1 Adjustment lever
X Move adjustment lever 1 in the direction

1 To adjust the head restraint side bolsters of the arrow until the desired backrest con-
2 To move the head restraint back and forth
tour is achieved.
X To adjust the side bolsters of the head

restraint: push or pull right-hand and/or
left-hand side bolster 1 into the desired X Pull the head restraint in direction of arrow
position. until it engages.
X To move the head restraint back and
forth: push or pull the head restraint in the
direction of arrow 2. Z
* optional
81
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 82

Controls
Seats
Folding back the head restraints from Folding back the head restraints from
the front (Saloon) the rear (Estate)
1 Release catch
If the head restraint is fully inserted, it is nec-
1 Button for folding back the rear seat head 1 Release catch essary to press release catch 1.
restraints X To raise: pull the head restraint up to the
X Press release catch 1.
X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in desired height.
the ignition lock. X To lower: press release catch 1 and push
Adjusting the head restraint height
X Press button 1. (Estate) the head restraint down until it is in the
desired position.
G Risk of injury
Make sure that the central area of the head Adjusting the head restraint angle
restraint supports the back of your head at (Estate)
your neck if your head is not correctly sup- Adjust the head restraint so that it is as close
ported by the head restraint in the event of as possible to your head.
an accident. Never travel without a cor- You can engage the two outer head restraints
rectly adjusted and engaged head restraint. in two positions.
82
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 83

Controls
Seats
X To refit: place the head restraint in the
guides and push it in.
Estate
1 Release catch 1 Release catches for the rear-seat head

restraints
X Press release catch 1 and adjust the head
restraint to the desired angle. X To remove: fold the backrest forward
(Y page 195).
1 Release catch
Removing and fitting the head X Fold the head restraint forward.
restraints X Press release catches 1 and pull the head i You must pull the outer head restraints
restraints out of the guides. firmly upwards to remove them.
G Risk of injury
Occupants should only travel sitting on X Fold the backrest back again until it X To remove: pull the head restraint up to
seats which have the head restraints instal- engages. the stop.
led. This reduces the risk of injury to the X Press release catch 1 and pull the head
i When refitting the head restraints, make
passengers in the rear in the event of an restraint out of the guides.
accident. sure that you fit the correct head restraint
to the centre seat. It is marked with the let-
i When refitting the head restraints, make
ter "M" on the outer sides of the support
Saloon* sure that you fit the correct head restraint
bars. Make sure that the head restraints
The release catches are on the back of the to the centre seat. This has shorter guide
engage fully.
rear-seat backrest. rods. Z
* optional
83
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 84

Controls
Seats
X To refit: insert the head restraint so that lumbar region and press button 2 to move
the notches on the bar are on the left when it upwards to the upper back region.
viewed in the direction of travel. X Adjust the side cushions of the backrest
X Push the head restraint down until you hear using button 1 so that you have good lat-
it click into place. eral support.
Multi-contour seat* Dynamic multi-contour seat*

You can set the contour of the seat to provide The dynamic multi-contour seat automati-
optimum support for your back. cally adapts the sides of the backrest to your
Electrically adjustable front seat* current driving style. You can set the back-
1 Backrest side cushions rest-side adaptation to Gentle or Vigorous
2 Upper back support in the on-board computer (Y page 131).
3 Lumbar region support
4 Thigh cushion
Adjusting the contour of the backrest

X Make sure that the key is in position 1 in
the ignition lock.
Manually and electrically adjustable front seat X Use switch 4 to move the thigh cushion
1 Backrest side cushions into the desired position.
2 Upper back support X Press the æ or ç button to adjust the
3 Lumbar region support contour of the backrest to suit your back. 1 To switch dynamic multi-contour seat on
or off
4 Thigh cushion X Press button 3 to move the point of great-
2 Backrest side cushions
est backrest curvature downwards to the
3 Massage function
4 Upper back support
* optional
84
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 85

Controls
Seats
5 Lumbar region support Seat ventilation* i If the battery voltage is too low, the seat
6 Seat cushion length ventilation may switch off.
The three blue indicator lamps in the button
X To activate/deactivate: press button 1. indicate the ventilation level you have selec-
ted. Seat heating*
The indicator lamp in the button lights up/
goes out. The three red indicator lamps in the button
When switched on, the message Driving indicate the heating level you have selected.
dynamics seat adjustment appears in
the multi-function display for five seconds.
Massage function (PULSE)

The massage function helps you to prevent
muscle tension on long journeys.
X Press button 3.
The indicator lamp in the button lights up. 1 Seat ventilation

The air cushions in the lumbar region
vibrate for approximately five minutes. X Make sure that the key is in position 1 or
2 in the ignition lock. 1 Front-seat heating
X To switch on: press button 1 repeatedly
until the required ventilation level is set.
i If you open the side windows and the slid-

ing sunroof* using the key (Y page 109),
the driver's seat ventilation automatically
switches to the highest level.
X To switch off: press button 1 repeatedly
until all the indicator lamps go out. Z
* optional
85
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 86

Controls
Seats
i If the battery voltage is too low, the seat Make sure that the seat belt is correctly
heating may switch off. routed across the body and that the seat
belt tongue is engaged in the buckle.
Folding bench seat in the luggage G Risk of injury

compartment* (Estate) Only replace damaged covers with genuine
Mercedes-Benz covers.
i The folding bench seat in the luggage
compartment* is only suitable for persons Never leave children unsupervised in the
no more than 1.40 m tall and weighing a vehicle. This applies even if they are
maximum of 50 kg. secured by a child restraint system.
1 Rear-seat heating Secure children as recommended Make sure that luggage and other items are
(Y page 47). adequately secured.
i The system automatically switches down People could otherwise be injured as a
The combined luggage cover and net must
from level 3 to level 2 after approximately result of the load being thrown around in
be fitted if you are using the folding bench
five minutes. the event of sharp braking, a sudden
seat.
The system automatically switches down change in direction or an accident.
from level 2 to level 1 after approximately G Risk of injury
ten minutes. If you are using the folding bench seat in
The system automatically switches off the luggage compartment, the backrests
approximately 20 minutes after it is set to on the rear bench seat must be upright and
level 1. locked.
Only start the journey once the head
X Make sure that the key is in position 1 or restraints for the folding bench seat are
2 in the ignition lock. correctly positioned. Adjust the head
X To switch on: press button 1 repeatedly restraint so that the back of the seat occu-
until the desired heating level is set. pant's head is supported at about eye level.
This reduces the risk of injury to the child
X To switch off: press button 1 repeatedly
in an accident.
until all indicator lamps go out.
* optional
86
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 87

Controls
Seats
Folding out the folding bench seat
3 Seat belt retainers 1 Seat guides

1 Backrest release handle 2 Seat cushion
X Hook the seat belts into retainers 3.
2 Seat cushion release handle X To remove: fold seat cushion 2 upwards
X Pull release handle 2 and fold the folding
bench seat cushion into the sitting posi- and remove it from seat guides 1.
X Make sure that the backrests of the rear
bench seat are locked in the upright position.
tion. X Push down the seat cushion until the back-
rest engages fully.
i You can move the rear bench seat back-
rest to a more upright position in order to
X Fold the head restraints upwards.
be able to sit more comfortably on the fold-
ing bench seat (Y page 198). Fitting and removing the seat cushion
X Move the handle for the combined luggage i You must remove the seat cushion if you
cover and net upwards (Y page 201). wish to lift the luggage compartment floor,
X Pull release handle 1 and fold the back- e.g. if the vehicle has a flat tyre.
rest of the folding bench seat upwards.
Z
87
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 88

Controls
Seats
X To fit: guide seat cushion 2 into seat
guides 1 at a slight angle from the rear
3.
X Fold seat cushion 2 back into its original
position 4 until it engages.
Folding back the folding bench seat
1 Release button on the bottom of the head 1 Release catch

restraint 2 Backrest
X Press release button 1 and fold the head X Press release catch 1 and push the head
restraints down. restraints in fully.
! To prevent damage, you must insert the X Fold backrest 2 of the folding bench seat
head restraints fully into their guides and into its original position until it engages.
engage the belt buckles in their guides.
1 Tab
2 Backrest
X Pull the seat cushion upwards by tab 1

and fold it back into its original position
until it engages.
88
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 89

Controls
Steering wheel
Steering wheel When you adjust the steering wheel, make X Pull handle 1 out completely.
sure that: The steering column is unlocked.
Points to remember Rthe steering wheel can be reached with
X Set the desired steering wheel position.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, you can your arms slightly bent
adjust the steering wheel either manually or X Push handle 1 in completely until it
Ryou can move your legs freely
electrically*. engages fully.
Ryou can see all the displays in the instru- The steering wheel is locked in position.
G Risk of injury ment cluster clearly
The electrically adjustable steering
wheel* can be adjusted when the key is Adjusting the steering wheel electri-
removed from the ignition lock. Therefore, Adjusting the steering wheel man- cally*
do not leave children unsupervised in the ually
vehicle as they could become trapped as
the steering wheel is adjusted.
G Risk of accident
Only adjust the steering wheel when the
vehicle is stationary and do not pull away
until the steering wheel adjustment mech-
anism is locked in position. You might oth-
erwise drive without the steering wheel
adjustment mechanism being locked in
position. As a result you could be distracted
1 Steering column fore-and-aft adjustment
from road and traffic conditions by an unex- 1 Release handle
pected movement of the steering wheel 2 Steering column height
2 Steering column height
and thereby cause an accident. Press the lever in direction of arrow 1 or
3 Steering column fore-and-aft adjustment X
The steerability of the vehicle is however 2 until the steering wheel has moved into
not affected. the desired position.
Z
You can find more information under:
* optional
89
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 90

Controls
Steering wheel
REasy-entry/exit feature (Y page 90) Never leave children unsupervised in the
Easy-entry/exit feature*
RStoring settings (Y page 93) vehicle. They could open the driver's door
The easy-entry/exit feature makes getting in
and thereby unintentionally activate the
and out of your vehicle easier.
easy-entry feature and become trapped.
The steering wheel swings upwards when
Steering wheel heating* The most recent position of the steering
you:
Rremove the key from the ignition lock wheel is stored when you switch off the igni-
tion or when you store a memory position
Ropen the driver's door when the key is in (Y page 93).
the ignition lock or in position 1.
You can activate and deactivate the easy-
The steering wheel is moved automatically to entry/exit feature via the on-board computer
the position previously set when the key is (Y page 138).
inserted into the ignition lock with the driver's
door closed.
G Risk of injury
1 To switch on the steering-wheel heating ped when you activate the easy-entry/exit
2 To switch off the steering-wheel heating
feature.
3 Indicator lamp
If there is a risk of becoming trapped, stop
the adjustment procedure. To halt the pro-
X To switch on or off: make sure that the cedure:
key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. Rpress the steering-column adjustment
X Turn the lever in direction of arrow 1 or switch

2. Rpress one of the memory function posi-
Indicator lamp 3 lights up or goes out. tion buttons
The steering column stops moving immedi-
i The steering-wheel heating does not ately.
switch off automatically.
* optional
90
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 91

Controls
Mirrors
Mirrors Exterior mirrors 2 Adjustment button
3 Right-hand exterior mirror
Rear-view mirror G Risk of accident
X Adjust the rear-view mirror by hand so you The exterior mirrors reduce the size of the X Make sure that the key is in position 1 or
have a good overview of the traffic condi- image. Objects are actually closer than 2 in the ignition lock.
tions. they appear. You could misjudge the dis- X Press button 3 for the right-hand exterior
tance from vehicles driving behind and mirror or button 1 for the left-hand exte-
cause an accident, e.g. when changing
Rear-view mirror (manual anti-dazzle) rior mirror.
lane. For this reason, make sure of the
actual distance from the vehicle driving X Press adjustment button 2 up, down, to
behind by glancing over your shoulder. the right or to the left until the exterior mir-
ror is set to a position which provides you
The convex exterior mirrors provide a larger with a good overview of traffic conditions.
field of vision.
At low outside temperatures the exterior mir-
Folding the exterior mirrors in or out
rors are heated automatically.
electrically*
Adjusting the exterior mirrors
1 Anti-dazzle switch
X Anti-dazzle mode: flick anti-dazzle switch

1 forwards or back.
1 To fold the exterior mirrors in or out

Z
1 Left-hand exterior mirror
* optional
91
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 92

Controls
Mirrors
X Make sure that the key is in position 1 or RThe exterior mirrors fold in automatically as extended, the mirrors' automatic anti-daz-
2 in the ignition lock. soon as you lock the vehicle from the out- zle function will not operate.
X Briefly press button 1. side. Incident light could then dazzle you. This
RThe exterior mirrors fold out again auto- may prevent you from observing the traffic
Both exterior mirrors fold in or out.
matically as soon as you unlock the vehicle conditions, thereby causing an accident. In
i If you are driving faster than 47 km/h, you and then open the driver's or front- this case, adjust the rear-view mirror man-
can no longer fold in the exterior mirrors. passenger door. ually.
Make sure that the exterior mirrors are
i If you have activated this function and fold
always folded out fully while the vehicle is
in the exterior mirrors using button 1, they
in motion; otherwise, they may vibrate. Parking aid*
will not be folded out automatically. You
can then only fold out the exterior mirrors The exterior mirror on the front-passenger
Resetting the exterior mirrors using button 1. side moves into the parking position as soon
as you engage reverse gear.
If the battery has been disconnected or has
become discharged, the exterior mirrors
must be reset. Otherwise, they will not fold in Automatic anti-dazzle mirrors*
when you select the "Fold in mirrors when The rear-view mirror and the exterior mirror
locking" function in the on-board computer on the driver's side automatically go into anti-
(Y page 139). dazzle mode if the ignition is switched on and
X Make sure that the key is in position 1 in incident light from headlamps strikes the sen-
the ignition lock. sor in the rear-view mirror.
X Briefly press button 1. The mirrors do not go into anti-dazzle mode if
reverse gear is engaged and the interior light-
ing is switched on.
Folding the exterior mirrors in or out 1 Exterior mirror on the driver's side
automatically* G Risk of accident
If the incident light from headlamps cannot 2 Exterior mirror on the front-passenger
If the "Fold in mirrors when locking" function strike the sensor in the rear-view mirror, for side
is activated in the on-board computer instance when the rear window blind* is
(Y page 139):
* optional
92
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 93

Controls
Memory functions*
X Make sure that parking position for the Memory functions* traffic conditions by the steering wheel and
exterior mirror on the front-passenger side seat moving of their own accord, and cause
is stored with the memory function Storing settings an accident.
(Y page 94). You can store up to three different settings
X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in using the memory button.
the ignition lock. The following settings are stored as a single
X Make sure that button 2 for the exterior memory preset:
mirror on the front-passenger side is RPosition of the seat, backrest and head
pressed in. restraint
X Engage reverse gear. RDynamic driving seat*: activated/deacti-
The exterior mirror on the front-passenger vated
side moves to the stored parking position. RDriver's side: steering-wheel position
The exterior mirror on the front-passenger RDriver's side: position of the exterior mir-
side moves back to its original position: rors on the driver's and front-passenger 1 Storage position switches 1, 2, 3
Ras soon as you exceed a speed of sides 2 Memory button M
10 km/h
G Risk of injury X Adjust the seat (Y page 77).
Rabout ten seconds after you have disen- The memory function can be used when the
gaged reverse gear X On the driver's side, also adjust the steer-
key has been removed. For this reason,
Rif
ing wheel (Y page 89) and the mirrors
you press button 1 for the exterior mir- children should never be left unsupervised
(Y page 91).
ror on the driver's side in the vehicle. They could otherwise
become trapped when moving the seat or X Press memory button M 2.
the steering wheel. X Press one of storage position switches 1,
2 or 3 1 within three seconds.
G Risk of accident
The settings are stored in the selected pre-
Only use the memory function on the
set position. A tone sounds when the set-
driver’s side when the vehicle is stationary.
tings have been completed. Z
You could otherwise be distracted from the
* optional
93
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 94

Controls
Memory functions*
Calling up a stored setting Storing a parking position X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary and
that the key is in position 2 in the ignition
G Risk of accident To make it easier to park, you can store the lock.
Only use the memory function on the front-passenger side exterior mirror position
in such a way that you can see the rear wheel X Press button 3 for the exterior mirror on
driver’s side when the vehicle is stationary. the front-passenger side.
You could otherwise be distracted from the on that side as soon as you engage reverse
traffic conditions by the steering wheel and gear. X Use button 2 to adjust the exterior mirror
seat moving of their own accord, and cause You can store a parking position for the exte- to a position which allows you to see the
an accident. rior mirror on the front-passenger side using rear wheel and the kerb.
the memory button. X Press memory button M 4.
X Press and hold the relevant storage posi- You will find information about using the exte-
tion switch 1, 2 or 3 until the seat, steering rior mirror's parking position in the "Parking
X Press one of the arrows on adjustment but-
wheel and mirrors are in the stored posi- aid" section (Y page 92). ton 2 within three seconds.
tion. The parking position is stored if the exterior
mirror does not move.
i The setting procedure is interrupted as
soon as you release the storage position i If the mirror moves out of position, repeat
switch. the steps. You can adjust the exterior mir-
ror again after storing the setting.
1 Exterior mirror on the driver's side

2 Adjustment button
3 Exterior mirror on the front-passenger
side
4 Memory button M
* optional
94
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 95

Controls
Seat belts
Seat belts hip joints – not across your abdomen. If systems on suitable vehicle seats. You
necessary, push down the belt strap can find more information under "Chil-
Wearing seat belts slightly and then retighten it in the roll-up dren in the vehicle" in the "Safety" sec-
Seat belts are the most effective means of direction. tion of the Owner's Manual. Follow the
restraining the movement of vehicle occu- RDo not route the belt strap across sharp manufacturer's installation instructions
pants in the event of an accident. This or fragile objects, especially if these are when fitting the child restraint system.
reduces the risk of vehicle occupants coming located on or in your clothing, e.g. spec- RDo not secure any objects with a seat belt
into contact with the vehicle interior. tacles, pencils, keys, etc. The seat belt if the seat belt is also being used by one
G Risk of injury strap could be damaged and tear in an of the vehicle's occupants.
A seat belt which is not worn correctly, or accident and you or other vehicle occu-
which has not been engaged in the seat belt pants could be injured. G Risk of injury
buckle correctly, cannot perform its inten- ROnly one person should use each seat The seat belt does not offer the intended
ded protective function. Under certain cir- belt at any one time. Children must never level of protection unless the backrest is
cumstances this could cause severe or travel sitting on the lap of other occu- almost vertical. Under certain circumstan-
even fatal injuries. pants. It would not be possible to restrain ces this could cause severe or even fatal
Make sure that all occupants – in particular, the child in the event of a sudden change injuries.
pregnant women – wear their seat belt cor- in direction, braking or an accident. This Before starting a journey, make sure that
rectly at all times. could result in severe or even fatal inju- the seat is properly adjusted and that the
RThe seat belt must pass closely over your ries to the child and other occupants. backrest is almost vertical.
body and must not be twisted. You RPersons less than 1.50 m tall cannot
should therefore avoid wearing bulky wear the seat belts correctly. For this G Risk of injury
clothing (e.g. a winter coat). The shoulder reason, secure persons less than 1.50 m A dirty or damaged seat belt or a seat belt
belt section must be routed across the tall in specially designed, suitable that has been subjected to a load in an
middle of your shoulder – on no account restraint systems. accident or modified no longer offers the
across your neck or under your arm – and RChildren
intended level of protection. Under certain
less than 1.50 m tall or under
pulled tight against your upper body. The circumstances this could cause severe or
12 years of age cannot wear the seat
lap belt must always pass across your lap even fatal injuries.
belts properly. Therefore, always secure
as low down as possible, i.e. over your Z
these children in suitable child restraint
95
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 96

Controls
Seat belts
For this reason, check regularly that the Routing the belt
seat belts are not damaged or dirty. X Adjust the seat and move the backrest to
Always have damaged seat belts or seat an almost vertical position (Y page 77).
belts that have been subjected to a load in
X Pull the belt smoothly through belt sash
an accident replaced at a qualified special-
guide 1.
ist workshop. Choose a qualified specialist
workshop which has the necessary special- X Route the belt over the centre of the shoul-
ist knowledge and tools for the work der without twisting it.
required. Mercedes-Benz recommends X Engage belt tongue 2 into buckle 3.
that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service
Centre for this purpose. X If necessary, adjust the belt to the appro-
priate height (Y page 97).
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-
mends that you only use seat belts which X If necessary, pull upwards on the shoulder
have been approved by Mercedes-Benz for section of the belt to tighten the belt across
your vehicle. your body.
Routing the belt

1 Belt sash guide X Press release button 4 and guide belt
2 Belt tongue tongue 2 back towards belt sash guide
3 Buckle 1.
4 Release button
96
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 97

Controls
Seat belts
Belt warning for driver and front Belt height adjustment X Slide the belt sash guide downwards.
passenger X Let go of release button 1 and make sure
You can adjust the seat belt height on the fol-
The < seat belt warning lamp in the instru- lowing seats: that the belt sash guide has engaged.
ment cluster reminds you that all occupants RDriver's seat
should fasten their seat belts. The < seat
belt warning lamp may light up continuously
RFront-passenger seat Correct driver's seat position
or it may flash. Additionally, there may be a ROuter rear seats
warning tone. Adjust the belt to a height that allows it to be
The < seat belt warning lamp goes out and routed across the middle of your shoulder.
the warning tone ceases when the driver and
the front passenger have fastened their seat
belt.
For certain countries only: regardless of
whether the driver or the front passenger is
already secured, the < seat belt warning
lamp lights up for six seconds after the engine
has been started. The < seat belt warning
lamp then goes out if both the driver and the
front passenger have fastened their seat belt.
i Further information about the < seat 1 Release catch
belt warning lamp (Y page 290).
X To raise: slide the belt sash guide upwards.
The belt sash guide engages in various posi-
tions. 1 Steering wheel
X To lower: press and hold release button 2 Seat belt
1. 3 Seat
Z
97
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 98

Controls
Seat belts
G Risk of accident Make sure that: It should:
Only adjust the driver's seat when the vehi- Ryou are as far away from the driver's front Rfit snugly across your body
cle is stationary. You will otherwise be dis- airbag as possible Rbe routed across the middle of your
tracted from the road and traffic conditions Ryou are sitting in a normal upright posi- shoulder
and you could lose control of the vehicle as tion Rrouted in your pelvic area across the hip
a result of the seat moving. This could
Ryou can fasten the seat belt properly joints
cause an accident.
Ryou have moved the backrest to an
G Risk of accident almost vertical position
Only adjust the steering wheel when the Ryou have set the seat angle so that your
vehicle is stationary and do not pull away
thighs are gently supported
until the steering wheel adjustment mech-
anism is locked in position. You might oth- Ryou can depress the pedals properly
erwise drive without the steering wheel Ryou have adjusted the head restraint so
adjustment mechanism being locked in that the back of your head is supported
position. As a result you could be distracted at eye level by the central area of the
from road and traffic conditions by an unex- head restraint
pected movement of the steering wheel
and thereby cause an accident. X Check whether steering wheel 1 is adjus-
The steerability of the vehicle is however ted properly (Y page 89).
not affected. Make sure that:
Ryou can hold the steering wheel with your
X Check whether seat 3 and the head arms slightly bent
restraint are adjusted properly Ryou can move your legs freely
(Y page 77).
Ryou can see all the displays in the instru-
ment cluster clearly
X Check whether you have fastened seat belt
2 properly (Y page 95).
98
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 99

Controls
Lights
Lights ! Switch off the side lamps or parking lamp
when you leave the vehicle. This prevents
Light switch the battery from discharging.
For reasons of safety, Mercedes-Benz recom-
mends that you drive with the lights switched Dipped-beam headlamps
on even during the daytime. In some coun-
tries, daytime operation of headlamps varies X Make sure that the key is in position 2 of
due to legal requirements and self-imposed the ignition lock or that the engine is run-
obligations. In these countries, the dipped- ning.
beam headlamps are automatically switched X To switch on: turn the light switch to
on when the engine is started. $ a Left-hand parking lamp B.
i If you drive in countries in which traffic % g Right-hand parking lamp The dipped-beam headlamps, parking
drives on the opposite side of the road to & M Lights off/constant headlamp mode lamps and licence plate lamps are switched
the country where the vehicle is registered, on. The green dipped-beam indicator lamp
( U Automatic headlamp mode/con-
oncoming traffic may be dazzled by the in the instrument cluster light up.
stant headlamp mode
asymmetrical dipped-beam headlamps.
) C Side lamps, licence plate and instru-
Have the headlamps changed to symmet- Constant headlamp mode
rical dipped beam when driving in these ment lighting
countries. You can obtain information * B Dipped-beam headlamps or main- In countries in which constant headlamp
about this from any Mercedes-Benz Service beam headlamps mode is not a legal requirement, you can
Centre. , ¥ Foglamps make this setting using the on-board com-
. † Rear foglamp puter.
You can activate or deactivate "constant
i The exterior lighting automatically headlamp mode" using the on-board com-
switches off when you remove the key from puter (Y page 135).
the ignition lock or open the door while the
ignition is switched off (ignition key in posi-
tion 0).
Z
99
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 100

Controls
Lights
X To switch on: turn the light switch to G Risk of accident G Risk of accident
M or U. When it is dark or foggy, turn the light When it is dark or foggy, turn the light
The dipped-beam headlamps, side lamps switch from U to B in good time. You switch from U to B in good time. You
and licence plate lamp are switched on could otherwise cause an accident if the could otherwise cause an accident if the
when the engine is running. headlamps were to switch off temporarily. headlamps were to switch off temporarily.
i When you turn the light switch to any X To switch on: turn the light switch to When the light switch is set to U you can-
position other than M or U, the cor- U. not switch on the front or rear foglamps.
responding light goes on. The side lamps are switched on and off X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in
automatically when the key is in position the ignition lock.
Automatic headlamp mode 1 in the ignition lock. X To switch on the front foglamps: turn the
The side lamps, dipped-beam headlamps and The dipped-beam headlamps, side lamps light switch to the B or C position.
licence plate lamp are switched on or off and licence plate lamp are switched on X Pull the light switch out to the first stop.
automatically, depending on the brightness of automatically when the engine is running.
The ¥ green indicator lamp next to the
the ambient light. When the dipped-beam headlamps are
light switch lights up.
switched on, the green dipped-beam indi-
G Risk of accident cator lamp in the instrument cluster lights X To switch on the rear foglamp: turn the
When the light switch is set to U, the up. light switch to B or C.
lights are not switched on automatically in
X Pull the light switch out to the second
foggy conditions. This could endanger you
Front foglamps/Rear foglamp detent.
and others. Therefore, turn the light switch
to B in darkness and fog. The † yellow indicator lamp next to the
G Risk of accident light switch lights up.
Automatic headlamp mode is only a driving If you suspect that driving conditions will be
aid. You are responsible for the vehicle foggy, turn the light switch to B before X To switch off the front foglamps/rear
lighting at all times. you start your journey. Otherwise, your foglamps: push in the light switch to the
vehicle may not be visible and you could stop.
therefore endanger yourself and others. The corresponding indicator lamp goes out.
100
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 101

Controls
Lights
Combination switch (turn signals, briefly in the appropriate direction. The cor- Main-beam headlamp
main-beam headlamps and headlamp responding turn signal flashes three times. X Make sure that the key is in position 2 of
flasher) the ignition lock or that the engine is run-
Main-beam headlamps/headlamp flas- ning.
Turn signal her X Turn the light switch to B or U16.
X To switch on: press the combination
switch in the direction of arrow 1.
The main-beam indicator lamp A in the
instrument cluster lights up.
X To switch off: move the combination
switch back to its normal position.
The main-beam indicator lamp A in the
instrument cluster goes out.
Combination switch Combination switch Headlamp flasher

1 Right-hand turn signal 1 Main-beam headlamp X To switch on: briefly pull the combination
2 Left-hand turn signal 2 Headlamp flasher switch in the direction of arrow 2.
X To switch on: press the combination

switch in the direction of arrow 1 or 2.
The corresponding turn signal indicator
lamp K or L in the instrument clus-
ter flashes.
i If you only wish to indicate a minor change

of direction, press the combination switch
Z
16 In the U position, the main-beam headlamps are only switched on when it is dark.
101
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 102

Controls
Lights
Hazard warning lamps Adjusting the headlamp range (vehi- Position Load
cles with halogen headlamps)
2 Front and rear seats occu-
The headlamp range control allows you to
pied, boot laden
adjust the cone of light from the headlamps
according to how your vehicle is laden. 3 Driver's seat or both front
You can only adjust the headlamp range while seats occupied, boot laden
the engine is running.
Centre console
1 Hazard warning lamp button
X To activate: press hazard warning lamp

button 1.
All turn signals flash. If you now activate a
turn signal, only those turn signal lamps on
Saloon
the corresponding side of the vehicle will Estate
1 Thumbwheel for headlamp range
flash. 1 Thumbwheel for headlamp range
X To deactivate: press hazard warning lamp Position Load
button 1.
0 Front seats occupied
1 Front and rear seats occupied
102
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 103

Controls
Lights
Position Load Headlamp cleaning system* Active light function
The headlamps are cleaned automatically if For the active light function, the dipped-beam
-1 Front and rear seats occupied headlamps swivel horizontally. The swivel
the "Wipe with windscreen washer fluid" func-
or tion is operated five times while the lights are angle changes according to the respective
Front and rear seats occu- on and the engine is running. When you driving situation. The active light function is
pied, luggage compartment switch off the ignition, the automatic head- not active when the vehicle is stationary.
laden lamp cleaning system is reset and counting is
resumed from 0. Cornering light function
0 Front seats occupied
Specially designed headlamps light up the
1 Driver's seat occupied, lug- area into which you are driving when turning
Intelligent Light System* (vehicles
gage compartment laden corners.
with bi-xenon headlamps*)
If you are driving at speeds below 40 km/h,
The Intelligent Light System adapts the light- the cornering light function is activated either
X Turn thumbwheel for headlamp range 1 to ing of the front headlamps to the prevailing
the position which corresponds to the load by the turn signals or when the steering wheel
driving conditions so that the road is illumi- is turned. If you are driving at speeds above
in your vehicle. nated better. 40 km/h the cornering light function is deac-
i The Intelligent Light System is only active tivated.
when it is dark.
Switching on
The Intelligent Light System comprises: X Make sure that the engine is running.
RActive light function
X Switch on the dipped-beam headlamps.
RCornering light function
X Switch off the fog lights.
RMotorway mode
X Switch on the turn signal.
RExtended range foglamps
The cornering light on the same side as the
turn signal comes on, even if you turn the
steering wheel in the opposite direction
Z
after indicating.
* optional
103
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 104

Controls
Lights
or Motorway mode is activated if you are driving Interior lighting
X Turn the steering wheel in the desired faster than 110 km/h and do not make any
direction. large steering movements for 1,000 m. Front overhead control panel
When in a forwards gear: the cornering
lamp on the inside of the bend comes on. Extended range foglamps
When in reverse gear: the cornering light on The extended range foglamps reduce the
the outside of the bend comes on. glare experienced by the driver and improve
the illumination of the edge of the carriage-
Switching off way.
X Turn the steering wheel back to the straight X To switch on: switch on the rear foglamp.
ahead position. The front foglamps and the rear foglamp
The turn signal switches off. The cornering are switched on. The extended range fog-
lamp may remain lit for a short time. lamps are activated if you are driving slower
or than 70 km/h. Front overhead control panel
X Switch off the turn signal. X To switch off: switch off the rear foglamp. 1 X To switch the left-hand reading lamp
The cornering lamp may remain lit for a on/off
short time. i The extended range foglamps switch off 2 ò To switch the rear interior lighting
The cornering light will go out after a maxi- automatically when you drive faster than on/off
mum of three minutes. 100 km/h. 3 ¡ To switch the automatic function
on/off
Motorway mode 4 X To switch the right-hand reading
lamp on/off
Motorway mode optimises the illumination of
5 ð To switch the front interior lighting
the road by:
on/off
Rcontrolling the brightness
Radapting the headlamp range
104
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 105

Controls
Windscreen wipers
Automatic function Rear-compartment overhead control Windscreen wipers
X To switch on/off: press the ¡ button. panel
Switching the windscreen wipers on/
The interior lighting switches on if it is dark off
when you:
Runlock the vehicle
Ropen a door
Rremove the key from the ignition lock
The interior lighting switches off after a delay.
You can set the delayed switch-off using the
on-board computer.
i If the door is left open, the interior lighting
Rear-compartment overhead control panel
goes out after approximately five minutes.
1 X To switch the left-hand reading lamp
Combination switch
Manual control on/off
1 To switch on the windscreen wipers
2 X To switch the right-hand reading
Front interior lighting lamp on/off 2 Single wipe/to wipe the windscreen using
X To switch on/off: press the ð button. washer fluid
Rear-compartment reading lamps Settings:
Rear-compartment interior lighting X To switch on/off: press the X button. M Windscreen wipers off
X To switch on/off: press the ¦ button.
U Intermittent wipe, low
Front reading lamps (rain sensor set to low sensitivity)
X To switch on/off: press the X button.
V Intermittent wipe, high
(rain sensor set to high sensitivity)
Z
105
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 106

Controls
Windscreen wipers
u Continuous wipe, slow Intermittent wipe/rain sensor Rear window wiper (Estate)
X Depending on the intensity of the rain, turn
t Continuous wipe, fast the combination switch in the direction of
arrow 1 to position U or V.
! If the windscreen becomes dirty in dry The rain sensor is activated. The appropri-
weather conditions, the windscreen wipers ate wiping frequency is set automatically
may be activated inadvertently. This could according to the intensity of the rain.
then damage the windscreen wiper blades
or scratch the windscreen. Continuous wipe
For this reason, you should always switch X Depending on the intensity of the rain, turn
off the windscreen wipers in dry weather.
the combination switch in the direction of
arrow 1 to position u or t. Combination switch
X Make sure that the key is in position 1 or
1 Switch
2 in the ignition lock.
% To wipe with washer fluid
The various wiper settings can be selected Switching off the windscreen wipers
as follows: & To switch on intermittent wiping
X Turn the combination switch to position ( To switch off intermittent wiping
M. ) To wipe with washer fluid
Single wipe
X Briefly press the combination switch to the
Intermittent wipe
pressure point in the direction of arrow
2. X Make sure that the key is in position 1 in
the ignition lock.
Wiping with washer fluid X To switch on: turn switch 1 to position
&.
X Press the combination switch beyond the
pressure point in the direction of arrow X To switch off: turn switch 1 to position
2. (.
106
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 107

Controls
Side windows
Wiping with washer fluid Side windows G Risk of injury
X Make sure that the key is in position 1 in Do not leave children unsupervised in the
Opening/closing the side windows
the ignition lock. vehicle, even if they are secured in a child
G Risk of injury restraint system. The children could:
X Turn switch 1 to position % or posi-
Make sure that nobody can become trap- Rbe seriously or even fatally injured on
tion ) and hold it there until the rear
ped between the side window and the door parts of the vehicle
window has been cleaned.
frame as a side window is opened. Do not Rbe seriously or even fatally injured by
The rear window is wiped for a further five
touch or lean against the side window dur- prolonged exposure to extremely high or
seconds after the switch is released.
ing the opening procedure. You could extremely low temperatures
become trapped between the side window
and the door frame as the window moves If children open a door, they could:
down. If danger threatens, release the Rseriously or even fatally injure other peo-
switch or pull the switch upwards to close ple

the side window again. Rget out of the vehicle, thereby injuring
themselves or be seriously or even fatally
G Risk of injury injured by a passing vehicle
Activate the child-proof locks if children are
ped as you close a side window. If danger
travelling in the vehicle. They could other-
threatens, release the switch or press the
wise open doors or windows while the vehi-
switch a second time to open the side win-
cle is in motion and thereby injure them-
dow again.
selves or others.
G Risk of injury
Never leave children unsupervised in the i It is also possible to open and close the
vehicle. Always take the key with you when side windows from the outside using the
leaving the vehicle, even if you only leave it "Summer opening" (Y page 109) and "con-
for a short time. venience closing" (Y page 109) features
respectively.
Z
107
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 108

Controls
Side windows
i You can disable the controls for the rear X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in If a side window locks up during closing and
side windows from the driver's seat the ignition lock. has reopened again slightly:
(Y page 47). X Immediately after the window locks up, pull
i When the key is turned to position 0 or
the switch upwards until the window is fully
i If PRE-SAFE® has been activated, the side removed from the ignition lock, it is still
closed.
windows close automatically, leaving a possible to operate the windows until the
small gap. driver's or front-passenger door is opened, The side window is closed with more force.
The switches for all side windows are located but for no longer than five minutes. If a side window locks up again during closing
on the driver's door. There is also a switch on X To open or close: press the switch down and has reopened again slightly:
each door for the respective window. or pull it up beyond the pressure point and X Immediately after the window locks up, pull
hold it until the corresponding window is in the switch upwards until the window is fully
the desired position. closed.
X To open or close fully: press the switch The side window is closed without the anti-
down or pull it up beyond the pressure point entrapment feature.
and release it.
X To stop: briefly press the switch down or Resetting the windows
pull it up.
Each side window must be reset if the battery
Closing with increased force and without was disconnected or discharged.
the anti-entrapment feature X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in
Switches on the driver's door G Risk of injury the ignition lock.
1 Front left
Make sure that nobody can become trap- X Pull the switch upwards until the window is
2 Front right ped and a serious or even fatal injury is not closed, and hold it in this position for
3 Rear right caused as you close a side window with another second.
4 Rear left increased force or without the anti-entrap-
ment feature.
108
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 109

Controls
Side windows
Summer opening X Point the tip of the key at the driver's door G Risk of injury
handle. Make sure nobody can become trapped
You can ventilate the vehicle before a journey.
To do this, you can use the key to simultane- X Unlock the vehicle by pressing the k when using the convenience closing fea-
ously: button. ture. Proceed as follows if there is a risk of
X Press and hold the k button until the entrapment:
Ropen the side windows
side windows and the sliding/tilting sun- With the key:
Ropen the sliding/tilting sunroof* or the roof* or panorama sliding sunroof* are in RRelease the j button.
panorama sliding sunroof* and the roller the desired position. RPress and hold the k button until the
sunblinds*
If the roller sunblinds* of the panorama slid- side windows and the sliding/tilting sun-
Rswitch on the seat ventilation*
ing sunroof* are closed, the roller sunroof* or the panorama sliding sunroof*
i The "Summer opening" feature can only blinds* are opened first. open again.
be operated via the key. X Press and hold the k button again until With KEYLESS GO*:
the panorama sliding sunroof* is in the RRelease the locking button on the door
desired position. handle.
RPull the door handle immediately and
hold it.
Convenience closing
The side windows and the sliding/tilting
When you lock the vehicle, you can close the sunroof* or the panorama sliding sun-
side windows and the sliding/tilting sunroof* open.
roof* or the panorama sliding sunroof* simul-
taneously.
On vehicles with a panorama sliding sun-
roof* you can then close the roller sun-
blinds*.
* optional
109
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 110

Controls
Driving and parking

With the key With KEYLESS GO*: Driving and parking
Starting the engine
G Risk of accident
Do not keep any objects in the driver's foot-
well. If you use a floormat or carpet in the
driver's footwell, make sure that they are
correctly secured and that there is suffi-
cient clearance for the pedals.
Objects could otherwise get between the
pedals in the event of sudden braking or
acceleration. You may then no longer be
1 Locking button on the door handle
X Point the tip of the key at the driver's door able to brake, change gear or accelerate as
handle. X Keep locking button 1 on the door handle intended. This may result in an accident and
X Lock the vehicle with the j button. pressed until the side windows and the slid- injury.
Keep the button pressed until the side win- ing/tilting sunroof* or panorama sliding
X G Risk of poisoning
dows and the sliding/tilting sunroof* or sunroof* are fully closed.
Never leave the engine running in enclosed
panorama sliding sunroof* are fully closed. X Make sure that all the side windows and the spaces. The exhaust gases contain carbon
X Make sure that all the side windows and the sliding/tilting sunroof* or panorama slid- monoxide. Inhaling exhaust fumes consti-
sliding/tilting sunroof* or panorama sliding sunroof* are closed. tutes a health hazard and could lead to loss
ing sunroof* are closed. of consciousness or even death.
On vehicles with a panorama sliding sun-
On vehicles with a panorama sliding sunroof*:
! Do not depress the accelerator pedal
roof*: X Press and hold locking button 1 again when starting the engine.
X Press and hold the j button again until until the roller sunblinds* of the panorama
sliding sunroof* close. i If you depress the brake when starting the
the roller sunblinds* of the panorama slid-
engine, pedal travel will be unusually long
ing sunroof* close. and there will be less pedal resistance.
* optional
110
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 111

Controls
Driving and parking

Manual transmission Automatic transmission* release it immediately. The engine then
starts automatically.
X To start a petrol engine: turn the key to
position 3 in the ignition lock (Y page 76)
and release it as soon as the engine is run-
ning.
X To start a diesel engine: turn the key to
position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 76).
The q preglow indicator lamp in the
instrument cluster lights up.
X When the q preglow indicator lamp
X Shift to neutral.
P Park position with selector lever lock goes out, turn the key to position 3
R Reverse gear (Y page 76) and release it.
X Depress the parking brake (Y page 113).
N Neutral The engine starts automatically.
Further information about the manual trans- D Drive position
mission (Y page 115). i You can start the engine without preglow
X Before starting, make sure P is selected.
if the engine is warm.
i The engine can also be started when the
selector lever is in position N. Starting the engine with KEYLESS GO*
Further information about the automatic
G Risk of injury
transmission (Y page 115).
Your vehicle can be started using a valid
Starting the engine with the key KEYLESS GO key*. For this reason, children
should never be left unsupervised in the
i Vehicles with automatic transmission*: vehicle. Always take the KEYLESS GO
You can also use the "touch-start" function. key* with you when leaving the vehicle,
To do this, turn the key to position 3 and Z
* optional
111
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 112

Controls
Driving and parking

even if you are only leaving it for a short X Depress the brake pedal. ! AMG vehicles: at low engine tempera-
time. The selector lever lock is released. tures (below + 20 °C), the maximum engine
speed is limited in order to protect the
The KEYLESS GO button can be used to start X Petrol engine: press KEYLESS GO button
engine. Avoid driving at full throttle when
the vehicle without inserting the key in the 1 once.
the engine is cold in order to protect the
ignition lock. The engine starts automatically. engine and maintain smooth engine oper-
The KEYLESS GO button is on the selector X Diesel engine: press KEYLESS GO button ation.
lever. 1 once.
i The vehicle locks centrally once you have
Preglow is activated and the engine starts
pulled away. The locking knobs in the doors
automatically.
drop down.
i You can start the engine without preglow You can open the doors from the inside at
if the engine is warm: any time.
X Press and hold KEYLESS GO button You can also deactivate the automatic lock-
1 until the engine is running. ing feature (Y page 137).
Manual transmission
Pulling away X Depress the clutch pedal.
1 KEYLESS GO button
! Warm up the engine quickly. Do not use X Shift to either first or reverse gear.
the engine's full performance until it has X Pull the parking brake release handle to
reached operating temperature.
release the parking brake.
Only shift into reverse gear when the vehi-
cle is stationary.
X Slowly release the clutch pedal and
depress the accelerator pedal.
Where possible, avoid spinning the drive
wheels when pulling away on slippery ! Change gear in good time and avoid spin-
roads. You could otherwise damage the ning the wheels. You could otherwise dam-
drive train. age the vehicle.
112
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 113

Controls
Driving and parking

Automatic transmission* Parking Parking brake
i It is only possible to move the selector G Risk of accident
lever to the desired position if you depress Only remove the key from the ignition lock
the brake pedal. Only then is the selector when the vehicle is stationary since you
lever lock released. cannot steer the vehicle with the key
X Depress the brake pedal and hold it down. removed.
Never leave children unsupervised in the
X Pull the parking brake release handle to
vehicle. They could release the parking
release the parking brake.
brake. This could lead to a serious or fatal
X Move the selector lever to position D or R. accident.
i Wait for the shift process to complete G Risk of fire 1 Release handle
before pulling away. Make sure that the exhaust system does 2 Parking brake
X Release the brake pedal. not under any circumstances come into
contact with easily ignitable material such X To release: depress the brake pedal and
X Carefully depress the accelerator pedal. keep it depressed.
as dry grass or petrol. The material could
i Upshifts take place at higher engine otherwise ignite and set the vehicle on fire. On vehicles with automatic transmission*,
speeds after a cold start. This helps the the selector lever lock is released.
catalytic converter to reach its operating X Pull release handle 1.
temperature more quickly.
X The 3 indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster goes out.
X To apply: depress parking brake 2 firmly.
The 3 indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster lights up if the engine is running.
i On steep slopes, turn the front wheels Z

towards the kerb.
* optional
113
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 114

Controls
Transmission
Switching off the engine Using KEYLESS GO* Transmission
X Press and hold the KEYLESS GO button
G Risk of accident Introduction to the transmission
(Y page 77).
If the engine is not running, there is no
The engine stops and all the lamps in the G Risk of accident
power assistance for the steering and
instrument cluster go out (Y page 26). The movement of the pedals must not be
brakes. Steering and braking then takes
much more effort. impaired in any way. Do not keep any
objects in the driver's footwell. Make sure
As a result, you might lose control of the
that floormats or carpets are correctly
vehicle, cause an accident and injure your-
secured and that there is sufficient clear-
self and others.
ance for the pedals.
Do not switch off the engine while driving.
G Risk of accident
Do not change down for additional engine
Vehicles with manual transmission
braking on a slippery road surface. This
X Shift to either first or reverse gear. could cause the drive wheels to lose their
X Turn the key to position 0(Y page 76) in the grip and the vehicle could skid. This could
ignition lock and remove it. cause you to lose control of your vehicle
and cause an accident.
The immobiliser is activated.
Vehicles with automatic transmission*

X Move the selector lever to P.
Using the key

X Turn the key to position 0(Y page 76) in the
ignition lock and remove it.
The immobiliser is activated.
* optional
114
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 115

Controls
Transmission
Manual transmission X Move the gear lever firmly to the left When the selector lever is in position D, you
beyond the point of resistance and then can influence the gearshifts made by the
forwards. automatic transmission by:
Rrestricting the shift range
Rchanging gear yourself

Automatic transmission*
Selector lever positions
ì Park position
Prevents the vehicle from rolling
away when stopped. Only move the
selector lever to P when the vehicle
! When shifting between 5th and 6th gear, is stationary.
you must press the shift lever to the right.
i The key can only be removed
You could otherwise shift unintentionally
when the selector lever is in posi-
into 3rd or 4th gear and damage the trans-
tion P. If the key is removed from
mission.
the ignition lock, the selector
Do not exceed the maximum speed for the lever is locked in position P.
individual gears.
If you shift down at too high a speed (trans- í Reverse gear
mission braking), this can cause the engine Only move the selector lever to R
to overspeed, leading to engine damage. when the vehicle is stationary.
Engaging reverse gear 1 Selector lever position

2 Gearshift program (S/C) or (S/C/M)*
! Only engage reverse gear when the vehi-
cle is stationary, otherwise the transmis- The current shift range and gearshift program
sion could be damaged. (S/C) or (S/C/M)* appear in the display of Z
the speedometer.
* optional
115
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 116

Controls
Transmission
ë Neutral gram selected. This also extends the shift Shift ranges
range.
Releasing the brakes will allow you When the selector lever is in position D, it is
to move the vehicle freely, e.g. to X To shift down: briefly press the selector possible to restrict or derestrict the shift
push it or tow it. lever to the left towards D–. range for the automatic transmission.
Do not move the selector lever to The automatic transmission shifts down to X Briefly press the selector lever to the right
N while you are driving. The auto- the next gear, depending on the gear cur- towards D+ or to the left towards D–.
matic transmission could other- rently selected. This also restricts the shift The shift range selected is shown in the
wise be damaged. range. display. The automatic transmission shifts
If ESP® is deactivated or faulty: only as far as the selected gear.
only move the selector lever to N if i To prevent the engine from overrevving,
the vehicle is in danger of skidding, the automatic transmission does not shift i If the maximum engine speed for the shift
e.g. on icy roads. down if you push the selector lever towards range is reached and you continue to accel-
D– while driving at too high a speed. erate, the automatic transmission shifts up
ê Drive in order to prevent the engine from over-
X To derestrict the shift range: press and
The automatic transmission revving even if the shift range is restricted.
hold the selector lever towards D+ until D
changes gear automatically. All is shown once more in the display.
forward gears are available. Driving situation
The automatic transmission shifts from the
current shift range directly to D. è The braking effect of the engine can
be used in this position.
One-touch gearshifting X To select the most effective shift
range: press and hold the selector lever to
When the selector lever is in position D, you the left towards D–.
can perform gearshifts yourself, even on vehi- The automatic transmission will shift to a
cles with automatic transmission. range which allows ideal acceleration and
X To shift up: briefly press the selector lever deceleration. To do this, the automatic
to the right towards D+. transmission will shift down one or more
The automatic transmission shifts up to the gears.
next gear, depending on the gearshift pro-
116
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 117

Controls
Transmission
ç To use the braking effect of the S Sport For all normal driving con- Driving tips
engine on downhill gradients and ditions Accelerator pedal position
for driving:
C Comfort For comfort mode Your style of driving influences how the auto-
Ron steep mountain roads
matic transmission shifts gear:
Rin mountainous terrain Rlittle throttle: early upshifts
Rin arduous conditions ! Only press program selector button 1 Rmore throttle: late upshifts
when the selector lever is in position P, N
æ To use the braking effect of the or D. Kickdown
engine on extremely steep downhill
X Press program selector button 1 repeat- Use kickdown for maximum acceleration.
gradients and long downhill
stretches. edly until the letter (C/S) for the desired X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the
gearshift program appears in the speed- pressure point.
ometer display. The transmission shifts to a lower gear
Comfort mode C is characterised by the fol- depending on the engine speed.
Program selector button
lowing: X Ease off the accelerator pedal once the
Ran increase in traction. This improves the desired speed is reached.
driving stability of the vehicle on slippery The automatic transmission shifts back up.
road surfaces, for example.
Rthe automatic transmission shifting up Trailer towing
sooner. The vehicle is driven at lower X Drive in the middle of the engine speed
engine speeds and the wheels are less range on uphill gradients.
likely to spin.
X Shift down to shift range 3 or 2
(Y page 116) depending on the incline of
the uphill or downhill gradient, even if
cruise control* is activated.
1 Program selector button
Z
* optional
117
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 118

Controls
Transmission
Steering wheel gearshift paddles* Downshifting shift paddles or the selector lever. The man-
and manual gearshift program* G Risk of accident ual gearshift program M can be selected
using the program selector button.
Steering wheel gearshift paddles braking on a slippery road surface. This
It is possible to shift gear using either the could cause the drive wheels to lose their
steering wheel gearshift paddles or the selec- grip and the vehicle could skid.
tor lever. X Pull left-hand paddle 1.
The automatic transmission shifts down to
the next gear. If you are not driving in man-
ual gearshift program M, the shift range will
be restricted.
i When the selector lever is in position P,

1 Program selector button
N or R, you cannot change gear using the
steering wheel gearshift paddles. S Sport For all normal driving con-
If the manual gearshift programme M has ditions
been selected and you restart the engine,
1 Left-hand paddle: to shift down the automatic transmission will switch to C Comfort For comfort mode
2 Right-hand paddle: to shift up
an automatic gearshift program. If the auto-
matic gearshift program S or C has been M Manual For manual gearshifting
selected, the automatic transmission will
Upshifting
resume the corresponding gearshift pro- X To activate: press program selector but-
X Pull right-hand paddle 2.
gram when you restart the engine. ton 1 repeatedly until M appears in the
The automatic transmission shifts up to the
display.
next gear. If you are not driving in manual
Manual gearshift program If the selector lever is in position D, you can
gearshift program M, then the shift range
will be derestricted. In the manual gearshift program M, you can shift up or down through the gears. The gear
change gear using the steering wheel gear-
* optional
118
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 119

Controls
Transmission
currently selected and engaged is shown in next to the gear indicator, instructing you to You can also use kickdown for maximum
the display. shift up. acceleration in manual gearshift program M.
X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the
Upshifting Downshifting
pressure point.
X Briefly press the selector lever to the right
G Risk of accident The transmission shifts to a lower gear
towards D+
Do not change down for additional engine depending on the engine speed.
or braking on a slippery road surface. This
X Pull the right-hand steering wheel gearshift could cause the drive wheels to lose their i It is not possible to shift gears using the
paddle (Y page 118). grip and the vehicle could skid. steering wheel gearshift paddles during
The automatic transmission shifts up to the kickdown.
X Briefly press the selector lever to the left
next gear.
towards D-
Vehicles with AMG engines or
! In manual gearshift program M, the auto- X Pull the left-hand steering wheel gearshift
matic transmission does not shift up auto- paddle (Y page 118).
matically even when the limiting speed for The automatic transmission shifts down to
the current gear is reached. When the lim- the next gear.
iting speed is reached, the fuel supply is cut
to prevent the engine from overrevving. i For maximum acceleration, pull the left-
You must make sure that the engine speed hand steering wheel gearshift paddle until
does not reach the red area of the rev coun- the transmission selects the optimum gear
ter. There is otherwise a risk of engine for the current speed.
damage.
Kickdown
X Shift up a gear when the ^ upshift symbol
i It is not possible to use kickdown in the
appears in the display instead of M.
manual gearshift program M on vehicles
When the AMG display is switched on, the with AMG engines.
display colour changes to red and UP appears Z
119
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 120

Controls
Instrument cluster
Instrument cluster Activating the multi-function display Adjusting the instrument cluster
lighting
Points to remember X Switch on the ignition.
X Brighter or dimmer: turn reset button
You will find a full overview of the instrument 1 clockwise or anti-clockwise.
cluster in the "At a glance" section
(Y page 26).
G Risk of accident Coolant temperature gauge
No further messages can be displayed if the The coolant temperature gauge is in the
instrument cluster and/or the multi-func- instrument cluster on the right-hand side.
tion display fails.
Under normal operating conditions and with
This means that you will not see information the specified concentration of antifreeze/
about the driving situation, such as the corrosion inhibitor, the coolant temperature
speed, outside temperature, warning/indi- may rise to 120 † The coolant temperature
cator lamps, display messages or system 1 Reset button may rise to the top end of the scale at high
failures. The vehicle's handling character- outside temperatures and on long uphill
The multi-function display also switches on
istics may be affected. Adjust your driving stretches.
when you
style and speed accordingly.
Rpress reset button 1
Immediately consult a qualified specialist
workshop which has the necessary special- Ropen a door
ist knowledge and tools to carry out the Rswitch on the lights
work required. Mercedes-Benz recom-
mends that you use a Mercedes-Benz
Service Centre for this purpose. In particu-
lar, work relevant to safety or on safety-
related systems must be carried out at a
qualified specialist workshop.
120
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 121

Controls
On-board computer
Resetting the trip meter Rev counter On-board computer
X Select the standard display menu The red band in the rev counter indicates the Points to remember
(Y page 125). engine's overrevving range. The fuel supply is
interrupted to protect the engine when the The on-board computer is activated as soon
X Press and hold reset button 1 until the trip as the key is turned to position 1 in the igni-
meter is reset. red band is reached.
tion lock. You can use the on-board computer
! Do not drive in the overrevving range. to call up information relating to your vehicle
Doing so will damage the engine. and to make and adjust settings.
Speedometer with segments You can call up the next service due date,
H Environmental note
The segments in the speedometer indicate Avoid driving at high engine speeds, as this select the display language for the instrument
which speed range is available. increases your vehicle's consumption cluster and set other functions.
Cruise control mode: unnecessarily and pollutes the environ- G Risk of accident
The segments light up from the stored speed ment through increased emissions. Only use the on-board computer when road
to the maximum speed. and traffic conditions permit. You would
Distronic* mode: otherwise be distracted and unable to con-
One or two segments around the stored Outside temperature display centrate properly on driving, and could
speed light up. cause an accident.
G Risk of accident
Variable Speedtronic mode: The on-board computer shows information in
The road surface may be icy, especially in
The segments light up from the start of the wooded areas or on bridges, even if tem- the multi-function display.
scale to the selected limit speed. peratures are just above freezing point. The
vehicle could skid if you fail to adapt your
driving style. You should therefore always
adapt your driving style and speed to suit
the weather conditions.
There is a short delay before a change in out-
side temperature is displayed.
Z
* optional
121
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 122

Controls
On-board computer
Multi-function steering wheel 1 Multi-function display 5 j Press briefly to scroll back
You can control the multi-function display and k and forth in a menu.
2 æ RSelects submenus in the In the Audio/TV*/
the settings in the on-board computer with
ç Settings... menu DVD*menu: selects a stored
the buttons on the multi-function steering
wheel. RChanges values station, an audio track or a
RAdjusts the volume video scene*.
In the Telephone* menu:
3 s Accepts or rejects a call* switches to the phone book
t and selects a name or phone
number.
4 è Selecting menus: scrolls for-
ÿ wards or back j Press and hold in the Audio/
k TV*/DVD* menu: selects the
next/previous station or
selects an audio track using
rapid scrolling.
Press and hold in the Tele-
phone* menu: starts rapid
scrolling through the tele-
phone book.
Several functions are combined thematically

in the menus.
For example, the Audio/TV*/DVD* menu
contains functions for operating the radio or
DVD player. The functions can be used to
either look up information or to change set-
tings for your vehicle.
* optional
122
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 123

Controls
On-board computer
You can think of the configuration of the Multi-function display
menus and the functions within a menu as a
circle: The multi-function display shows you values
and settings as well as any display messages
X Press the è orÿ button repeatedly
that may have been generated.
to call up individual menus in sequence.
X Press the j or k button to call up
the functions within a menu.
Unlike other menus, the Settings menu con-
tains a number of submenus (Y page 131).
The number of menus depends on the equip- 1 Display area for menus or submenus
ment in your vehicle.
2 Status bar with outside temperature or
speed (Y page 134)
3 Trip meter
123
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 124

Controls
On-board computer
Menus and submenus
124
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 125

Controls
On-board computer
Function Function menus. The terms themselves are not always
displayed in the multi-function display.
1 Basic display menu (Y page 125) 4 Navigation* menu (Y page 130) The Audio, Navi* and Tel* menus are dis-
RDigital speedometer17 played slightly differently in vehicles with
(Y page 126) 5 Distronic* menu (distance display) audio equipment and vehicles with COMAND
(Y page 145) APS*. The examples given in this Owner's
ROutside tempera-
Manual apply to vehicles equipped with
ture17 (Y page 126) 6 Message memory menu18 (fault and
COMAND APS*.
RASSYST PLUS service display warning messages) (Y page 131)
(Y page 243)
7 Settings menu (Y page 131)
REngine oil level* (Y page 223)
Standard display menu
RResetting to factory settings
RTyre pressure loss warning system (Y page 132) i Menu overview: (Y page 124).
(Y page 230) or tyre pressure mon- RSelecting a submenu (Y page 132) Use the buttons on the multi-function steer-
itor* (Y page 232) ing wheel.
8 Trip computer menu X Press the è or · button to select the
2 AMG* menu (Y page 126) RConsumption statistics basic display.
(Y page 140)
3 Audio/TV*/DVD* (Y page 129)
menu RRange (Y page 140)
RRadio station (Y page 129)
9 Telephone* menu (Y page 141)
RAudio drive or media (Y page 129)
RTV* (Y page 130) This is what the displays look like when you
RDVD video* (Y page 130) scroll through the menus.
The generic terms in the table overview are
intended to help you navigate through the
17 The Z
sequence of the digital speedometer and the outside temperature display depends on the settings in the "Basic display" submenu.
18 This menu is only visible if there is a display message available.
* optional
125
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 126

Controls
On-board computer
Displaying the digital speedometer or AMG* menu
outside temperature
These functions are only available on AMG
You can use the Basic display submenu vehicles.
(Y page 134) to select whether the first func-
tion listed in the Basic display menu is the i Menu overview: see (Y page 124).
digital speedometer or the outside tempera- Use the buttons on the multi-function steer-
Basic display ture. ing wheel.
1 Outside temperature X Press the è or · button to select the X Press the è or · button to select the
2 Trip meter basic display. AMG menu.

Instead of outside temperature 1, you can X Press the j or k button to select the
opt to display the digital speedome- digital speedometer or the outside temper-
ter19 (Y page 134). ature.
You can select the following functions in the
Basic display menu by pressing the j or
k button:
Rdigital speedometer20 1 Gear indicator
RASSYST PLUS service display 2 Upshift instruction
(Y page 243) 3 Engine oil temperature
Rengine oil level* (Y page 223) Illustration showing the digital speedometer dis- In the manual gearshift program, the menu is
played
Routside temperature20 displayed in red when the engine reaches the
1 Digital speedometer
overrevving range. You will also see shift up
Rtyre pressure loss warning system 2 Status line with outside temperature instruction 2. Shift up 2 blocks other mes-
(Y page 230) or tyre pressure moni- 3 Trip meter sages in the multi-function display until you
tor* (Y page 232) have shifted up.
19 Vehicles for the United Kingdom: the outside temperature is always displayed.
20 The sequence of the digital speedometer and the outside temperature display depends on the settings in the "Basic display" submenu.
* optional
126
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 127

Controls
On-board computer
The engine oil temperature gauge flashes if X Press the è or · button to select the The RACETIMER interrupts timing when you
the engine oil temperature has not reached AMG menu. stop the vehicle and turn the key to position
80 †. Avoid driving at full engine output dur- 1 in the ignition lock. When you turn the key
X Press the j button repeatedly until the
ing this time. to position 2 or 3 and then press the æ
RACETIMER appears.
button, timing is continued.
Displaying the on-board voltage
Storing the lap time and starting a new lap
X Press the è or · button to select the It is possible to store a maximum of nine laps.
AMG menu. X Press the ç button to show the inter-
X Press the j button repeatedly until the mediate time during timing.
on-board voltage appears. The intermediate time is displayed for five
seconds.
1 Gear indicator
X Press the ç button again within 5 sec-
2 RACETIMER
onds.
3 Lap
The displayed intermediate time is stored
You can start the RACETIMER when the as a lap time.
engine is running or if the key is in position Timing starts for a new lap. The new lap is
2 in the ignition lock. timed from when the intermediate time is
1 Gear indicator
X To start: press the æ button to start the called up.
2 On-board voltage RACETIMER.
X To display the intermediate time: press
RACETIMER the ç button to show the intermediate
The RACETIMER allows time measurements time.
to be saved. The intermediate time is displayed for five
While you have the RACETIMER displayed, seconds.
you will not be able to adjust the volume using X To stop: press the æ button to stop the
the æ and ç buttons. 1 Gear indicator
RACETIMER. Z
2 RACETIMER
127
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 128

Controls
On-board computer
3 Fastest lap time (best lap) Overall evaluation X Press the è or · button to select the
4 Lap AMG menu.
This function is only available if you have
stored at least one lap and have stopped the X Press the j button repeatedly until a lap
Resetting the current lap RACETIMER. evaluation appears.
X Press the æ button to stop the RACE- X Press the è or · button to select the Each lap is shown in a separate submenu.
TIMER. AMG menu. The fastest lap is indicated by flashing sym-
X Press the ç button to reset the lap time bol 1.
X Press the j button repeatedly until the
to "0". overall evaluation appears.
Deleting all laps

If you have switched off the engine, the RACE-
TIMER is reset to "0" after 30 seconds. All laps
are deleted.
It is not possible to delete a single stored lap
on its own. 1 Lap
X Press the æ button to stop the RACE- 1 RACETIMER overall evaluation 2 Lap time
TIMER. 2 Total time driven 3 Top speed during lap
X Press the reset button on the left of the 3 Top speed 4 Lap length
instrument cluster twice. 4 Distance covered 5 Average lap speed
X Press the æ button to start the RACE- 5 Average speed X Press the j or k button to select a
TIMER. different lap evaluation.
All laps are deleted. Lap evaluation
This function is only available if you have
stored at least two laps and have stopped the
RACETIMER.
128
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 129

Controls
On-board computer
Audio/TV*/DVD* menu X To select a stored station: briefly press Operating the audio player or audio
the j or k button. media*
Use the functions in the Audio/TV/DVD
menu to operate the audio equipment or X To select a channel from the channel Audio data from various audio devices or
COMAND APS*. If the audio equipment or list: press and hold the j or k but- media can be played, depending on the equip-
COMAND APS* is switched off, the multi- ton. ment fitted in the vehicle.
function display shows the Audio off mes- X To select a station using the station X Switch on the audio equipment or
sage. search (only if no station list is being COMAND APS* and select the audio player
received): press and hold the j or or medium (see the separate operating
i Menu overview: see (Y page 124).
k button. instructions).
Use the buttons on the multi-function steer-
X Use the è or · button to select the
ing wheel.
Audio/TV/DVD menu.
Selecting a radio station X To select next/previous track: briefly
press the j or k button.
You can only store new stations using the
audio systemor COMAND APS*. Please refer X To select a track from the track list
to the separate operating instructions for (rapid scrolling): press and hold the
notes on how to do this. 1 Waveband (preset number, only if the j or k button.
X Switch on the audio equipment or channel is stored)
COMAND APS* and select Radio (see the 2 Station
separate operating instructions).
i DAB*radio mode21 (Digital Audio Broad-
X Use the è or · button to select the
casting) – see the separate operating
Audio/TV/DVD menu.
instructions.
Example
1 Current CD (for CD/DVD changer*)
2 Current track Z
21 Only for certain countries.
* optional
129
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 130

Controls
On-board computer
In audio AUX mode, the current track is not 2 Current channel Navigation* menu
displayed.
In the Navigation menu, the multi-function
Operating the DVD video* display shows information from the naviga-
Operating the TV* tion system.
X Switch on COMAND and select DVD video
X Switch on COMAND and select TV (see the (see the separate operating instructions). i Menu overview: see (Y page 124).
separate operating instructions).
X Use the è or · button to select the Use the buttons on the multi-function steer-
X Use the è or · button to select the Audio/TV/DVD menu. ing wheel.
Audio/TV/DVD menu.
X Press the j or k button to select a X Switch on the audio equipment or
X To select a stored station: briefly press scene. COMAND APS* (see the separate operat-
the j or k button. ing instructions).
X To select a channel from the channel X Press the è or · button to select the
list: press and hold the j or k but- Navigation menu.
ton.
X To select a channel with the channel Route guidance inactive
search (only if COMAND is not receiving a
channel list): press and hold the j or The multi-function display shows the direc-
k button. 1 Disc number (only for DVD changer*) tion of travel and the street name, if it is
known to the system.
2 Current scene
1 Function (preset number, only if the chan- 1 Direction of travel

nel is stored) 2 Street name
* optional
130
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 131

Controls
On-board computer
Route guidance active Message memory menu X Press the è or · button repeatedly
until either the original menu or the Mes-
The following may appear in the multi-func- Previous display messages can be called up
sage memory menu appears.
tion display: in the Message memory menu. You will only
see the Message memory menu if there are If the Message memory menu does not
any display messages. appear, there are no display messages.
If there are messages, the following mes-
G Risk of accident sage may appear in the multi-function dis-
The on-board computer only records and play, for example: 2 messages.
displays messages and warnings from cer-
tain systems. For this reason, you should X Press the j or k button to call up a
always make sure that your vehicle is safe display message.
to drive. You could otherwise cause an acci- You can scroll through the display mes-
dent by driving an unsafe vehicle. sages in sequence. The possible display
Distronic* menu
messages are explained in the "Practical
You can read the current Distronic settings in Switching off the ignition clears the Message advice" section (Y page 257).
the Distronic menu (Y page 145). memory except for the highest priority dis-
play messages. The on-board computer will
i Menu overview: (Y page 124). delete these display messages only after the Settings menu
reason for the message has been rectified.
There are two functions in the Settings...
i Menu overview: see (Y page 124). menu: the To reset: Press reset button
for 3 seconds function, which you can use
Displaying messages to reset most settings to the factory settings.
And there are submenus via which you can
Use the buttons on the multi-function steer- make individual settings for your vehicle.
ing wheel.
i Menu overview: see (Y page 124).
ing wheel.
Z
* optional
131
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 132

Controls
On-board computer
Resetting to factory settings Submenus in the Settings menu The following tables show the settings you
can make in the individual submenus. You will
For safety reasons, not all functions are reset: X Press è or · to select the Set-
find additional information on the pages
permanent Speedtronic can only be set in the tings... menu. shown.
Vehicle menu. The Headlamp mode function X Press the j button to call up the selec-
in the Lighting submenu is only reset if the Instrument cluster submenu
tion of submenus.
vehicle is stationary.
You will see the selection of submenus. RUnit of measurement for distance
X Press the è or · button to select the
There are more submenus available than (Y page 133)
Settings... menu. simultaneously displayed. RLanguage (Y page 133)
X Press and hold the reset button on the left-
RStatus line display (Y page 134)
hand side of the instrument cluster for
approximately three seconds. RBasic display (Y page 134)
A prompt appears in the multi-function dis-
play asking you to press the reset button
again to confirm. Time/date submenu22
X Press the reset button again. RSetting the date and time (Y page 134)
The functions of most submenus are X Press the æ or ç button to select a
restored to the factory settings. submenu.
or The selected submenu is highlighted.
X If you want to retain the settings, do not X Press the j button to select a function
press the reset button a second time. within a submenu.
After approximately 5 seconds, the Set- X Press the æ or ç button to change
tings... menu appears again. the setting.
The changed setting is stored.
X Press the è or ÿ button to select a
different display.
22 This function is not available on vehicles with Audio 50 APS* or COMAND APS*.
* optional
132
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 133

Controls
On-board computer
Lighting submenu
Convenience submenu*
Settings... menu.
RConstant headlamp mode (Y page 135) REasy-entry/exit feature* (Y page 138) X Press the j button to call up the selec-
RSurround lighting (Y page 135) RFold in mirrors when locking the vehi- tion of submenus.
RAmbient lighting* (Y page 136) cle* (Y page 139) X Press the æ or ç button to select the
RExterior lighting delayed switch-off Instr. cluster submenu.
(Y page 136) X Press the j button to select Display
Dynamic driving seat* submenu
RInterior lighting delayed switch-off unit Speed-/odometer.
(Y page 136) RSettings for the driver's and front- X Press the æ or ç button to select
RIntelligent passenger seat (Y page 139) km (kilometres) or miles as the unit of
Light System* (Y page 137)
measurement for distance.
X Press the j, è or ÿ button to
Vehicle submenu Selecting the unit of measurement for select a different display.
RPermanent
distance
Speedtronic (Y page 154)
RAutomatic locking feature (Y page 137) The selected unit of measurement for dis- Selecting the language
tance applies to:
Rthe total distance recorder and the trip Settings... menu.
Heater* submenu meter
X Press the j button to call up the selec-
Rthe trip computer
RSelecting the switch-on time for the aux- tion of submenus.
iliary heating* (Y page 137) Rthe digital speedometer23 X Press the æ or ç button to select the
RChanging the switch-on time for the aux- Rcruise control Instr. cluster submenu.
iliary heating* (Y page 138) RSpeedtronic X Press the j button to select Lan-
RDistronic* guage.
Z
23 Vehicles for the United Kingdom: the digital speedometer always displays km/h.
* optional
133
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 134

Controls
On-board computer
X Use the æ or ç button to select the Selecting the basic display Setting the date and time
desired language.
Vehicles for the United Kingdom: this func- Your vehicle could have the following audio
X Press the j, è or ÿ button to tion is not available. equipment:
select a different display. You will see either the outside temperature or A: Audio 20
the digital speedometer first in the Basic dis-
B: Audio 50 APS*
Selecting the status line display play depending on the setting. You will see
the display that is not selected when you C: COMAND APS*
Vehicles for the United Kingdom: this func- scroll through the Basic display menu
tion is not available. (Y page 125). X Refer to the separate operating instruc-
X Press the è or · button to select the tions to find out which audio system is
fitted in your vehicle.
Settings... menu. Settings... menu.
Depending on the audio system, the time and
X Press the j button to call up the selec- X Press the j button to call up the selec- date are received from GPS satellites and
tion of submenus. tion of submenus. therefore cannot be set using the on-board
X Press the æ or ç button to select the X Press the æ or ç button to select the computer. See the following table.
Instr. cluster submenu. Instr. cluster submenu. A B C
X Press the j button to select Status X Press the j button to select Basic
line display. Set using the on-board com- X
display.
puter
X Press the æ or ç button to select the X Press the æ or ç button to select the
display in the status line: outside tempera- basic display: outside temperature (Out- Automatic GPS satellite recep- X X
ture (Outside temp.) or speed (Speed). side temp.) or speed (Speed). tion
X Press the j, è or ÿ button to X Press the j, è or ÿ button to
select a different display. select a different display.
* optional
134
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 135

Controls
On-board computer
X Press the è or · button to select the Setting constant headlamp mode X Press the æ or ç button to set the
Settings... menu. If you have set constant headlamp mode and mode for the headlamps to Manual or Con-
X Press the j button to call up the selec- the light switch is in position M or U, stant (constant headlamp mode).
tion of submenus. the side lamps, dipped-beam headlamps and X Press the j, è or ÿ button to
X Press the æ or ç button to select the licence plate lighting are switched on auto- select a different display.
Time/Date submenu. matically when the engine is running. Turning
the light switch to a different position
Switching the surround lighting on or
switches on the corresponding lights. Make
Setting the time off
sure that the light switch is turned to B or
X Use the j button to select Clock, U if you switch off constant headlamp If the surround lighting is switched on, the
hours Press R to confirm (or Clock, mode while driving in the dark. following lights will be switched on automat-
minutes Press R to confirm). ically in the dark after you have unlocked the
In countries in which constant headlamp
X Press the æ or ç button to set a mode is a legal requirement, Constant is the vehicle using the key:
value. factory setting. Rthe side lamps
X Press the reset button on the left of the X Press the è or · button to select the Rthe tail lamps
instrument cluster. Settings... menu. Rthe licence plate lighting
The set time is stored. X Press the j button to call up the selec- Rthe front foglamps
tion of submenus.
Setting the date The surround lighting switches off automati-
X Press the æ or ç button to select the cally if you open the driver's door or after 40
X Press the j button to select Set date
Lighting submenu. seconds.
Day (or Set date Month or Set date
Year). X Press the j button to select Headlamp X Press è or · to select the Set-
mode. tings... menu.
X Press the æ or ç button to set the
values. X Press the j button to call up the selec-
tion of submenus.
select a different display. X Press the æ or ç button to select the
Z
Lighting submenu.
135
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 136

Controls
On-board computer
X Press the j button to select the Sur- Activating/deactivating the exterior X Press the æ or ç button to activate
round lighting function. lighting delayed switch-off or deactivate the Headlamps delayed
X Press the æ or ç button to switch You can set whether the exterior lighting switch-off feature.
the Surround lighting function on or should remain on for 15 seconds after the X Press the j, è or ÿ button to
off. doors are closed when it is dark using the select a different display.
X Press the j, è or ÿ button to Headlamps delayed switch-off function. To temporarily deactivate the delayed switch-
If none of the doors are opened after the off:
select a different display.
engine is switched off or if an open door is not
X Before leaving the vehicle, turn the key to
closed, the exterior lighting goes out after
Setting the ambient lighting* 60 seconds. position 0 in the ignition lock.
When you have set a delayed switch-off time X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition
and then switch off the engine, the following lock and back to position 0.
Settings... menu.
remain lit: Delayed switch-off is deactivated. It is reac-
X Press the j button to call up the selec- Rthe tivated as soon as you start the engine
side lamps
tion of submenus. again.
Rthe tail lamps
X Press the æ or ç button to select the
Rthe licence plate lighting
Lighting submenu. Activating/deactivating the interior
Rthe front foglamps lighting delayed switch-off
X Press the j button to select Ambient
light. X Press è or · to select the Set- The Interior lighting delayed switch-
X Press the æ or ç button to adjust the tings... menu. off function allows you to set whether the
brightness to any level from 0 (off) to 5 interior lighting should remain on for 10 sec-
(bright). onds after the key is removed from the igni-
tion of submenus.
tion lock when it is dark.
X Press the j, è or ÿ button to X Press the æ or ç button to select the X Press the è or · button to select the
select a different display. Lighting submenu. Settings... menu.
X Press the j button to select Headlamps X Press the j button to call up the selec-
delayed switch-off. tion of submenus.
* optional
136
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 137

Controls
On-board computer
X Press the æ or ç button to select the X Press the æ or ç button to switch X Press the æ or ç button to activate
Lighting submenu. the Intelligent Light System on/off. or deactivate the Automatic door lock-
X Press the j button to select Interior X Press the j, è or ÿ button to ing feature.
lighting delayed switch-off. select a different display. X Press the j, è or ÿ button to
X Press the æ or ç button to activate select a different display.
or deactivate the Interior lighting Activating/deactivating the automatic
delayed switch-off feature. door locking feature Selecting the switch-on time for the
X Press the j, è or ÿ button to The Automatic door locking feature
auxiliary heating*
select a different display. allows you to set whether your vehicle will This function is only available if the vehicle
lock centrally from a speed of about has an auxiliary heating system.
15 km/h upwards. The Auxiliary heat. function allows you to
Switching the Intelligent Light Sys-
tem* on/off i For more information on the automatic select three switch-on times. You can set the
locking feature, see (Y page 70). exact switch-on time using the other func-
You can set whether motorway mode, the tions in the Heater submenu.
active light system and the extended range X Press the è or · button to select the The auxiliary heating adopts the Thermatic or
foglamps are to be activated using the Settings... menu. 4-zone Thermotronic* temperature setting.
Intelligent Light System function.
X Press the j button to call up the selec- The minimum and maximum temperature set-
X Press the è or · button to select the tings for the auxiliary heating are 20 † and
tion of submenus.
Settings... menu. 24 † respectively.
X Press the æ or ç button to select the
X Press the j button to call up the selec- Vehicle submenu. You can switch off the auxiliary heating by
tion of submenus. using the remote control or the auxiliary heat-
X Press the j button to select Automatic ing button on the centre console.
X Press the æ or ç button to select the door locking.
Lighting submenu. The auxiliary heating is switched off automat-
ically after 50 minutes. This time can be
X Press the j button to select Intelli- changed. To do this, visit a qualified specialist
gent Light System. workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service
Centre. Z
* optional
137
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 138

Controls
On-board computer
G Risk of fire and poisoning X Press the æ or ç button to select X Press the j button to select Switch-on
The operation of the auxiliary heating pro- one of the three switch-on times or Timer time X Set minutes.
duces hot, toxic exhaust fumes. The fuel off (auxiliary heating switched off). X Press the æ or ç button to set the
vapours produced during refuelling could When a switch-on time is selected, the yel- minutes.
ignite on the hot exhaust system. low indicator lamp lights up in the auxiliary
After changing from one menu to another,
Do not switch on the auxiliary heating at heating button.
the new time setting is stored. The yellow
filling stations or in enclosed spaces, for X Press the j, è or ÿ button to indicator lamp lights up on the button for
instance, a garage, if there is no air extrac- select a different display. the auxiliary heating on the centre console.
tion system.
You could otherwise endanger yourself and
Changing the switch-on time for the select a different display.
others.
auxiliary heating*
The Auxiliary heat. function can be called This function is only displayed if you have Activating/deactivating the easy-
up directly. selected a switch-on time. Here you can enter entry/exit feature*
X Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition the time at which the auxiliary heating is to
lock. i For more information on the easy-entry/
be switched on.
exit feature, see (Y page 90).
X Press the button for the auxiliary heating on X Press the è or · button to select the
the centre console (Y page 178). Settings... menu. G Risk of injury
or When the easy-entry/exit feature is active,
the steering wheel moves. There is a risk of
X Press the è or · button to select the tion of submenus.
occupants becoming trapped. Before acti-
Settings... menu. X Press the æ or ç button to select the vating the easy-entry/exit feature, make
X Press the j button to call up the selec- Heater submenu. sure that nobody can become trapped.
tion of submenus. X Press the j button to select Switch-on Do not leave children unsupervised in the
X Press the æ or ç button to select the time X Set hours. vehicle, even if they are secured in a child
Heater submenu. restraint system. The children could open
X Press the æ or ç button to set the the driver's door and thereby unintention-
X Press the j button to select Auxiliary hour.
heat..
* optional
138
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 139

Controls
On-board computer
ally activate the easy-entry/exit feature automatically. The exterior mirrors can then X Press the æ or ç button to select the
and become trapped. only be folded out using the button on the Driving dynamics seat adjustment
door. submenu.
X Press the è or · button to select the X Press the è or · button to select the X Press the j button to select Driving
Settings... menu. Settings... menu. dyn. seat adjust., driver or Driving
X Press the j button to call up the selec- X Press the j button to call up the selec- dyn. seat adjust., front-pass..
tion of submenus. tion of submenus. X Press the æ or ç button to select the
X Press the æ or ç button to select the X Press the æ or ç button to select the desired seat setting: Gentle for a soft seat
Convenience submenu. Convenience submenu. setting or Vigorous for a hard seat setting.
X Press the j button to select the EASY- X Press the j button to select Fold in X Press the j, è or ÿ button to
ENTRY system. mirrors when locking. select a different display.
X Press the æ or ç button to activate X Press the æ or ç button to activate
or deactivate the EASY-ENTRY system. or deactivate the Fold in mirrors when Trip computer menu
X Press the j, è or ÿ button to locking feature.
You can use the Trip computer menu to call
select a different display. X Press the j, è or ÿ button to up or reset statistical data for your vehicle.
select a different display.
i You can select km or miles as the unit of
Activating/deactivating the Fold in mir-
measurement for distance (Y page 133).
rors when locking* function Selecting a setting for the dynamic driv-
The Fold in mirrors when locking func- ing seat* i Menu overview: see (Y page 124).
tion allows you to determine whether the i For more information on the dynamic driv- Use the buttons on the multi-function steer-
exterior mirrors should fold in when you lock ing seat, see (Y page 84). ing wheel.
the vehicle. When you switch on the ignition,
the exterior mirrors fold out again. X Press the è or · button to select the Consumption statistics from start
If you have switched the function on and you Settings... menu.
fold in the exterior mirrors using the button The values refer to the start of the journey.
X Press the j button to call up the selec- Z
on the door (Y page 92), they will not fold out tion of submenus.
* optional
139
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 140

Controls
On-board computer
X Press the è or · button to select X Press the è or · button to select The From reset consumption statistics are
From start. From start. reset automatically after 9,999 hours or
99,999 kilometres.
X Press the j or k button to select
From reset.
Calling up the range
X Press the è or · button to select
From start.
X Press the j or k button to select
1 Kilometres Distance:.
2 Time The multi-function display shows the esti-
3 Average speed
mated distance that can be covered by the
1 Kilometres
vehicle, based on your current driving style
4 Average fuel consumption 2 Time and the amount of fuel remaining in the
If the vehicle is parked for more than 4 hours, 3 Average speed tank.
the From start consumption statistics are 4 Average fuel consumption If there is only a small amount of fuel left in
reset (key in position 0 of the ignition lock or the fuel tank, a vehicle being refuelled
removed). ¿ appears in the display instead of the
Resetting the consumption statistics
The values will not be reset if you turn the key range.
to position 1 or 2 during this time. X Press the è or · button to select
From start.
Consumption statistics from the last X Press the j or k button to select the
reset function that you wish to reset.
The values refer to the last reset of the func- X Press and hold the reset button on the left
tion. of the instrument cluster until the values
are reset to "0".
140
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 141

Controls
On-board computer
Telephone menu* X Switch on the mobile phone and audio sys- Accepting a call
tem or COMAND APS*; see the separate
Functions and displays are dependent on the If someone calls you while you are in the
operating instructions.
optional equipment installed in your vehicle. Telephone menu, the following message
X Press the è or · button to select the appears in the multi-function display:
You can place your mobile phone in the
Telephone menu.
mobile phone bracket* (Y page 211), or set
up a Bluetooth connection to the audio sys-
tem or COMAND APS* (see the separate Mobile phone on
operating instructions).
PIN code not yet entered
G Risk of accident
Once you have inserted the mobile phone into
Observe the legal requirements of the the mobile phone bracket*, the following
country in which you are currently driving message appears in the multi-function dis-
regarding the use of mobile phones in the X Press the s button to accept the call.
play Please enter PIN.
vehicle.
X Enter the PIN using the mobile phone, Lin-
If it is permitted to use mobile phones while Rejecting or ending a call
the vehicle is in motion, you should only use guatronic*, the audio systemor COMAND
APS*. X Press the t button.
them when the road and traffic conditions
allow. You may otherwise be distracted The mobile phone will search for a network.
from the traffic conditions, cause an acci- Dialling a number from the phone book
dent and injure yourself and others. Mobile phone operational
If your mobile phone is operational, you can
The multi-function display shows Ready or
select and dial a number from the phone book
i Menu overview: (Y page 124). the name of the GSM network provider. If the
at any time. It is only possible to enter new
Use the buttons on the multi-function steer- operational readiness symbol goes out, your
numbers into the phone book using the
ing wheel. vehicle is outside the transmission and recep-
mobile phone. Please refer to the separate
tion range. In this case, No Service appears operating instructions for notes on how to do
in the multi-function display. this.
* optional
141
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 142

Controls
Driving systems
X Press the è or · button to select the X Press the è or · button to select the Driving systems
Telephone menu. Telephone menu.
Overview of driving systems
X Press the j or k button to call up X Press the s button to call up the most
the phone book. recently dialled number in the redial mem- The vehicle's driving systems are described
ory. on the following pages:
X Press the j or k button to select the
RCruise control, Distronic* and Speedtronic,
desired name. To scroll through the tele- X Press the j or k button to select the
phone book faster, press and hold the desired name or number. which are used to control the speed of the
j or k button for longer than 1 sec- vehicle
X Press the s button to start dialling.
ond. RHOLD, which makes pulling away easier,
X Press the s button to start dialling. particularly on steep uphill gradients
RVehicle level setting and AIRMATIC DC*,
The multi-function display shows the Con-
necting call...message. which are used to adjust the vehicle's sus-
The number dialled is stored in the redial pension system
memory. R4*MATIC (permanent four-wheel drive), for
When there is a connection, the name of optimum traction

the person called – if stored in the phone RParktronic*,
which assists you in parking
book – or the number dialled appears in the and manoeuvring
multi-function display.
The ABS, BAS, adaptive brake lights, ESP®,
or EBV (electronic brake-power distribution) and
X If you do not wish to make a call, press the ADAPTIVE BRAKE driving safety systems are
t button. described in the "Driving safety systems" sec-
tion (Y page 58).
Redialling
The on-board computer stores the last phone
numbers which were dialled.
* optional
142
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 143

Controls
Driving systems
Cruise control Cruise control is only an aid designed to
assist driving. You are responsible for the
Cruise control maintains a constant road
vehicle's speed and for braking in good
speed for you. It brakes automatically in order
time.
to avoid exceeding the set speed. On long and
steep downhill gradients, especially if the G Risk of accident
vehicle is laden or towing a trailer, you must
Do not use cruise control:
shift to a lower gear in good time or select
Rin road and traffic conditions which do
shift range 1, 2 or 3 in vehicles with automatic
transmission*. By doing so you will make use not allow you to maintain a constant
of the braking effect of the engine, which speed (e.g. heavy traffic or winding
relieves the load on the brake system and roads). You could otherwise cause an 1 Segments
prevents the brakes from overheating and accident.
wearing too quickly. Ron slippery roads. Braking or accelerat-
Cruise control lever
G Risk of accident ing could cause the drive wheels to lose
traction and the vehicle could then skid. You can operate cruise control and variable
Rwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to Speedtronic with the cruise control lever.
braking on a slippery road surface. This
could cause the drive wheels to lose their fog, heavy rain or snow The LIM indicator lamp on the cruise control
grip and the vehicle could skid. lever indicates which system you have selec-
ted:
Use cruise control only if road and traffic con- Cruise control display in the speedom- RLIM indicator lamp off:
ditions make it appropriate to maintain a eter cruise control is selected
steady speed for a prolonged period. You can
store any road speed above 30 km/h. When cruise control is activated, the seg- RLIM indicator lamp lit:
ments from the set speed to the maximum variable Speedtronic is selected
G Risk of accident speed light up in the multi-function display.
Cruise control cannot take account of road
and traffic conditions.
Always pay attention to traffic conditions
Z
even when cruise control is activated.
* optional
143
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 144

Controls
Driving systems
Storing and maintaining the current Selecting the current or last stored
speed speed
You can store the current speed if you are G Risk of accident
driving faster than 30 km/h and ESP® is acti- Only select a stored speed if you know what
vated (Y page 60). that speed is and whether it is suitable for
X Accelerate the vehicle to the desired the current situation. Otherwise, sudden
speed. acceleration or braking could endanger you
X Briefly press the cruise control lever up or others.
1 or down 4.
X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards
1 To store the current speed or a higher X Remove your foot from the accelerator you 3.
speed pedal.
X Remove your foot from the accelerator
2 LIM indicator lamp Cruise control is activated. The vehicle pedal.
3 To select the current or last stored speed automatically maintains the stored speed.
The first time cruise control is activated it
4 To store the current speed or a lower stores the current speed or regulates the
i Cruise control may be unable to maintain
speed speed of the vehicle to the previously
the stored speed on uphill gradients. The
5 To switch between cruise control and var- stored speed is resumed when the gradient stored speed.
iable Speedtronic evens out. Cruise control maintains the
6 Deactivating cruise control stored speed on downhill gradients by Setting a speed
automatically applying the brakes.
X Press the cruise control lever up 1 for a
Selecting cruise control Vehicles with manual transmission:
higher speed or down 4 for a lower speed.
RAlways drive at adequate, but not exces-
X Check whether LIM indicator lamp 2 is off. X Keep the cruise control lever pressed until
sive, engine speeds.
If it is off, cruise control is already selected. the desired speed is reached.
RChange gear in good time.
If it is not, press the cruise control lever in X Release the cruise control lever.
the direction of arrow 5. RIf possible, do not change down several The new speed is stored.
LIM indicator lamp 2 in the cruise control gears at a time.
lever goes out. Cruise control is selected.
144
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 145

Controls
Driving systems
i Cruise control is not deactivated if you X Briefly press the cruise control lever for- Distronic*
depress the accelerator pedal. For exam- wards 6.
ple, if you accelerate briefly to overtake, Distronic regulates the speed and automati-
or cally maintains the distance to the vehicle in
cruise control adjusts the vehicle's speed
to the last speed stored after you have fin- X Brake. front. It brakes automatically in order to avoid
ished overtaking. or exceeding the set speed. On long and steep
downhill gradients, especially if the vehicle is
X Briefly press the cruise control lever in the laden or towing a trailer, you must select shift
i Deceleration of the vehicle by means of
direction of arrow 5. range 1, 2 or 3. By doing so,you will make use
the cruise control lever is assisted by auto-
matic application of the brakes. Variable Speedtronic is selected. LIM indi- of the braking effect of the engine, which
cator lamp 2 in the cruise control lever relieves the load on the brake system and
Vehicles with automatic transmission*: lights up. prevents the brakes from overheating and
On long downhill gradients, the automatic wearing too quickly.
transmission shifts down as a further meas- Cruise control is automatically deactivated if,
ure. for example: G Risk of accident
Ryou depress the parking brake Do not change down for additional engine
Ryou are driving at less than 30 km/h braking on a slippery road surface. This
Making fine adjustments in 1 km/h
could cause the drive wheels to lose their
increments RESP® is intervening or you deactivate grip and the vehicle could skid.
X Briefly press the cruise control lever up ESP®
1 for a higher speed or down 4 for a Ryou move the selector lever to N in vehicles G Risk of accident
lower speed. with automatic transmission* while driving Distronic is only an aid designed to assist
The last speed stored is increased or driving. The driver remains fully responsible
If cruise control is deactivated, you will hear for the vehicle's distance from other vehi-
reduced.
a warning tone. You will see the Cruise con- cles, the vehicle's speed and braking in
trol off message in the multi-function dis- good time.
Deactivating cruise control play for approximately five seconds.
There are several ways to deactivate cruise i The last speed stored is cleared when you
control: switch off the engine.
Z
* optional
145
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 146

Controls
Driving systems
Distronic does not react to: Rwhen changing to a lane with faster mov- G Risk of accident
Rpedestrians ing traffic Distronic brakes your vehicle at a maximum
Rstationary obstacles on the road, e.g. sta-
Rin complex driving situations or where of 2 m/s2, depending on its speed. This
the lanes are diverted, e.g. at motorway/ corresponds to approximately 20% of your
tionary or parked vehicles
roadway construction sites vehicle's maximum braking power. You
Roncoming and crossing traffic must also apply the brakes yourself if this
Otherwise, Distronic maintains the current
Distronic may not detect narrow vehicles braking power is not sufficient.
speed or accelerates to the set speed.
driving in front, e.g. motorcycles, or vehi- If Distronic detects a risk of collision with a
Distronic cannot take account of weather
cles driving on a different line. Therefore, vehicle in front, an intermittent warning
conditions. Deactivate, or do not activate,
always pay attention to traffic conditions tone sounds. In addition, the l distance
Distronic:
even when Distronic is activated. Other- warning lamp in the instrument cluster
wise, you may fail to recognise dangers in Rif the roads are slippery, snow-covered or
lights up. Brake to avoid a collision.
time, could cause an accident and injure icy. The wheels could lose their grip
yourself and others. under braking or acceleration. The vehi-
cle could start to skid. Cruise control lever
If a slower-moving vehicle is detected in front, Rif the sensors are dirty or there is poor With the cruise control lever you can operate
Distronic causes your vehicle to brake and
visibility, e.g. due to snow, rain or fog. Distronic and variable Speedtronic.
maintain a preset distance to the vehicle in
Distance control may be impaired. The LIM indicator lamp on the cruise control
front.
Always pay attention to traffic conditions lever indicates which system you have selec-
G Risk of accident ted:
even when Distronic is activated. Other-
Distronic cannot take account of road and wise, you may fail to recognise dangers in RLIM indicator lamp off:
traffic conditions. Deactivate, or do not time, could cause an accident and injure
activate, Distronic if it does not detect the Distronic is selected
yourself and others.
vehicle in front, or if it no longer detects it. RLIM indicator lamp lit:
This is especially the case: If there is no vehicle in front, Distronic oper- variable Speedtronic is selected
Rbefore corners ates in the same way as cruise control. Dis-
tronic functions in the 30 km/h to
Ron filter lanes 180 km/h range.
146
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 147

Controls
Driving systems
Switching on Distronic, storing the cur- i If you do not fully release the accelerator
rent speed and maintaining it pedal, the DISTRONIC override message
appears in the multi-function display. The
If Distronic is not activated after the cruise
distance to a slower-moving vehicle in front
control lever is pressed, you will see the mes-
will then not be adjusted. You will be driving
sage - - - in the multi-function display.
at the speed you determine by the position
You cannot activate Distronic in the following of the accelerator pedal.
circumstances:
Rif you are driving slower than 30 km/h or
Setting a speed
faster than 180 km/h
Rwhen braking
X Press the cruise control lever up 1 for a
1 To store the current speed or a higher
higher speed or down 4 for a lower speed.
speed Rwhen you have applied the parking brake
2 LIM indicator lamp X Keep the cruise control lever pressed until
Rif ESP® is deactivated the desired speed is reached.
3 To select the current or last stored speed
Rwhen the selector lever* is in position P,
4 To store the current speed or a lower X Release the cruise control lever.
R or N The new speed is stored.
speed
Rfor two minutes after the engine is started
5 To switch between Distronic and variable
i Deceleration of the vehicle by means of
Speedtronic X Accelerate the vehicle to the desired the cruise control lever is assisted by auto-
6 To deactivate Distronic speed. matic application of the brakes. On long
X Briefly press the cruise control lever up downhill gradients, the automatic trans-
Selecting Distronic 1 or down 4. mission* shifts down as a further measure.
X Check whether LIM indicator lamp 2 is off. X Remove your foot from the accelerator
If it is off, Distronic is already selected. pedal.
If it is not, press the cruise control lever in Distronic is activated. The vehicle main-
the direction of arrow 5. tains the stored speed until the distance to
the vehicle in front becomes too small.
LIM indicator lamp 2 in the cruise control Z
lever goes out. Distronic is selected.
* optional
147
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 148

Controls
Driving systems
Adjustment in 10 km/h increments X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards
you 3.
X Briefly press the cruise control lever up
1 for a higher speed or down 4 for a X Remove your foot from the accelerator
lower speed. pedal.
The last speed stored is increased or Distronic is activated and accepts the cur-
reduced. rent speed if it is activated for the first time,
or adjusts the vehicle's speed to the last
speed stored.
increments
Setting the specified minimum distance
X For a higher speed: briefly pull the cruise for Distronic 1 To activate/deactivate the distance warn-
control lever towards you 3. ing function
You can set the specified minimum distance 2 Indicator lamp
or for Distronic by varying the time span
X Keep the cruise control lever pulled 3 To adjust the set distance
between one and two seconds. This time span
towards you 3 until the desired speed is determines the distance that Distronic should
reached. Adjusting the set distance
maintain from the vehicle in front, depending
on the road speed. You can read this distance X To increase: turn thumbwheel 3 towards
in the multi-function display (Y page 149). ¯.

Selecting the current or last stored
speed Distronic then maintains a greater distance
between your vehicle and the vehicle in
G Risk of accident front.
Only select a stored speed if you know what X To decrease: turn thumbwheel 3 towards
that speed is and whether it is suitable for ®.
the current situation. Otherwise, sudden
acceleration or braking could endanger you Distronic then maintains a shorter distance
or others. between your vehicle and the vehicle in
front.
148
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 149

Controls
Driving systems
i Make sure that you maintain the mini- Brake or take evasive action as necessary. When Distronic is activated, one or two seg-
mum distance to the vehicle in front ments in the set speed range light up.
required by law. Adjust the distance to the i Distronic does not always clearly recog- i For design reasons, the speed displayed
vehicle in front if necessary. nise complex road and traffic conditions. in the speedometer may differ slightly from
You may then receive a false distance warn- the speed set for Distronic.
Distance warning function ing tone or none at all.
Even if Distronic is deactivated, this function X To activate/deactivate: press button 1.
warns you at speeds above 30 km/h if: When the function is activated, indicator
Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is too lamp 2 in the button lights up and a loud-
short for the speed you are driving at for speaker symbol appears in the display.
several seconds. The l distance warn- When the function is deactivated, indicator
ing lamp in the instrument cluster then lamp 2 in the button goes out and the
lights up. loudspeaker symbol disappears from the
Ryou are approaching a vehicle in front at too multi-function display.
great a speed. You then hear an intermit-
tent warning tone, and the l distance Distronic displays in the speedometer 1 Segments
warning lamp in the instrument cluster
If Distronic detects a vehicle in front, the seg-
lights up.
ments between the speed of the vehicle in
You must apply the brakes yourself in order front and the stored speed light up.
to maintain the correct distance to the vehicle
and to avoid a collision. Distronic menu in the on-board com-
G Risk of accident puter
Be especially observant of traffic condi- You can read the current Distronic settings in
tions when the l distance warning lamp the Distronic menu. The reading in the multi-
in the instrument cluster lights up or an function display depends on whether Dis-
intermittent warning tone sounds. tronic and the distance warning function are Z
1 Stored speed activated or deactivated.
149
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 150

Controls
Driving systems
X Press the è or ÿ button repeatedly activated, you will see the following in the There are several ways to deactivate Dis-
until one of the following two displays multi-function display: tronic:
appears in the multi-function display. X Briefly press the cruise control lever for-
wards 1.
Distronic deactivated
or
When Distronic is deactivated you will see the
standard Distronic display in the multi-func- X Brake.
tion display. or
X Briefly press the cruise control lever in the
1 Display for activated Distronic
direction of arrow 3.
Variable Speedtronic is selected. LIM indi-
Deactivating Distronic cator lamp 2 in the cruise control lever
lights up.
i You will see the Distronic off message

1 Vehicle in front, if detected in the multi-function display for approxi-
2 Distance indicator, displaying current dis- mately five seconds.
tance to the vehicle in front The last speed stored is cleared when you
3 Specified minimum distance to the vehi- switch off the engine.
cle in front, adjustable
4 Own vehicle i Distronic is not deactivated if you depress
5 Symbol for activated distance warning the accelerator pedal. If you accelerate
function briefly to overtake, Distronic adjusts the
1 To deactivate Distronic vehicle's speed to the last speed stored
Distronic activated 2 LIM indicator lamp after you have finished overtaking.
When Distronic is activated, the stored speed 3 To switch between Distronic and variable Distronic is automatically deactivated if:
appears in the multi-function display for Speedtronic Ryou depress the parking brake
approximately five seconds. With Distronic
Ryou are driving at less than 30 km/h
150
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 151

Controls
Driving systems
RESP® is intervening or you deactivate Cornering, going into and coming out of a Distronic may not detect vehicles travelling
ESP® bend on a different line. The distance to the vehicle
Ryou
in front will be too short.
move the selector lever* to N while
driving Other vehicles changing lane
If Distronic is deactivated, you will hear a
warning tone. You will see the Distronic
off message in the multi-function display for
approximately five seconds.
Tips for driving with Distronic

The following contains descriptions of certain
road and traffic conditions in which you must
The ability of Distronic to detect vehicles
be particularly attentive. In such situations,
when cornering is limited. Your vehicle may
brake if necessary. Distronic is then deacti-
brake unexpectedly or belatedly.
vated. Distronic has not yet detected the vehicle
Vehicles travelling on a different line cutting in. The distance to this vehicle will be
too short.
* optional
151
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 152

Controls
Driving systems
Narrow vehicles wearing too quickly. If you need additional vehicle's speed and for braking in good
braking, depress the brake pedal repeatedly time.
rather than continuously.
G Risk of accident i The speed indicated in the speedometer
Never depress the brake pedal continu- may differ slightly from the limit speed
ously while the vehicle is in motion, e.g. stored.
never cause the brakes to rub by applying
constant slight pedal pressure. This causes Variable Speedtronic
the brake system to overheat, increases
the braking distance and can lead to the With the cruise control lever, you can operate
brakes failing completely. cruise control, Distronic* and variable
Speedtronic.
Distronic has not yet detected the vehicle in G Risk of accident The LIM indicator lamp on the cruise control
front on the edge of the carriageway, because Do not change down for additional engine lever indicates which system you have selec-
of its relatively narrow width. The distance to braking on a slippery road surface. This ted:
the vehicle in front will be too short. could cause the drive wheels to lose their RLIM indicator lamp off:
grip and the vehicle could skid.
cruise control or Distronic* is selected
Speedtronic You can set a variable or permanent limit RLIM indicator lamp lit:
Speedtronic brakes automatically so that you speed:
variable Speedtronic is selected
do not exceed the set speed. On long and RVariable for speed limits, e.g. in built-up
You can use the cruise control lever to limit
steep downhill gradients, especially if the areas
the speed to any speed above 30 km/h while
vehicle is laden or towing a trailer, you must RPermanent for long-term speed restric- the engine is running.
shift to a lower gear in good time or select tions, e.g. for driving on winter tyres
shift range 1, 2 or 3 in vehicles with automatic (Y page 154)
transmission*. By doing so you will make use
of the braking effect of the engine, which G Risk of accident
relieves the load on the brake system and Speedtronic is only an aid designed to
prevents the brakes from overheating and assist driving. You are responsible for the
* optional
152
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 153

Controls
Driving systems
If it is not, press the cruise control lever in X Briefly press the cruise control lever up
the direction of arrow 5. 1 or down 4.
LIM indicator lamp 2 in the cruise control The current speed is stored. The stored
lever lights up. Variable Speedtronic is speed, e.g. LIM km/h, appears in the multi-
selected. function display.
G Risk of accident The segments in the speedometer from the
start of the scale up to the stored speed
If there is a change of drivers, advise the
light up.
new driver of the limit speed stored.
Only use Speedtronic if you will not have to
accelerate suddenly to a speed above that Storing the current speed or calling up
1 To store the current speed or a higher the last stored speed
stored as the limit speed. You could other-
speed
wise cause an accident.
2 LIM indicator lamp G Risk of accident
You can only exceed the limit speed stored Only select a stored speed if you know what
3 To store the current speed or call up the if you deactivate variable Speedtronic:
last stored speed or to make fine adjust- that speed is and whether it is suitable for
Rusing the cruise control lever. the current driving and traffic situation.
ments in 1 km/h increments
4 To store the current speed or a lower Rby depressing the accelerator pedal Otherwise, sudden braking could endanger
speed beyond the pressure point (kickdown). you or others.
5 To switch between cruise control, Dis- It is not possible to deactivate variable X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards
tronic* and variable Speedtronic Speedtronic by braking. you 3.
6 To deactivate variable Speedtronic
Storing the current speed

Selecting variable Speedtronic
You can use the cruise control lever to limit
X Check whether LIM indicator lamp 2 is on. the speed to any speed above 30 km/h while
If it is on, variable Speedtronic is already the engine is running.
selected.
Z
* optional
153
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 154

Controls
Driving systems
Making adjustments in 10 km/h incre- X Briefly press the cruise control lever in the Shortly before the stored speed is reached it
ments direction of arrow 5. is shown in the multi-function display.
X Briefly press the cruise control lever up LIM indicator lamp 2 in the cruise control You cannot exceed the stored limit speed,
1 for a higher speed or down 4 for a lever goes out. Variable Speedtronic is even if you depress the accelerator pedal
lower speed. deactivated. beyond the pressure point (kickdown).
or Cruise control or Distronic* is selected. Setting permanent Speedtronic

X Keep the cruise control lever pressed until Variable Speedtronic is deactivated automat- X Press è or · to select the Set-
the desired speed is set. Press the cruise ically when you depress the accelerator pedal tings... menu (Y page 131).
control lever, up 1 for a higher speed or beyond the pressure point (kickdown) but
only if your current speed does not differ by X Press the j button to call up the selec-
down 4 for a lower speed.
more than 20 km/h from the stored speed. tion of submenus.
You will hear a warning tone if this is the case. X Press the æ or ç button to select the
G Risk of accident Vehicle submenu.
increments
It is not possible to deactivate variable X Press j to select Speed limit (win-
X For a higher speed: briefly pull the cruise Speedtronic by braking. ter tyres).
control lever towards you 3.
or i The last speed stored is cleared when you
X Keep the cruise control lever pulled switch off the engine.
towards you 3 until the desired speed is
set. Permanent Speedtronic
i Permanent Speedtronic is only available
Deactivating variable Speedtronic for certain countries.
There are several ways to deactivate variable You can use the on-board computer to limit X Press the æ or ç button to select the
Speedtronic: the speed permanently to a value between desired setting.
X Briefly press the cruise control lever for- 160 km/h (e.g. for driving with winter tyres) The following settings can be selected:
wards 6. and the maximum speed. ROff
or
* optional
154
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 155

Controls
Driving systems
Permanent Speedtronic is deactivated. Rthe bonnet is closed Deactivating HOLD
RA limit speed between 240 km/h and Ron vehicles with automatic transmission*, HOLD is deactivated if:
160 km/h in increments of 10 km/h. the selector lever is in position D, R or N Ryou accelerate. On vehicles with automatic
X To select a different display, press the transmission*, only if the selector lever is
j, è or ÿ button. Activating HOLD in position D or R.
X Make sure that the activation conditions Rthe selector lever is moved to P on vehicles
are met. with automatic transmission*
HOLD
X Depress the brake. Ryou release the brakes completely and
HOLD relieves the strain on the driver: apply them again with a certain amount of
X Depress the brake again quickly until
Rwhen pulling away, especially on steep HOLD appears in the display. pressure until the HOLD message in the
slopes multi-function display goes out
HOLD is activated. You can release the
Rwhen manoeuvring on steep slopes brake pedal. G Risk of accident
Rwhen waiting in traffic Never get out of the vehicle when HOLD is
i If depressing the brake pedal the first activated.
The vehicle is kept stationary without the time does not activate HOLD, wait briefly
driver having to depress the brake pedal. HOLD must never be operated or deactiva-
and then try again.
The braking effect is cancelled and HOLD ted by a passenger or from outside the
deactivated when you depress the accelera- G Risk of accident vehicle.
tor pedal to pull away. The vehicle's brakes are applied when HOLD does not replace the parking brake
HOLD is activated. For this reason, deacti- and must not be used for parking.
Activation conditions vate HOLD if the vehicle is to be set in The HOLD braking effect is cancelled and
motion by other means (e.g. in a car wash the vehicle can start moving if:
You can activate HOLD if: or by towing).
Rthe vehicle is stationary
Rthe engine is running
Rthe driver's door is closed
Z
Rthe parking brake is not applied
* optional
155
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 156

Controls
Driving systems
RHOLD is deactivated by depressing the Vehicles with automatic transmission*: AIRMATIC DC*
accelerator pedal or the brake pedal Selector lever in park position
Rthere is a malfunction in the system or an X Move the selector lever to P to prevent the Vehicle level
interruption in the power supply, e.g. bat- vehicle from rolling away. Your vehicle automatically adjusts its ride
tery failure HOLD is deactivated. The warning message height to reduce petrol consumption and
Rthe electrical system in the engine com- in the multi-function display goes out. improve driving safety.
partment, the battery or the fuses are A horn will also sound at regular intervals if The following vehicle levels are possible:
tampered with HOLD is activated and you: RNormal
Rthe battery is disconnected Rstop the engine and open the driver's door RRaised
Ropen the bonnet RLowered
G Risk of accident
If you wish to leave the vehicle or park it, The horn draws your attention to the fact that The "Normal" and "Raised" vehicle levels can
deactivate HOLD and secure the vehicle the vehicle has been parked while HOLD is be set manually.
against rolling away. still activated. The sound becomes louder if
The "Lowered" vehicle level is set automati-
you attempt to lock the vehicle. The vehicle
cally:
You will see a warning message in the multi- is not locked until HOLD is deactivated.
function display if HOLD is activated and: Rat speeds above 140 km/h
i If the ignition has been switched off, the
Rthe driver's door is opened and you release Rif you have selected "Sports tuning I or
engine cannot be restarted until HOLD is
the seat belt deactivated. II" (Y page 157)
Rthe ignition is switched off If there is a fault in the system or power supply Setting the vehicle level manually
Rthe bonnet is opened while HOLD is activated, the Brake immedi-
Select the "Normal" setting for normal road
ately message appears in the multi-function
Vehicles with manual transmission: surfaces and "Raised" for driving with snow
display. Immediately depress the brake firmly
Brake immediately chains or on particularly poor road surfaces.
until the warning message disappears from
X Immediately depress the brake pedal firmly the multi-function display, or in vehicles with G Risk of injury
until the warning message in the multi- automatic transmission*, move the selector Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of
function display goes out. This deactivates lever to P. This deactivates HOLD. the wheel housing or under the vehicle
HOLD.
* optional
156
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 157

Controls
Driving systems
while lowering the vehicle when it is sta- Setting the normal level The damping/spring stiffness settings are
tionary. Otherwise, limbs could become X Start the engine. dependent on:
trapped. Ryour driving style
If indicator lamp 2 is lit:
Rthe road surface conditions
X Press button 1.
Ryour individual selection
Indicator lamp 2 goes out. The vehicle is
adjusted to the normal level. Your selection remains stored even if you
remove the key from the ignition lock.
i The "Raised Level" setting is cancelled, if:
Ryou drive at a speed of more than
120 km/h
Ryou drive at a speed between 80 km/h
and 120 km/h for five minutes or more
1 To set the vehicle level If you do not drive at such speeds, the
raised level remains stored, even when the
2 Indicator lamp
key is removed from the ignition lock.
Setting the raised level
X Start the engine.
Comfort or sports tuning
1 To select the damping program
AIRMATIC DC (dual control) is comprised of 2 Indicator lamps
If indicator lamp 2 is not lit:
two components: the Adaptive Damping Sys-
X Press button 1. tem (ADS) and spring stiffness adjustment. X Start the engine.
Indicator lamp 2 lights up. The vehicle is ADS automatically regulates the suspension
adjusted to the raised level. as appropriate to particular driving condi- Sports tuning I
tions. Parallel to this, the spring stiffness X Press button 1 once.
The Vehicle rising message appears in
the multi-function display switches between "comfort" and "sports" lev- One indicator lamp 2 lights up.
els. The vehicle level is lowered by 10 mm. Z
157
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 158

Controls
Driving systems
Sports tuning II 4MATIC* (permanent four-wheel Parktronic*
X Press button 1 twice. drive)
G Risk of accident
Two indicator lamps 2 light up. 4MATIC ensures that all four wheels are per- Parktronic is only an aid and may not detect
The vehicle level is lowered by 15 mm. manently driven. Together with ESP®, it all obstacles. It is not a substitute for atten-
improves the traction of your vehicle when- tive driving.
Comfort tuning ever a drive wheel spins due to insufficient
You are always responsible for safety and
X Press button 1 repeatedly until indicator grip.
must continue to pay attention to your
lamps 2 go out. G Risk of accident immediate surroundings when parking and
4MATIC cannot reduce the risk of an acci- manoeuvring. You could otherwise endan-
Multi-function display dent if you drive too fast. ger yourself and others.
A message appears in the multi-function dis- If a drive wheel spins due to insufficient
play for approximately five seconds once you grip: G Risk of injury
have selected a damping program, for exam- ROnly depress the accelerator pedal as far Make sure that no persons or animals are
ple: in the manoeuvring range. Otherwise, they
as necessary when pulling away.
could be injured.
RAccelerate less when driving.
RAdapt
Parktronic is an electronic parking aid. It indi-
your driving style to suit road and
cates visually and audibly the distance
traffic conditions.
between your vehicle and an object.
Parktronic is automatically activated when
i In wintry driving conditions, the maximum you switch on the ignition and release the
effect of 4MATIC can only be achieved if parking brake.
you use winter tyres (M+S tyres), with snow Parktronic is deactivated at speeds above
chains if necessary. 18 km/h. It is reactivated at lower speeds.
Parktronic monitors the area around your
vehicle using six sensors in the front bumper
and four sensors in the rear bumper.
* optional
158
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 159

Controls
Driving systems
Front sensors
Centre Approximately 100 cm
Corners Approximately 60 cm
Rear sensors
1 Sensors in the front bumper Side view: Saloon shown as an example
! Pay particular attention to objects above

Range of the sensors
or below the sensors when parking, such
The sensors must be free of dirt, ice and as flower pots or trailer towbars. Parktronic
slush, otherwise they may not function cor- does not detect such objects when they are
rectly. Clean the sensors regularly, taking in the immediate vicinity of the vehicle. You
care not to scratch or damage them. could damage the vehicle or the objects.
Ultrasonic sources such as an automatic
car wash, a lorry's compressed-air brakes
or a pneumatic drill could cause Parktronic
to malfunction.
Top view: Saloon shown as an example
Minimum distance
Z
159
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 160

Controls
Driving systems
If there is an obstacle within this range, all The warning display for each side of the vehi- One or more segments light up as the vehicle
warning displays light up and a tone sounds. cle is divided into five yellow and two red approaches an obstacle, depending on the
If the distance falls below the minimum clear- segments. Parktronic is operational if yellow vehicle's distance from the obstacle.
ance, it may no longer be shown. indicator segments 3 light up. From the:
The gear lever or selector lever position* Rsixth segment onwards, you will hear an
Warning displays determines which warning display is active: intermittent warning tone for approxi-
The warning displays show the distance Manual transmission: mately two seconds.
between the sensors and the obstacle. The Gear lever in Warning display Rseventh segment onwards, you will hear a
warning display for the front area is located warning tone for approximately two sec-
on the dashboard above the centre air vents. Forwards gear Front area activated onds. You have reached the minimum dis-
The warning display for the rear area is in the or tance.
roof trim at the rear. Neutral
Deactivating/activating Parktronic
Reverse gear Rear and front areas
activated
Automatic transmission*:
Selector lever at Warning display
D Front area activated
R or N Rear and front areas

Front area warning display activated
1 Left-hand side of the vehicle
P No areas activated 1 To deactivate/activate Parktronic
2 Right-hand side of the vehicle
2 Indicator lamp
3 Indicator segments
If indicator lamp 2 is on, Parktronic is deac-
tivated.
* optional
160
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 161

Controls
Driving systems
i Parktronic is automatically activated
when you turn the key to position 2 in the
ignition lock.
Trailer towing*
Parktronic is deactivated for the rear area
when you establish an electrical connection
between your vehicle and the trailer.
! Fold in the ball coupling if the trailer tow
hitch is not required. Parktronic measures
the minimum detection range to an obsta-
cle from the bumper, not the ball coupling.
* optional
161
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 162

Controls
Air conditioning
Air conditioning
Overview of air-conditioning systems
The vehicle is equipped with one of the following air-conditioning systems:

2-zone Thermatic 4-zone Thermotronic* Rear-compartment air conditioning*24
2-zone Thermatic is an automatic air-condi- 4-zone Thermotronic is a luxury automatic The rear-compartment air conditioning
tioning system combining an automatic heat- air-conditioning system combining an auto- allows a separate temperature setting for the
ing and ventilation system with a cooling matic heating and ventilation system with a rear compartment.
system. cooling system. You can control the air con-
ditioning separately for each zone in the vehi-
cle.
24 Rear-compartment air conditioning is only available in conjunction with 4-zone Thermotronic.
* optional
162
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 163

Controls
Air conditioning
General notes tilting sunroof*/panorama sliding sunroof* of air supplied to the vehicle interior. For
closed. this reason, you should always observe the
2-zone Thermatic controls the temperature of interval for replacing the filter, which is
the vehicle interior and filters out undesirable i Ventilate the vehicle for a brief period
specified in the Service Booklet. As it
substances from the air. during warm weather, e.g. using the sum- depends on environmental conditions, e.g.
4-zone Thermotronic* controls the tempera- mer opening feature (Y page 109). This will heavy air pollution, the interval may be
ture and the humidity of the vehicle interior speed up the cooling process and the shorter than stated in the Service Booklet.
and filters out undesirable substances from desired interior temperature will be
the air. reached more quickly. G Risk of accident
2-zone Thermatic/4-zone Thermotronic* is Observe the settings recommended on the
i The integrated filter filters out most par- following pages. The windows could other-
only operational when the engine is running. ticles of dust and completely filters out
Optimum operation is only achieved when wise mist up. This may obstruct your view
pollen. A clogged filter reduces the amount of the traffic situation, thereby causing an
you drive with the side windows and sliding/
accident.
* optional
163
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 164

Controls
Air conditioning
Overview of air-conditioning system functions
2-zone Thermatic
Function Recommendation/Notes
1 Sets the temperature, left i Set the temperature to 22 †. (Y page 170)
2 y Demists the windscreen i Only use the "demisting" function until the wind- (Y page 174)
screen is clear again.
3 Q Increases the airflow (Y page 174)
164
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 165

Controls
Air conditioning
4 Display
5 © Sets the air distribution (Y page 173)
6 ¯ Switches the rear window heating on/off i At very low temperatures, the rear window heating is (Y page 175)
only switched on once the vehicle interior has warmed
up.
7 Sets the temperature, right i Set the temperature to 22 †. (Y page 170)
8 T Switches the residual heat function on/off i You can use the residual heat to heat or ventilate the (Y page 176)
vehicle interior after you have switched off the ignition.
9 2 Activates/deactivates cooling with air dehumidifi- i Switch on the air conditioning with air-dehumidifica- (Y page 169)
cation tion function. The indicator lamp in the 2 button
comes on.
a ª Sets the air distribution (Y page 173)
b ´ Activates/deactivates Thermatic i Activate Thermatic. The display comes on. (Y page 169)
c · Reduces the airflow (Y page 174)
165
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 166

Controls
Air conditioning
d , Activates/deactivates Thermatic i Only use this operating mode for a short time, e.g. in (Y page 175)
a tunnel. Otherwise, the windows can mist up due to
lack of fresh air.
e U Controls the air conditioning automatically i Activate automatic air conditioning. AUTO appears in (Y page 170)
the display.
4-zone Thermotronic*
* optional
166
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 167

Controls
Air conditioning
1 Sets the air distribution, left (Y page 173)
2 y Demists the windscreen i Only use the "demisting" function until the wind- (Y page 174)
screen is clear again.
3 $ Increases the temperature, left i Set the temperature to 22 †. (Y page 170)
4 Display
5 $ Increases the temperature, right i Set the temperature to 22 †. (Y page 170)
6 ¯ Switches the rear window heating on/off i At very low temperatures, the rear window heating is (Y page 175)
only switched on once the vehicle interior has warmed
up.
7 Sets the air distribution, right (Y page 173)
8 U Controls the air conditioning automatically, right i Activate the automatic air conditioning. The indicator (Y page 170)
lamp in the U button comes on.
9 2 Activates/deactivates cooling with air dehumidifi- i Switch on the air conditioning with air-dehumidifica- (Y page 169)
cation tion function. The indicator lamp in the 2 button
comes on.
a % Reduces the temperature, right i Set the temperature to 22 †. (Y page 170)
167
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 168

Controls
Air conditioning
b ™ Operates the rear-compartment air conditioning via (Y page 171)

4-zone Thermotronic
c Q Increases the airflow (Y page 174)
d ´ Activates/deactivates 4-zone Thermotronic i Activate 4-zone Thermotronic. The display comes on. (Y page 169)
e · Reduces the airflow (Y page 174)
f T Switches the residual heat function on/off i You can use the residual heat to heat or ventilate the (Y page 176)
vehicle interior after you have switched off the ignition.
g % Reduces the temperature, left i Set the temperature to 22 †. (Y page 170)
h , Activates/deactivates Thermatic i Only use this operating mode for a short time, e.g. in (Y page 175)
a tunnel. Otherwise, the windows can mist up due to
lack of fresh air.
j U Controls the air conditioning automatically, left i Activate the automatic air conditioning. The indicator (Y page 170)
lamp in the U button comes on.
168
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 169

Controls
Air conditioning
Rear-compartment air conditioning* Switching the air conditioning on/off Switching cooling with air-dehumidi-
fication on/off
i When the air conditioning is switched off,
the air supply and air circulation are also The "cooling with dehumidification" function
switched off. Only select this setting briefly, is only available when the engine is running.
otherwise the windows may mist up. The air inside the vehicle is cooled and dehu-
midified according to the temperature selec-
i Switch the air conditioning on preferably ted. This prevents the windows from misting
using the U button. up.
X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in G Risk of accident
the ignition lock. If the "cooling with air dehumidification"
function is deactivated, the air inside the
X To activate: press the ´ button.
1 $ Increases the temperature, left vehicle will not be cooled (during warm
The display comes on. The previously selec- weather) or dehumidified. The windows
2 Display
ted settings come into effect again. could mist up more quickly. This may pre-
3 $ Increases the temperature, right
X To deactivate: press the ´ button. vent you from observing the traffic condi-
4 % Reduces the temperature, right tions, thereby causing an accident.
5 % Reduces the temperature, left
The display shows 025/OFF26.
i You can also press another button (apart H Environmental note

from the ¯ and T buttons) to acti- The cooling system uses the refrigerant
vate Thermatic. R134A. This refrigerant does not damage
the earth's ozone layer.
i Condensation may drip from the under-

side of the vehicle when Thermatic is in
cooling mode.
25 Vehicles Z
with 2-zone Thermatic.
26 Vehicles with 4-zone Thermotronic*.
* optional
169
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 170

Controls
Air conditioning
X To switch on: press the œ button. X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in or
The indicator lamp in the œ button the ignition lock. X 4-zone Thermotronic only*: turn air dis-
comes on. X Set the desired temperature. tribution thumbwheel 1 or 7 to the
To deactivate: press the œ button. desired symbol (Y page 166).
X X To activate: press the U button.
The indicator lamp in the U button goes
The indicator lamp in the œ button goes The AUTO display for the air distribution and
out. The automatic control is deactivated
out. The cooling with air dehumidification airflow comes on. The indicator lamp27 on
and the air distribution is controlled
function has a delayed switch-off feature. the U button lights up. Airflow and air
according to the selected setting. Auto-
distribution are set to automatic mode. matic airflow remains activated.
i The cooling with air dehumidification
function in the rear compartment is only X To deactivate: press the Q or ·
operative if the 4-zone Thermotronic cool- button.
ing with air dehumidification function* is The AUTO display for the airflow goes out. Setting the temperature
switched on. The automatic control is deactivated and 2-zone Thermatic: the temperature for the
the airflow is controlled according to the driver's and front-passenger side can be set
selected setting. Automatic air distribution individually.
Controlling the air conditioning auto- remains activated.
matically or
In automatic mode, the set temperature is X 2-zone Thermatic only: press the © or
maintained at a constant level fully automat- ª air distribution button.
ically. To do so, the system automatically The AUTO display for the air distribution
regulates the temperature of the dispensed goes out. The automatic control is deacti-
air, the airflow and the air distribution. vated and the air distribution is controlled
The automatic air conditioning will achieve according to the selected setting. Auto-
optimal operation if "cooling with air dehu- matic airflow remains activated.
midification" is also activated. If necessary,
cooling with air dehumidification can be deac-
Air-conditioning zones for 4-zone Thermotronic*
tivated.
27 Vehicles with 4-zone Thermotronic*.
* optional
170
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 171

Controls
Air conditioning
4-zone Thermotronic*: the temperature for Setting the temperature in the rear Setting the rear-compartment temper-
each of the four air-conditioning zones can be compartment via 4-zone ature via the rear-compartment air con-
set individually. You can set the temperature Thermotronic* ditioning*
separately for the driver's and front-
X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in
passenger sides as well as for the left and
the ignition lock. the ignition lock.
right sides of the rear compartment.
X Press the ™ button. X To increase/reduce: press the $ or
Setting the temperature in the front The 4-zone Thermotronic* display switches % button. Only change the temperature
compartment using 2-zone Thermatic to the rear-compartment air-conditioning setting in small increments. Start at 22 †.
X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in settings.
the ignition lock. X To increase/reduce: press the $ or Adjusting the air vents
X To increase/reduce: turn thumbwheels % button. Only change the temperature
1 and 7 clockwise or anti-clockwise setting in small increments. Start at 22 †. G Risk of injury
(Y page 164). Only change the temperature The set temperature is shown in the 4-zone Very hot or very cold air can flow from the
setting in small increments. Start at 22 †. Thermotronic* display. The 4-zone air vents. This could cause burns or frost-
Thermotronic* display changes back to the bite to bare skin in the immediate vicinity
standard display about five seconds after a of the vents. Keep bare skin away from
Setting the temperature in the front these air outlets. If necessary, direct the
button is pressed.
compartment via 4-zone airflow away to a different area of the vehi-
Thermotronic* i You can also return to the standard dis- cle interior.
X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in play by pressing the ™ button again.
Please observe the following notes to ensure
the ignition lock. that the air can flow freely through the air
X To increase/reduce: press the $ or vents:
% button. Only change the temperature RKeep the air inlet between the windscreen
setting in small increments. Start at 22 †. and the bonnet free of deposits, such as ice
The set temperature is shown in the 4-zone
Thermotronic* display. Z
* optional
171
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 172

Controls
Air conditioning
and snow, to guarantee the supply of fresh X To open/close: turn thumbwheels 3 and Setting the rear-compartment air vents
air into the vehicle interior. 4 up or down.
RNever cover the vents or air inlet and outlet
grilles in the vehicle interior. Adjusting the side air vents
i Position the sliders for the centre air
vents in the central position to provide vir-
tually draught-free ventilation.
Setting the centre air vents
Rear-compartment air conditioning

1 Rear-compartment air vent, left
2 Rear-compartment air vent, right
Side air vents 3 Thumbwheel for rear-compartment air
1 Side window demister vent vent, right
2 Side air vent 4 Control panel for rear-compartment air
3 Side air vent thumbwheel conditioning*28
5 Thumbwheel for rear-compartment air
X To open/close: turn thumbwheel 3 up or vent, left
Centre air vents down.
1 Centre air vent, left X To open/close: turn thumbwheels 3 and
i Demister vent 1 is never shut com- 5 up or down.
2 Centre air vent, right
pletely, even if side air vent 2 is shut.
3 Thumbwheel for centre air vent, right
4 Thumbwheel for centre air vent, left
28 Rear-compartment air conditioning* available only in conjunction with 4-zone Thermotronic*.
* optional
172
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 173

Controls
Air conditioning
Setting the rear-compartment side air Setting the air distribution Symbol Meaning
vents*
2-zone Thermatic Y Directs the airflow through the
footwell vents in the front and
The symbols for the air distribution have the rear
following meanings:
Ú Directs the airflow through the
Symbol Meaning
centre, the side and the footwell
b Directs the airflow to the entire vents in the front and rear
vehicle interior
c Directs the airflow through the X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in
demister, the centre and the the ignition lock.
Rear-compartment side air vents side air vents X Press the © or ª button repeatedly
1 Thumbwheel for rear-compartment side until the 2-zone Thermatic display shows
Z Directs the airflow through the the desired symbol.
air vent demister vents
2 Rear-compartment side air vent
X Directs the airflow through the 4-zone Thermotronic*
X To open/close: turn thumbwheel 1 to the demister and footwell vents in
left or right. the front and rear The air distribution can be adjusted individu-
ally for the driver's and front-passenger sides.
a Directs the airflow through the
centre and side air vents
* optional
173
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 174

Controls
Air conditioning
The symbols for the air distribution have the Setting the airflow X To deactivate: press the y button.
following meanings: The indicator lamp in the y button goes
Symbol Meaning the ignition lock. out. The previously selected settings come
into effect again. The cooling with air dehu-
Z Directs the airflow through the X To increase/reduce: press the Q or midification function remains on. Air-recir-
centre, the side and the demis- · button. culation mode remains deactivated.
ter air vents or
a Directs the airflow through the Demisting the windscreen X Press the U button.
centre and side air vents The indicator lamp in the y button goes
i You should only select the "demisting" out. Airflow and air distribution are set to
X Directs the airflow to the entire function until the windscreen is clear again. automatic mode.
vehicle interior X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in or
Y Directs the airflow through the the ignition lock. X 2-zone Thermatic: turn thumbwheels 1
centre, the side and the foot- X To activate: press the y button. or 7 clockwise or anti-clockwise
well vents in the front and rear The indicator lamp in the y button (Y page 164).
comes on. or
X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in The system automatically switches to the X 2-zone Thermatic: press the Q or
the ignition lock. following functions: · button.
Rcooling with air dehumidification on
X Turn thumbwheel 1 or 7 to the corre-
sponding symbol (Y page 166). The thumb- Rhigh airflow29
wheel can also be turned to the area
between two symbols.
Rhigh temperature29
Rair distribution to the windscreen and
front side windows
Rair-recirculation mode off
29 Depending on the outside temperature.
174
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 175

Controls
Air conditioning
Demisting the windows Switching the rear window heating Activating/deactivating air-recircula-
on/off tion mode
Windows misted up on the inside You can deactivate the flow of fresh air if
G Risk of accident
X Activate the "cooling function with air- Clear all windows of ice or snow before set- unpleasant odours are entering the vehicle
dehumidification" function. ting off. Impaired visibility could otherwise from outside. The air already inside the vehi-
endanger you and others. cle will then be recirculated.
X Activate the automatic mode.
G Risk of accident
X If the windows continue to mist up, activate
i At very low temperatures, the rear win- Only switch over to air-recirculation mode
the "demisting" function.
dow heating is only switched on once the briefly at low outside temperatures. Other-
vehicle interior has warmed up. wise, the windows could mist up, thus
Windows misted up on the outside impairing visibility and endangering your-
i The rear window heating has a high cur- self and others. This may prevent you from
X Activate the windscreen wipers. rent draw. You should therefore switch it observing the traffic conditions, thereby
X 2-zone Thermatic: press and hold the off as soon as the window is clear, as it only causing an accident.
© or ª button until the a, Ú switches off automatically after approxi-
or Y symbol is shown in the display. mately six to twenty minutes. X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in
X 4-zone Thermotronic*: turn the thumb- the ignition lock.
i If the battery voltage is too low, the rear
wheel for air distribution to the Y or window heating may switch off.
X To activate: press the , button.
a symbol. The indicator lamp in the , button
i Saloon: there are aerial wires in the upper comes on.
i You should only select this setting until area of the rear window; this area is there-
the windscreen is clear again. fore not heated. i Air-recirculation mode is activated auto-
matically at high outside temperatures.
X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in When air-recirculation mode is activated
the ignition lock. automatically, the indicator lamp in
X Press the ¯ button. the , button is not lit.
The indicator lamp in the ¯ button lights Outside air is added after about Z
up or goes out. 30 minutes.
* optional
175
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 176

Controls
Air conditioning
X To deactivate: press the , button. moves. If there is a risk of entrapment, i If you open the side windows or the slid-
The indicator lamp in the , button goes press the , button again. If necessary, ing/tilting sunroof* or panorama sliding
out. press the switch that stops, opens or closes sunroof* manually after closing using the
the side window in the opposite direction. convenience closing feature, it will remain
i Air-recirculation mode switches off auto- Make sure that nobody can become trap- in this position when opened using the con-
matically: ped when you open or close the sliding/ venience opening feature.
Rafter approximately five minutes at out- tilting sunroof*/panorama sliding sun-
side temperatures below approximately roof*. If there is a risk of entrapment, press
5† the , button again. If necessary, press Switching the residual heat on and off
Rafter approximately five minutes if the air the switch that stops, opens or closes the It is possible to make use of the residual heat
dehumidification is deactivated sliding/tilting sunroof*/panorama sliding of the engine to continue heating the station-
sunroof* in the opposite direction. ary vehicle for up to 30 minutes after the
Rafter approximately 30 minutes at out- engine has been switched off. The heating
side temperatures above approximately X Convenience closing: press and hold time depends on the set interior temperature.
5†
the , button until the side windows and i The blower will run at a low speed regard-
the sliding/tilting sunroof*/panorama less of the airflow setting.
Air-recirculation mode with the conve- sliding sunroof* have closed.
nience opening/closing feature The indicator lamp in the , button i If you activate the "residual heat" function
comes on. Air-recirculation mode is activa- at high temperatures, only the ventilation
G Risk of injury ted. will be activated. The blower runs at
Make sure that nobody can become trap- medium speed.
ped between the side window and the door X Convenience opening: press and hold
frame as the side windows are opened and the , button until the side windows and X Make sure that the key is in position 0 in
closed. Do not place objects or lean against the sliding/tilting sunroof*/panorama the ignition lock or that it has been
the side window when it is being opened or sliding sunroof* have reached their original removed.
closed. You or the objects could be drawn position. X To switch on: press the T button.
in or become trapped between the side The indicator lamp in the , button goes REST appears in the display.
window and the door frame as the window out. Air-recirculation mode is deactivated.
* optional
176
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 177

Controls
Air conditioning
X To deactivate: press the T button. must therefore switch off the auxiliary heat- controlled manually. Optimum comfort can
REST is no longer shown in the display. ing at filling stations. be attained when the system is set to auto-
matic mode. Set the desired temperature
i The residual heat automatically switches The auxiliary heating heats the air in the vehi- within this range. If a higher temperature is
off after around 30 minutes or if: cle interior to a temperature between 20 † set, the vehicle is heated to 24 †. If a lower
and 24 †, without depending on heat emitted temperature is set, the vehicle is heated to
Rthe ignition is switched on by the running engine. The auxiliary heating 20 †.
Rthe battery voltage drops is operated using fuel directly from the vehi-
cle's fuel tank. For this reason, the tank con-
Activating/deactivating the auxiliary
tent must be at least at reserve fuel level to
heating/ventilation
Switching auxiliary heating/ventila- ensure that the auxiliary heating functions.
The auxiliary heating/ventilation automati- The auxiliary heating/ventilation can be acti-
tion* on/off
cally adjusts to changes in temperature and vated or deactivated using the remote control
G Risk of poisoning weather conditions. For this reason, the aux- or the button on the centre console.
Exhaust fumes are produced when the auxiliary heating could switch from ventilation The on-board computer can be used to spec-
iliary heating is in operation. Inhaling these mode to heating mode or from heating mode ify up to three departure times, one of which
exhaust fumes can be poisonous. You to ventilation mode. may be preselected (Y page 138).
should therefore switch off the auxiliary You cannot use the auxiliary ventilation to
heating in confined spaces without an cool the vehicle interior to a temperature
extraction system, e.g. a garage. lower than the outside temperature.
G Risk of fire Before activating

When operating the auxiliary heating, parts
of the vehicle may become very hot, and X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in
highly inflammable material such as fuels the ignition lock.
could be ignited. Operating the auxiliary X Set the temperature to a value between
heating is thus prohibited at filling stations 20 † and 24 †.
or when your vehicle is being refuelled. You The auxiliary heating/ventilation can be acti-
vated even when the air conditioning is being Z
* optional
177
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 178

Controls
Air conditioning
Button on the centre console The indicator lamps in the button may light up Remote control
in blue, red or yellow. Your vehicle comes with one remote control.
RBlue: auxiliary ventilation activated You may use two additional remote controls
for your vehicle. For further information, con-
RRed: auxiliary heating activated
sult a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a
RYellow: departure time preselected Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
The remote control has a maximum range of
Activating the auxiliary heating/ventila- approximately 300 metres. This range may be
tion reduced by:
If the key is in position 1 or 2: Rsources of radio interference
X Press and hold button 1 for at least two
Rsolid objects between the remote control
seconds.
Centre console (manual transmission) and the vehicle
1 Auxiliary heating/ventilation The red or blue indicator lamp in button
Rthe remote control being in an unfavoura-
1 lights up.
ble position in relation to the vehicle
If the key is removed or in position 0:
Rtransmitting from an enclosed space
X Briefly press button 1.
The red or blue indicator lamp in button i The optimum range can be achieved if you
1 lights up. hold the remote control vertically, pointing
upwards when you press one of the but-
Deactivating the auxiliary heating/venti- tons.
lation
i A battery symbol appears in the display
X Briefly press button 1.
when the batteries in the remote control
The red or blue indicator lamp in button are low. Replace the remote control bat-
Centre console (automatic transmission*)
1 goes out. teries (Y page 311).
1 Auxiliary heating/ventilation
* optional
178
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 179

Controls
Air conditioning
i More information about the auxiliary Activating the auxiliary heating/ventila- The signal transmission
heating can be found in the "Practical tion between the transmitter
advice" section (Y page 304). X Press the ON button. and the vehicle is faulty.
The following messages can appear in the
The heating system has a
display:
fault or there is insuffi-
Display Meaning cient fuel in the fuel tank.
The auxiliary heating is
The auxiliary heating/ not working. The auxili-
ventilation is activated. ary ventilation is still
functioning.
A malfunction has occur-
red in the auxiliary heat-
ing/ventilation. The Deactivating the auxiliary heating/venti-
Auxiliary heating remote control heating/ventilation lation
1 Display function selected by the The auxiliary heating switches off automati-
2 To check the status system is not available. cally after 50 minutes.
3 OFF – to deactivate auxiliary heating/
The vehicle battery is not i This time limit can be altered. To do this,
charged sufficiently or
ventilation visit a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a
the system is faulty.
4 ON – to activate auxiliary heating/venti- Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
lation X Press the OFF button.
5 To check the status
Using the remote control, you can:
Ractivate or deactivate the auxiliary heat-
ing/ventilation
Rcheck the status of the auxiliary heating/
ventilation Z
179
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 180

Controls
Sliding sunroof
The following messages can appear in the A malfunction has occur- Sliding sunroof
display: red in the auxiliary heat-
Sliding/tilting sunroof*
Display Meaning ing/ventilation. The
heating or ventilation G Risk of injury
The auxiliary heating/ function selected by the Never leave children unsupervised in the
ventilation is deactiva- system is not available. vehicle. They could operate the sliding/tilt-
ted. The vehicle battery is not ing sunroof and injure themselves. Always
charged sufficiently or take the key with you when leaving the
The signal transmission the system is faulty.
between the transmitter vehicle, even if you only leave it for a short
and the vehicle is faulty. time.
The signal transmission
between the transmitter G Risk of injury
and the vehicle is faulty.
Checking the status of the auxiliary heat-
The auxiliary ventilation ped when you are opening and closing the
ing
is switched on. The num- sliding/tilting sunroof. If danger threatens,
X Press the p or o button. release the switch and push it briefly in any
ber in the display shows
The following messages can appear in the the remaining time (in direction to stop the sliding/tilting sunroof.
display: minutes) for the auxiliary
ventilation. G Risk of injury
Display Meaning The glass in the sliding/tilting sunroof
The auxiliary heating is could break in an accident. If you are not
The auxiliary heating/ switched on. The number wearing a seat belt, there is a risk that you
ventilation is deactiva- in the display shows the could be thrown through the opening in the
ted. remaining time (in event of the vehicle overturning. Therefore,
minutes) for the auxiliary always wear a seat belt to reduce the risk
heating. of injuries.
* optional
180
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 181

Controls
Sliding sunroof
! Only open the sliding/tilting sunroof if it Closing
is free of snow and ice. Otherwise, mal- X To close manually: pull the switch in the
functions may occur.
direction of arrow 2 and hold it until the
Do not allow anything to protrude from the sliding/tilting sunroof is in the desired posi-
sliding/tilting sunroof. The seals could oth- tion.
erwise be damaged.
X To close fully: pull the switch briefly
i Resonance noises can occur in addition beyond the pressure point in the direction
to the usual airflow noises when the slid- of arrow 2 and release it.
ing/tilting sunroof is open. They are caused X To stop: press or pull the switch in any
by minor pressure fluctuations in the vehi- direction.
1 To open
cle interior.
2 To close/lower X Close the cover manually if necessary
Change the position of the sliding/tilting
3 To raise (Y page 182).
sunroof or open a side window slightly to
reduce or eliminate these noises. X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in Closing with increased force and without
i It is also possible to open and close the the ignition lock. the anti-entrapment feature
sliding/tilting sunroof from the outside G Risk of injury
using the "Summer opening" (Y page 109) Opening Make sure that nobody can become trap-
and "Convenience closing" (Y page 109) ped and be seriously or fatally injured as
features respectively.
X To open manually: press the switch in the
you close the sliding/tilting sunroof with
increased force or without the anti-entrap-
i If PRE-SAFE® has been activated, the slid- sliding/tilting sunroof and the cover are in
ment feature.
ing/tilting sunroof closes automatically, the desired position.
leaving a small gap open. X To open fully: press the switch briefly If the sliding/tilting sunroof locks up during
beyond the pressure point in the direction closing:
of arrow 1 and release it. X Immediately after it locks up, pull the
X To stop: press or pull the switch in any switch again to the pressure point in the
direction. Z
181
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 182

Controls
Sliding sunroof
direction of arrow 2 until the sliding/tilt- Lowering and closing i The sliding/tilting sunroof does not close
ing sunroof is closed. if:
X To lower manually: pull the switch in the
The sliding/tilting sunroof is closed with Rit is raised at the rear
more force. sliding/tilting sunroof is in the desired posi- Rit is blocked
If the sliding/tilting sunroof locks up during tion. Rno rain is falling on the windscreen (e.g.
closing again: X To lower fully: pull the switch briefly because the vehicle is under a bridge or
X Immediately after it locks up, pull the beyond the pressure point in the direction in a carport)
switch again to the pressure point in the of arrow 2 and release it.
direction of arrow 2 until the sliding/tilt- X To stop: press or pull the switch in any Opening and closing the cover
ing sunroof is closed. direction.
The sliding/tilting sunroof is closed without The cover functions as a sunblind. When you
the anti-entrapment feature. open the sliding/tilting sunroof, the cover
Rain closing feature* moves back with it.
The sliding/tilting sunroof closes automati- When the sliding/tilting sunroof is closed or
Raising
cally: raised at the rear, you can open or close the
The sliding/tilting sunroof can be raised at Rif it starts to rain cover manually.
the rear for ventilation. Rat extreme outside temperatures
X To raise manually: press the switch in the Resetting the sliding/tilting sunroof
Rafter 12 hours
Rif there is a malfunction in the power supply
Reset the sliding/tilting sunroof if it does not
sliding/tilting sunroof is in the desired posi-
move smoothly, or if the battery was discon-
tion. The rear of the sliding/tilting sunroof is then nected or discharged.
X To raise fully: briefly press the switch raised in order to ventilate the interior of the X Remove the fuse for the sliding/tilting sun-
beyond the pressure point in the direction vehicle.
roof in the main fuse box (Y page 341).
of arrow 3 and release it. i The sliding/tilting sunroof is opened X Reinsert the fuse.
X To stop: press or pull the switch in any slightly again if it is obstructed while being
direction. closed by the rain closing feature. The rain X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in
closing feature is then deactivated. the ignition lock.
* optional
182
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 183

Controls
Sliding sunroof
X Press the switch in the direction of could be thrown through the opening in the The switch is on the front overhead control
arrow 3 and hold it until the sliding/tilting event of the vehicle overturning. Therefore, panel.
sunroof is fully raised at the rear. always wear a seat belt to reduce the risk
X Keep the switch pressed for an additional of injuries.
second.
! Only open the panorama sliding sunroof
X Make sure that the sliding/tilting sunroof
if it is free of snow and ice. Otherwise, mal-
can be opened or closed fully again
functions may occur.
(Y page 181).
Do not allow anything to protrude from the
X If this is not the case, consult a qualified panorama sliding sunroof. The seals could
specialist workshop. otherwise be damaged.
i When the panorama sliding sunroof is

Panorama sliding sunroof with roller open, resonance noises may occur as well 1 To open
sunblind* as the usual airflow noises. They are caused 2 To close
by minor pressure fluctuations in the vehi- 3 To raise
Panorama sliding sunroof cle interior. Change the position of the pan- 4 To lower
orama sliding sunroof or open a side
G Risk of injury window slightly to reduce or eliminate X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in
Make sure that nobody can become trap- these noises. the ignition lock.
ped when closing the panorama sliding sun-
roof. If danger threatens, release the switch i It is also possible to open and close the Opening
and push it briefly in any direction to stop panorama sliding sunroof from the outside X To open manually: press the switch in the
the panorama sliding sunroof. using the "Summer opening" (Y page 109) direction of arrow 1 and hold it until the
and the "Convenience clos-
G Risk of injury ing" (Y page 109) features respectively.
The glass in the panorama sliding sunroof
could break in an accident. If you are not i If PRE-SAFE® has been activated, the pan-
wearing a seat belt, there is a risk that you orama sliding sunroof closes automatically, Z
leaving a small gap open.
* optional
183
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 184

Controls
Sliding sunroof
panorama sliding sunroof has moved to the Roller sunblinds
desired position.
The roller sunblinds provide protection from
X To open fully: press the switch briefly the sun. The two roller sunblinds can only be
beyond the pressure point in the direction opened and closed together when the pano-
of arrow 1 and release it. rama sliding sunroof is closed.
X To stop: press or pull the switch in any G Risk of injury
direction. Make sure that nobody can become trap-
ped as you open or close the roller sun-
Closing blinds.
X Press the switch in the direction of arrow
2 and hold it until the panorama sliding The switch is on the overhead control panel. Rear overhead control panel
sunroof has moved to the desired position. 1 To close the roller sunblind
2 To open the roller sunblind
Raising
The panorama sliding sunroof can be raised the ignition lock.
at the rear for ventilation.
X Press the rear section of the switch in the Opening
direction of arrow 3 and hold it until the X Pull the switch on the front overhead con-
panorama sliding sunroof has moved to the trol panel in the direction of arrow 1 and
desired position. hold it until the roller sunblinds have moved
to the desired position.
Lowering and closing Front overhead control panel
or
X Pull the rear section of the switch in the 1 To open the panorama sliding sunroof/
direction of arrow 4 and hold it until the roller sunblind X Press the switch on the rear overhead con-
panorama sliding sunroof has lowered at trol panel in the direction of arrow 2 and
2 To close the panorama sliding sunroof/
the rear and is fully closed. roller sunblind hold it until the roller sunblinds have moved
to the desired position.
184
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 185

Controls
Sliding sunroof
To open the roller sunblinds fully, proceed as Resetting the panorama sliding sunroof X Check that the panorama sliding sunroof
follows: and the roller sunblinds can be opened fully again (Y page 183).
X Pull the switch on the front overhead con- Reset the panorama sliding sunroof and the X If this is not the case, consult a qualified
trol panel beyond the pressure point in the roller sunblinds if the panorama sliding sun- specialist workshop.
direction of arrow 1. roof does not move smoothly, or if the battery
or was disconnected or discharged.
X Press the switch on the rear overhead con- X Remove the fuse for the panorama sliding
trol panel beyond the pressure point in the sunroof in the main fuse box
direction of arrow 2. (Y page 341).
X Reinsert the fuse.
X To stop: press or pull one of the switches
in any direction. X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in
the ignition lock.
Closing X Close the roller sunblinds fully.
X Press the switch on the front overhead con-
X Keep the switch pressed for an additional
trol panel in the direction of arrow 2 and second.
hold it until the roller sunblinds have moved
to the desired position. X Open the roller sunblinds fully.
or X Keep the switch pressed for an additional
second.
X Pull the switch on the rear overhead control
panel in the direction of arrow 1 and hold X Raise the panorama sliding sunroof fully.
it until the roller sunblinds have moved to X Keep the switch pressed for an additional
the desired position. second.
X Close the panorama sliding sunroof fully.
X Keep the switch pressed for an additional
second.
Z
185
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 186

Controls
Loading and stowing

Loading and stowing Cup holder* in the centre console Cup holder in the rear seat armrest
Cup holder
G Risk of injury
Keep the cup holder closed while the vehi-
cle is in motion. Otherwise, vehicle occu-
pants could be injured by objects being
thrown around if you:
Rbrake sharply
Rchange direction suddenly

Rare involved in an accident
Only use the cup holders for containers of X To open: press the marking on the cup X To open: press the front of the cup holder.
a suitable size and which have lids. Other- holder lightly. The cup holder slides out automatically.
wise, the drinks could spill. The cup holder slides out automatically.
Cup holders should not be used for hot Cup holder in the folding bench seat*
drinks. Otherwise, you may scald yourself. i You can remove the cup holder to clean
it. Clean the cup holder with clean, luke-
warm water only. When reinserting the cup
holder, make sure that you insert it into the
guides.
* optional
186
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 187

Controls
Loading and stowing

X To open: press the front of the cup holder. Position the load on the roof rack in such a Saloon
The cup holder is released. way that the vehicle will not sustain dam-
age even when it is in motion.
X Pull the cup holder out to the stop.
Depending on the vehicle's equipment,
make sure that you can:
Roof rack system* Rraise the sliding/tilting sunroof* fully
Ropen the panorama sliding sunroof* fully
An incorrectly secured roof rack, ski rack Ropen the boot lid or tailgate fully
or load could work loose from the vehicle.
These objects may then be thrown around
and can injure you or others or cause an Estate
accident. Follow the roof rack/ski rack 1 Covers
X Secure the roof rack to the roof rails.
manufacturer's installation instructions
Observe the manufacturer's installation X Fold covers 1 upwards.
and special instructions for use.
instructions. X Only secure the roof rack to the anchorage
The roof load raises the vehicle's centre of
gravity, thereby affecting vehicle handling. points under covers 1.
You must always observe the maximum Observe the manufacturer's installation
roof load of 100 kg. Always adapt your driv- instructions.
ing style to the prevailing road, traffic and
weather conditions and drive with particu-
lar care if the roof is laden.
! Mercedes-Benz recommends that you

only use roof rack systems which have
been tested and approved for Mercedes-
Benz vehicles. This helps to prevent dam-
age to the vehicle.
Z
* optional
187
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 188

Controls
Loading and stowing

Skibag* X Press release button 1.
The flap opens downwards.
G Risk of injury
The skibag is designed to carry up to four
pairs of skis. Do not use the skibag to carry
any other type of load.
The skibag must always be secured when
laden. Otherwise, injuries could be caused
by it in the event of an accident.
Unfolding the skibag and loading skis 1 Skibag
X Pull skibag 1 into the vehicle interior.

The skibag unfolds. Skibag
X Open the boot lid or tailgate. X Slide the skis into the skibag from the
boot/luggage compartment.
1 Cover
2 Release catches
X Fold down the rear seat armrest.

X Press release catches 2 together and fold Saloon shown as an example
down cover 1. 1 Release button 1 Strap
* optional
188
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 189

Controls
Loading and stowing

X Pull strap 1 tight by the loose end until the X Stow the skibag in the rear seat backrest. 4 Skibag frame
skis are held firmly inside the skibag. X Fold the cover back up. X Press button 1.
i Saloon: Flap 2 folds down.
You should always close the flap in the boot X Press catch 3 in and pull out frame 4
if you do not require the skibag. This will containing the skibag.
prevent access to the boot from the vehicle
interior. i You can remove the skibag even if you
have folded the rear seat backrest for-
wards.
Removing the skibag
The skibag can be removed for cleaning or
G Risk of poisoning
drying. Saloon:
1 Hook X Open the boot lid or tailgate.
When the skibag has been removed, always
2 Securing ring drive with the boot lid closed. Exhaust
fumes could otherwise enter the vehicle
X Engage hook 1 in securing ring 2. interior.
X Pull the strap tight by the loose end.
Removing the skis and folding up the

skibag
X Loosen the two straps.
X Remove the hook from the securing ring.
X Take the skis out of the skibag.
1 Button
X Close the flap in the boot/luggage com- 2 Flap
partment.
3 Catch Z
X Smooth out the skibag and fold it up.
189
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 190

Controls
Loading and stowing

Luggage net in the front-passenger G Risk of poisoning
footwell Keep the boot lid/tailgate closed while the
vehicle is in operation. Otherwise, exhaust
G Risk of injury
fumes could enter the vehicle interior and
Only place lightweight objects in the lug- poison you.
gage net. Do not use it to transport heavy,
sharp-edged or fragile objects. The luggage The handling characteristics of a laden vehi-
net cannot secure the objects sufficiently cle are dependent on the distribution of the
in the event of an accident. load within the vehicle. You should therefore
load your vehicle as shown in the illustrations.
Distribution of the load within the vehicle: Estate
Loading guidelines
Observe the following notes when transport-
G Risk of injury ing a load:
Secure and position the load as described RWhen transporting a load, never exceed the
in the loading guidelines. maximum permissible gross vehicle weight
Otherwise, vehicle occupants could or the permissible axle loads for the vehicle
be injured by the load being thrown around (including occupants).
in the event of sharp braking, a sudden RPosition heavy loads as far forwards and as
change in direction or an accident. This also
low in the boot or luggage compartment as
applies to seats which have been removed.
Distribution of the load within the vehicle: Saloon possible.
You will find further information in the
RThe load must not protrude above the
"Securing a load" section.
upper edge of the backrests.
Even if you follow all the loading guidelines,
the load will increase the risk of injury in the RAlways place the load against the front or
event of an accident. rear seat backrests.
190
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 191

Controls
Loading and stowing

ROnly load the additional loading floor in the Securing a load RDo not route lashing materials across sharp
boot up to a maximum of 20 kg. edges or corners.
RSecure the load with sufficiently strong and Plastic hooks (Saloon) RPad sharp edges for protection.
wear-resistant load restraints. Pad sharp
On vehicles without a through-loading feature
edges for protection. Boot or luggage compartment
in the rear bench seat*, four plastic hooks are
fitted to the boot floor. You can use these to There are four lashing eyelets in the boot or
i Load restraints are available at any quali- luggage compartment.
fied specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes- attach the luggage securing feature which is
Benz Service Centre. available as an accessory.
Lashing eyelets*
G Risk of injury
Load the lashing eyes evenly.
Otherwise, you or others could be injured
by the load transported being thrown
around if you:
Rbrake sharply
Rchange
Saloon with through-loading feature in the rear
direction suddenly bench seat*
Rhave an accident 1 Lashing eyelets
RIf the rear seats are not occupied, insert the
belt tongue on the outer seat belts into the Observe the loading guidelines.
buckle of the opposite seat belt. This
increases the restraining effect of the rear Observe the following points or guidelines
seat backrests. when securing loads:
RSecure the load using the lashing eyelets.
RDo not use elastic straps or nets to secure
a load as these are only intended as an anti- Z
slip protection for light loads.
* optional
191
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 192

Controls
Loading and stowing

Stowage well under the luggage com-
partment floor (Estate)
G Risk of injury
Do not carry heavy or hard objects under
the luggage compartment floor if it is open
and the objects are not secured.
Otherwise, you and other vehicle occu-
thrown around the vehicle in the event of
sharp braking, a sudden change in direction
Estate 1 Handle
or an accident.
1 Lashing eyelets
X To open: pull handle 1 and fold up the
boot floor.
Vehicles without a folding bench seat*
Stowage well under the boot floor
(Saloon) TIREFIT, the vehicle tool kit, etc. are located
underneath the rear luggage compartment
TIREFIT, the vehicle tool kit, etc. are located floor. A loading tray and a folding box are
in the stowage well. located under the front luggage compartment
floor.
1 Locking mechanism
X Fold locking mechanism 1 down in the

direction of the arrow.
* optional
192
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 193

Controls
Loading and stowing

Opening and closing the luggage compart- X Press front luggage compartment floor 1
ment floor down using handle 3 until it is locked.
Opening
Closing the rear luggage compartment
floor
2 Rear luggage compartment floor

4 To lock in position
5 Bag hook
6 Pneumatic spring
1 Front luggage compartment floor
2 Rear luggage compartment floor X Press rear luggage compartment floor 2 6 Pneumatic spring
3 Handle slightly towards the front 4. 7 Release button
Pneumatic spring 6 engages, locking rear
X Open the tailgate. X Press release button 7 and fold down rear
luggage compartment floor 2 in position.
X Press the ribbing (arrow) down on handle luggage compartment floor 2.
3. i You can transport objects with the lug- X Press rear luggage compartment floor 2
The handle folds upwards. gage compartment floor open and hang down using handle 3 until it is locked.
light items of luggage on bag hooks 5.
X Using handle 3, fold up front luggage com-
partment floor 1 or rear luggage compart-
Closing the front luggage compartment
ment floor 2 to a vertical position. floor
X Fold down front luggage compartment floor
1. Z
193
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 194

Controls
Loading and stowing

Removing the rear luggage compartment X Fold rear luggage compartment floor 2 2 Loading tray
floor upwards to an almost vertical position (an 3 Folding box
angle of 85°). 4 Transverse brace
i Rear luggage compartment floor 2 can 5 Release catch
only be extended out of the left-hand pin at X Remove loading tray 2.
an angle of 85°.
X Slide release catch 5 as far as it will go to
X Grasp the top of rear luggage compartment
the right and press transverse brace 4
floor 2, raise it on left-hand side 1 and
upwards on the left-hand side.
extend it towards the left out of right-hand
pin 4. X Disconnect and remove transverse brace
4 towards the left out of the guide.
Extending the luggage compartment floor
1 To raise
X Remove the rear luggage compartment
2 Rear luggage compartment floor
floor (Y page 194).
3 Retainer
X Open the front luggage compartment floor
4 To extend
(Y page 193).
5 Pneumatic spring
6 Release catch
X Open rear luggage compartment floor 2

(Y page 193).
X Slide release catch 6 upwards and
remove pneumatic spring 5 from the bolt
towards the left. 4 Transverse brace
6 Retainer
X Press pneumatic spring 5 into retainer
3. X Remove transverse brace 4. To do this,
insert transverse brace 4 into two retain-
194
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 195

Controls
Loading and stowing

ers 6 on front luggage compartment floor X Remove the seat cushion from the folding Through-loading feature in the rear
1. bench seat (Y page 87). bench seat* (Saloon)
X Pull handle 1 and fold up luggage com- The left-hand and right-hand rear seats can
i You must release both retainers 6 to
partment floor 2. be folded down to increase the boot capacity.
remove transverse brace 4. To do this,
press the tabs under retainer 6 forwards. If you are transporting a long load, you can
Closing the luggage compartment floor
remove the rear bench seat cushions
i You can insert loading tray 2 under X Fold down luggage compartment floor 2 (Y page 197).
either the rear or the front luggage com- and press it down until it locks in place.
G Risk of injury
partment floor.
Do not carry heavy or hard objects inside
Retaining hooks in the boot (Saloon) the vehicle or in the boot unless they are
Vehicles with a folding bench seat* secured. Vehicle occupants could be
There is a hook on the upper edge of the boot, injured by objects being thrown around in
TIREFIT, the vehicle tool kit, etc. are located on which you can hang items such as bags. the vehicle in the event of:
in the stowage well.
Rsharp braking
Opening the luggage compartment floor Ra change of direction or
Ran accident
G Risk of poisoning
Always drive with the boot lid closed.
Exhaust fumes could otherwise enter the
vehicle interior.
1 Tab Folding the rear bench seat forwards

2 Hook
! The seat cushion must always be released
1 Handle and folded up before the backrest is folded
X Pull down hook 2 by tab 1. Z
2 Luggage compartment floor
* optional
195
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 196

Controls
Loading and stowing

forward. Otherwise, the backrest uphols-
tery could be damaged.
1 Seat cushion
! Before folding the left-hand backrest for-
2 Backrest
wards, make sure that the centre seat belt
1 Release X Reach behind seat cushion 1 and fold the buckle is located under the right-hand
seat cushion forwards. backrest. To do this, it may be necessary to
i If the driver's or front-passenger seat has tuck the seat belt buckle under the folded-
been adjusted for a tall person, it may be i If a passenger is to travel on the centre down backrest as indicated by the arrows.
necessary to move the seats forwards rear seat, it may be necessary to: Otherwise, the seat belt buckle or the back-
slightly to fold the backrests forwards. Rpush the centre seat belt buckle inwards rest could be damaged.
i Vehicles with memory function*: if one or while tilting the right-hand backrest for-
both parts of the rear seat backrest are fol- wards
ded forwards, the respective front seat is or
moved forwards slightly to avoid contact Rif the right-hand backrest has already
with the backrest and the backrest moves been tilted forwards, fold the middle seat
to a more upright position. belt buckle back up.
X Pull release 1.
i You can also remove the seat cushion
The seat cushion springs upwards slightly.
(Y page 197).
* optional
196
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 197

Controls
Loading and stowing

Folding the rear bench seat back Removing the seat cushions
You can achieve a larger loading area by
removing the rear bench seat cushions.
X Make sure that the seat cushions are folded
forward (Y page 195) and that the head
restraints are removed (Y page 83).
X Open the boot/luggage compartment.

X Pull the right-hand or left-hand release han- 1 Seat cushion
dle on the backrest. 2 Backrest
The corresponding backrest is released X Swing backrest 2 back until it engages.
and the head restraints fold back.
X Swing seat cushion 1 back.
X Fold backrest 2 forwards.
X Push down on seat cushion 1 at the front 1 Release catch
! Make sure that the head restraints fit fully and in the middle until it engages. 2 Connector for seat heating*
in the seat cushion pockets. This prevents X Fold up and adjust the head restraints if
damage to the backrests while loading. necessary (Y page 81). ! On vehicles with rear seat heating*, the
electrical contact on the bottom of the
G Risk of injury
cushion must be disconnected before
Make sure that the rear seat backrest and removing the seat cushion.
the seat cushions are fully locked in place.
X Press the connection together on the upper
part of the lengthways side and pull out
Z
* optional
197
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 198

Controls
Loading and stowing

seat heating connector 2 from the seat Enlarging the luggage compartment G Risk of poisoning
cushion. (Estate) Always drive with the tailgate closed.
The left-hand and right-hand rear seats can Exhaust fumes could otherwise enter the
i Join the connections for the seat heating,
be folded down to increase the luggage com- vehicle interior.
making sure the connector clicks into
place, when replacing the cushion. partment capacity.
If the combined luggage cover and net is fit- Folding the rear bench seat forwards
X Pull seat cushion release catch 1 and
ted with the luggage compartment cover and
remove the seat cushion upwards.
safety net, you can only fold the right-hand
! Leave the seat cushion hinge in this posi- backrest forwards on its own or both backr-
tion. If you fold it back, you could damage ests if you first fold the right-hand backrest
the upholstery. forwards.
G Risk of injury
Do not carry heavy or hard objects inside
the vehicle or in the luggage compartment
unless they are secured.
Otherwise, you and other vehicle occu-
thrown around the vehicle in the event of 1 Seat cushion release handle
sharp braking, a sudden change in direction 2 Seat cushion
or an accident.
You must always fold the seat cushions i If the driver's or front-passenger seat has
forward and attach the safety net when been adjusted for a tall person, it may be
using the luggage compartment enlarge- necessary to move the seats forwards
X Fold the backrest forward. slightly to fold the backrests forwards.
ment.
i Vehicles with a memory function*: if one
or both parts of the rear seat backrest are
folded forwards, the respective front seat
* optional
198
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 199

Controls
Loading and stowing

is moved forwards slightly to avoid contact i If persons are to travel on the centre rear
with the backrest and the backrest moves seat, it may be necessary to:
to a more upright position. Rpush the centre seat belt buckle inwards
X Pull seat cushion release handle 1. while tilting the right-hand backrest for-
wards
Seat cushion 2 is released.
or
X Fold seat cushion 2 upwards.
Rif the right-hand backrest has already
i You can also remove the seat cushion been tilted forwards, fold the middle seat
(Y page 200). belt buckle back up.
1 Backrest release catch

! Before folding the backrests forwards,
make sure that: 2 Backrest
Rthe centre seat belt buckle is under the X Pull left-hand or right-hand backrest
right-hand backrest. Otherwise, the seat release catch 1 upwards.
belt buckle or the backrest could be dam-
Corresponding backrest 2 is unlocked.
aged.
Rthe
X Fold backrest 2 forwards.
head restraints are folded back and
fully inserted, otherwise the head
restraints could make contact with the
raised rear seat cushion or be damaged.
1 Retainer for the seat belt
X Fold back the head restraints (Y page 81).
X Guide the seat belt into retainer 1.
X The two outer head restraints are fully
inserted (Y page 82).
199
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 200

Controls
Loading and stowing

Folding the rear bench seat back Removing the seat cushions i When refitting the seat cushion, join the
connections for the seat heating, making
You can achieve a larger loading area by
sure the connector engages.
removing the rear bench seat cushions.
X Make sure that the seat cushions are folded X Pull seat cushion release catch 1 and
forward (Y page 198). remove the seat cushion upwards.
! Leave the seat cushion hinge in this posi-

tion. If you fold it back, you could damage
the upholstery.
1 Seat cushion
2 Backrest
X Swing backrest 2 back until it engages.

X Swing seat cushion 1 back.
1 Release catch
X Push down on seat cushion 1 at the front
2 Connector for seat heating*
and in the middle until it engages.
X Fold up and adjust the head restraints if ! On vehicles with rear seat heating*, the
necessary (Y page 81). electrical contact on the bottom of the X Fold backrest forward (Y page 198).
cushion must be disconnected before
G Risk of injury
removing the seat cushion.
Make sure that the rear seat backrest and
the seat cushions are fully locked in place. X Press the connection together on the upper
part of the lengthways side and pull out
seat heating connector 2 from the seat
cushion.
* optional
200
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 201

Controls
Loading and stowing

Adjusting the backrest position X Once backrest 2 is disengaged, pull
release catch 1 upwards again.
X Fold backrests 2 of the left-hand and
right-hand seats back until they engage.
Backrests 2 are now in the second posi-
tion.
Luggage compartment cover and

safety net (Estate)
1 Safety net
The luggage cover and the safety net are
1 Backrest release catch attached to the rear bench seat backrest as 2 Safety net retainers
2 Backrest a combined luggage cover and net. X Pull safety net 1 up and hook it into retain-
ers 2.
i You can adjust the backrests to a second, Safety net
upright position. This creates a larger load i You can also use the safety net when the
capacity where necessary or greater seat- G Risk of injury
rear seat backrest is folded down. In this
ing comfort on the folding bench seat. The safety net cannot secure heavy loads. case, you should hook the safety net into
You should therefore always lash down the the front retainers.
X Pull release catch 1 on the right-hand seat load.
upwards and fold backrest 2 forwards. You could otherwise be injured by objects
X Once backrest 2 is disengaged, pull which have not been sufficiently secured Luggage compartment cover
release catch 1 upwards again. being thrown around in the event of sharp The luggage cover is released automatically
braking, a sudden change of direction or an when the tailgate is opened or closed, and is
X Pull release catch 1 on the left-hand seat
accident. automatically raised or lowered. It is there-
upwards and fold backrest 2 forwards.
fore not necessary to roll up the luggage
cover before loading and unloading the vehi-
cle. Z
201
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 202

Controls
Loading and stowing

! While loading the vehicle, make sure that To do this, pull luggage compartment cover EASY-PACK system*
the luggage compartment is not loaded 2 slightly to the rear and lower it.
above the lower edge of the side windows. Release luggage compartment cover 2.
X EASY-PACK load-securing kit*
Otherwise, the combined luggage cover
and net could be damaged when the tail- Luggage compartment cover 2 rolls up of Your EASY-PACK load-securing kit comes
gate is closed. its own accord. with accessories which allow you to use your
Do not place objects on the luggage com- boot/luggage compartment in a variety of
Pulling out the luggage compartment ways. You can store the load-securing kit in
partment cover.
cover the wallet provided.
Rolling up the luggage compartment X Pull out luggage compartment cover 2
i Estate: on vehicles with a stowage box*
cover until it engages.
in the luggage compartment, you can keep
Removing the combined luggage cover the wallet and the telescopic rod in the
and net stowage box.
X Roll up the safety net and luggage
cover 2.
X Fold both rear seat cushions forwards
(Y page 198).
X Fold the right-hand backrest, and then the
left-hand backrest forwards (Y page 198).
X Push the combined luggage cover and net
1 Grab handle to the left and out of the retainers on the
2 Luggage compartment cover rear seat backrest and remove it.
X Pull luggage cover 2 down to the horizon- Illustration: Estate
tal by handle 1. 1 Loading rails
X Unhook luggage cover 2 from the retain-
ers on the left and right-hand sides.
* optional
202
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 203

Controls
Loading and stowing

Inserting the mounting elements into the L To remove the mounting element G Risk of injury
loading rail S To push the mounting element to the Spread the load evenly between the lashing
next detent eyelets. Observe the loading guidelines.
X Turn mounting element 2 to L. X Turn mounting element 2 in the loading
X Insert mounting element 2 into loading rail to N.
rail 1. X Insert lashing eyelet 1 into mounting ele-
X Turn mounting element 2 to ‹ until ment 2.
you feel it clearly engage in loading rail X Turn mounting element 2 to ‹ until
1. you feel it clearly engage in the loading rail.
Inserting the lashing eyelet into the Belt reel
Illustration: Estate mounting element
1 Loading rail
2 Mounting element
You can slide mounting element 2 in loading
rail 1 to various detents and secure it. These
detents are marked and positioned at 5-cm
intervals along loading rail 1.
You can turn the mounting element in the
loading rail to four different positions:
‹ To lock the mounting element
N To release the lashing eyelet, the belt Illustration: Estate
1 Lashing eyelet 1 Belt reel
reel or the telescopic rod
2 Mounting element 2 Mounting element
3 Locking button
Z
203
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 204

Controls
Loading and stowing

i The belt reel can be used to secure light Telescopic rod EASY-PACK stowage box* (Estate)
loads against the side wall of the boot/lug-
gage compartment to prevent them from G Risk of injury
moving around. When you are using the stowage box in the
luggage compartment, the backrests of the
X Insert two mounting elements 2 into a seats directly in front of it must be fully
loading rail. engaged to the rear and the combined lug-
X Turn mounting elements 2 in the loading gage cover and net must be fitted.
rail to N. The maximum stowage box load is 20 kg. A
greater load could come loose in the event
X Insert belt reel 3 into mounting ele-
of an accident or sudden and sharp braking,
ments 2.
and could injure yourself or other occu-
X Turn mounting element 2 to ‹ until Illustration: Estate pants.
you feel it clearly engage in the loading rail. 1 Telescopic rod
X Press locking button 1 on the belt reel and 2 Mounting element
pull the safety net out in the direction of the
arrow. i The telescopic rod can be used to secure
the load against the rear seats to prevent it
X Place the load between the securing net from moving around.
and the boot/luggage compartment side
wall. X Insert one mounting element 2 into each
X Press locking button 3 on the belt reel loading rail.
with one hand. X Turn mounting elements 2 in the loading
X With your other hand, slowly extend the net rail to N.
around the load until it is secure. X Insert telescopic rod 1 into mounting ele- 1 Stowage box
ments 2. 2 Luggage compartment floor
X Turn mounting element 2 to ‹ until 3 Rear seat backrests
you feel it clearly engage in the loading rail. 4 Catches
204
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 205

Controls
Loading and stowing

Installing the stowage box Removing the stowage box Do not carry hard objects in the ruffled
X Fold the two backrests 3 forward X Fold double backrest 3 forward pockets. Objects must not protrude over
(Y page 198). (Y page 198). the top of the ruffled pockets.
X Guide stowage box 1 into the luggage X Slide stowage box 1 with catches 4 for-
i You will find an overview of the stowage
compartment through one of the rear doors wards to remove it from the mountings.
with the opening facing towards the front compartments on (Y page 36).
X Remove stowage box 1 sideways through
of the vehicle. a rear door.
X Press catches 4 on stowage box 1 into Glove compartment
X Fold backrest 3 back (Y page 200).
the gap between backrest 3 and the lug-
gage compartment floor.
X Fold backrest 3 back (Y page 200). Stowage compartments
i Stowage box 1 is also held in place from G Risk of injury

above by the combined luggage cover and The stowage compartments must be closed
net. when items are stored in them. Luggage
nets are not designed to secure heavy
Loading the stowage box items of luggage.
X Fold backrest 3 forward (Y page 198). You or other vehicle occupants could be
injured by objects being thrown around if 1 Spectacles compartment/compartment
X Load stowage box 1 through the opening you:
on the front. for mobile phone
Rbrake sharply
2 Opening button for the glove compart-
i Stowage box 1 in the luggage compart- Rchange direction suddenly ment
ment is closed off by the rear bench seat Rhave an accident The glove compartment can be locked and
and can carry a maximum load of 20 kg. unlocked using the emergency key element
Sharp-edged and fragile objects must not
X Fold backrest 3 back (Y page 200). be carried in the luggage net. (Y page 306).
X To open: press opening button 2.
Z
X To close: fold the cover upwards.
205
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 206

Controls
Loading and stowing

Spectacles compartment/compartment Stowage compartment in front of the X To remove the insert: pull out the insert
for mobile phone armrest by handle 1.
X To open: press lightly on compart-
ment 1. Stowage compartment/telephone
X To close: slide compartment 1 back in
compartment under the armrest
until it clicks into place.
Stowage compartment in the centre

console
X To open: press lightly on the marking at the

rear of the cover.
The cover opens.
1 Handle
X To open: pull handle 1.
1 Cover
2 Insert
X To open: press lightly on the marking on

the bottom of cover 1.
The stowage compartment opens.
i Insert 2 can be removed for cleaning. 1 Handle
206
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 207

Controls
Features
Stowage compartment in the rear Stowage compartment in the rear seat Features
centre console armrest
Sun visors
G Risk of accident
Keep the mirrors in the sun visors covered
while driving. You could otherwise be daz-
zled by bright lights, impairing your view of
traffic conditions. As a result you could
cause an accident.
X To open: press lightly on the top of the X To open: push the handle upwards and
stowage compartment. raise the armrest.
The stowage compartment moves out auto-
matically.
1 Mirror light*
2 Retainer
3 Retaining clip, e.g. for a car park ticket
4 Vanity mirror
5 Mirror cover
* optional
207
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 208

Controls
Features
Mirror in the sun visor Roller sunblinds* for the rear side damage the inertia reel. Therefore, either
windows close the window or retract the roller sun-
Mirror light* 1 only comes on if the sun visor blind before driving at high speeds.
is clipped into retainer 2 and mirror cover
5 has been folded up.
Rear window blind* (Saloon)
Glare from the side
1 Tab
2 Retainers
X To extend: pull the roller sunblind out by

tab 1 and hook it onto retainers 2 at the 1 To extend or retract the rear window blind
1 Sun visor top of the window.
2 Additional sun visor* ! Make sure that the rear window blind can
3 Retainer
! Always guide the roller sunblind by hand. move freely. Otherwise, the blind or other
Do not let it snap back suddenly, as this objects could be damaged.
X Fold down sun visor 1. would damage the automatic roller mech-
anism. i Always drive with the rear window blind
X Pull sun visor 1 from retainer 3. either fully extended or retracted.
X Swing sun visor 1 to the side. ! If you drive with the roller sunblind exten-
ded and the window open, the roller sun-
X Slide sun visor 1 forwards and back as
blind may pop out of the retainer and
desired.
suddenly spring back if you drive at high
X Fold down additional sun visor* 2. speeds, e.g. on the motorway. This could
* optional
208
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 209

Controls
Features
X To extend or retract: briefly press button X To open: press lightly on the marking at the X To open: press lightly on the top of ashtray
1. bottom of cover 1. 3.
The rear window blind fully extends or fully The ashtray opens. The ashtray opens.
retracts. X To remove the insert: press sliding X To remove the insert: fold over cinder bar
X To stop: briefly press button 1 again. knob 2 to the right. 1 with your finger and lift insert 2
The ashtray insert slides out slightly. upwards.
X To refit the insert: press the insert into the X To refit the insert: press the insert into the
Ashtray* holder until it clicks into place.
holder until it clicks into place.
Ashtray in the cockpit
Ashtray in the rear compartment Cigarette lighter*
The ashtray is located in the rear doors.
G Risk of injury and fire
Only hold the hot cigarette lighter by its
knob. Otherwise, you might burn yourself.
Make sure that children travelling in the
vehicle are not able to injure themselves on
the hot cigarette lighter or cause a fire with
it.
1 Cover
2 Sliding knob
1 Cinder bar
2 To remove the insert
3 Ashtray
* optional
209
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 210

Controls
Features
12V socket Socket in the rear passenger compart-
ment
The socket can be used for accessories with
a maximum power consumption of 180 watts. The rear socket is located in the stowage
compartment of the centre console.
the ignition lock.
Socket in the cockpit

A socket is fitted in the centre console on
vehicles with the non-smoker's package.
1 Cigarette lighter

the ignition lock.
X Press lightly on the marking at the bottom
of the cover. 1 Socket
The ashtray opens. X Press lightly on the top of the stowage com-
X Press in cigarette lighter 1. partment.
Cigarette lighter 1 will pop out automati- The stowage compartment slides out auto-
cally when the heating element is red-hot. matically.
1 Socket X Fold the socket cover upwards.
X Press lightly on the marking at the bottom i The Estate has an additional socket on the
of the cover. left-hand side of the luggage compartment.
The stowage compartment opens.
X Fold cover of socket 1 out to the right.
210
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 211

Controls
Features
Mobile phone* relating to the possible health risk posed by Inserting the mobile phone into the
electromagnetic fields. mobile phone bracket
G Risk of accident
If the mobile phone is inserted into the mobile
Observe the legal requirements of the i In order to ensure optimum signal quality phone bracket, you can only speak to the per-
country in which you are currently driving for mobile phones and to minimise mutual son you are calling using the hands-free sys-
regarding operating mobile communica- interference between the vehicle electron- tem.
tions equipment in a vehicle. ics and mobile phones, Mercedes-Benz rec-
If it is permitted by law to operate commu- ommends the use of an approved exterior ! Do not attempt to remove the mobile
nications equipment while the vehicle is in aerial. An exterior aerial conducts the elec- phone and the telephone bracket together.
motion, you must only do so when the traf- tromagnetic fields generated by a wireless You could otherwise damage the mobile
fic situation allows. You could otherwise be device to the exterior of the vehicle; the phone bracket.
distracted from the traffic conditions, field strength within the vehicle interior is X Remove the cover of the aerial plug from
cause an accident and injure yourself and lower than in a vehicle that does not have the back of the mobile phone and keep it in
others. an exterior aerial. a safe place.
Two-way radios and fax equipment used
without low-reflection exterior aerials can i There are various mobile phone brackets
interfere with the vehicle's electronics and that may be fitted to your vehicle; in some
thereby jeopardise the operating safety of cases these are country-specific. You can
the vehicle and your safety. You must there- obtain these mobile phone brackets from a
fore only use this equipment if it is correctly qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a
connected to a separate reflection-free Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. The func-
exterior aerial. tions and services available when you use
the phone depend on your mobile phone
G Risk of injury model and service provider.
Excessive electromagnetic radiation may The mobile phone bracket is in the armrest.
cause damage to your health and the health X Open the telephone compartment
of others. Using an exterior aerial takes into (Y page 206).
account current scientific discussions
Z
* optional
211
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 212

Controls
Features
i The system reads the phone book stored For information on how to create a phone
on the SIM card and in the mobile phone book entry, refer to the mobile phone oper-
memory. If the same entry is stored in both ating instructions.
of the phone books, both of these entries Own number sending:
will be shown in the multi-function display. The hands-free system does not recognise
You can make a call using the s and whether own number sending is enabled or
t buttons on the multi-function steering disabled in the mobile phone. The phone
wheel. You can control other mobile phone number is therefore always sent by default.
functions via the on-board computer By creating an additional phone book entry
(Y page 141). on the SIM card, you can switch the own
Example illustration number sending function on and off. For
i When you remove the key from the igni-
1 To engage the mobile phone the name, enter "CALLID" and for the num-
tion lock, the mobile phone remains
2 Connector contact
ber, enter a "0" or a "1". Entering "0" will
switched on for approximately ten minutes
prevent the telephone number from being
3 Mobile phone bracket (run-on time). If you make a call during this
sent; entering "1" will allow it to be sent.
time, the mobile phone will be switched off
X Slide the lower end of the mobile phone approximately ten minutes after you have For information on how to create a phone
into connector contact 2 in mobile phone ended the call. book entry, refer to the mobile phone oper-
bracket 3. ating instructions.
Run-on time:
X Push the top part of the mobile phone in You can change the run-on time by making
the direction of arrow 1 until it engages in an additional phone book entry on the SIM
mobile phone bracket 3. card. For the name, enter "Idletime" and for
The mobile phone is connected to the the number, enter a figure between "1" and
hands-free system and to the multi-func- "30" (minutes). If you have not entered a
tion steering wheel. number or have entered a different num-
The battery is charged depending on the ber, the run-on time of ten minutes will still
charge status and the position of the key in apply.
the ignition lock. The charging process is
shown in the mobile phone display.
212
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 213

Controls
Features
Removing the mobile phone from the Removing the existing mobile phone Fitting a different mobile phone bracket
mobile phone bracket bracket
Example illustration
Example illustration Example illustration 1 Contact plate
1 To release the mobile phone 1 To release the mobile phone bracket 2 Recesses
2 Mobile phone bracket 2 To remove the mobile phone bracket 3 Mobile phone bracket
3 Mobile phone bracket
X Press the release catch in the direction of X Insert mobile phone bracket 3 into
arrow 1 and remove the mobile phone X Press the release button in the direction of recesses 2 of contact plate 1.
upwards from mobile phone bracket 2. arrow 1 and remove mobile phone X Slide mobile phone bracket 3 forwards
bracket 3 in the direction of arrow 2.
until it engages.
Fitting a different mobile phone bracket
If you require a different mobile phone
bracket for your mobile phone, remove the
existing mobile phone bracket and then fit the
new one.
213
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 214

Controls
Features
Infrared reflecting windscreen* Garage door opener*
The infrared reflecting glass prevents the The remote control integrated in the rear-view
vehicle interior from becoming too hot. It also mirror allows you to operate up to three dif-
blocks radio waves up into the gigahertz ferent door and gate systems.
range.
i The garage door opener is only available
for certain countries. Observe the legal
requirements in all countries concerned.
The HomeLink® garage door opener is
compatible with most European garage and
gate opener drives. More information on Remote control in the rear-view mirror
HomeLink® and/or compatible products is 1 Indicator lamp
available from: 2 Transmitter button
Rany Mercedes-Benz Service Centre 3 Transmitter button
Rthe HomeLink® hotline 4 Transmitter button
1 Areas transparent to radio waves
(0) 08000 466 354 65 (free of charge) or
+49 (0) 6839 907-277 (at a charge) G Risk of accident
In order to operate radio-controlled equip- Only press the transmitter button on the
Rthe internet: www.homelink.com
ment (e.g. toll recording systems), areas 1 integrated remote control if there are no
on the windscreen are transparent to radio persons or objects present within the
waves. You can install radio-controlled sys- sweep of the garage door. Persons could
tems here. These areas can best be seen from otherwise be injured as the door moves.
outside the vehicle by observing the light
reflected off the windscreen.
Programming the remote control
i You will achieve the best results by insert-
ing new batteries in the garage door's
remote control before programming it.
* optional
214
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 215

Controls
Features
X Erase the memory of the integrated remote tion for at least 20 seconds before trying instructions, e.g. the sections on “Synchro-
control (Y page 216) before programming another position. nising the transmitter” or “Registering a
it for the first time. X Keep the transmitter button on the garage new transmitter”. You can also call the hot-
X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition door's remote control depressed until indi- line mentioned above.
lock. cator lamp 1 starts to flash rapidly.
X Press and hold one of transmitter buttons The programming was successful if indica- Opening or closing the garage door
2 to 4 on the integrated remote control. tor lamp 1 flashes rapidly. Once programmed, the integrated remote
Indicator lamp 1 starts to flash after a X Release the transmitter buttons on the control will assume the function of the garage
short while. It flashes about once a second. garage door's remote control and the inte- door system's remote control. Please read
grated remote control. the operating instructions for the garage door
i Indicator lamp 1 flashes immediately system.
the first time the transmitter button is pro- If indicator lamp 1 goes out after approxi-
X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition
grammed. If this transmitter button has mately 20 seconds and did not flash rapidly
before this: lock.
already been programmed, indicator
lamp 1 will only start flashing at a rate of X Release the transmitter buttons on the
X Press the transmitter button on the rear-
once a second after 20 seconds have integrated and portable remote controls. view mirror that you have programmed to
elapsed. operate the garage door.
X Repeat the programming procedure. At the Garage door system with fixed code: indi-
X Keep the transmitter buttons depressed. same time change the distance between cator lamp 1 lights up continuously.
X Point the garage door's remote control with the garage door's remote control and the
transmitter buttons in the rear-view mirror. Garage door system with rolling code: indi-
the transmitter towards the left-hand side cator lamp 1 flashes briefly and then lights
of the rear-view mirror from a distance of 5 up for approximately two seconds. This is
i If the garage door system works with a
to 20 cm. repeated for up to 20 seconds.
rolling code, after programming you must
i The distance between the garage door's synchronise the remote control integrated
in the rear-view mirror with the garage door i The transmitter will transmit a signal for
remote control and the integrated garage as long as the transmitter button is being
door opener depends on the system of the system receiver.
pressed. The transmission will be halted
garage door drive. You might require sev- You will find further information in the
after a maximum of 20 seconds and indi-
eral attempts. You should test every posi- garage door opening system's operating Z
215
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 216

Controls
Features
cator lamp 1 will flash. Press the trans- secured can slip and thereby interfere with
mitter button again if necessary. the movement of the pedals.
Do not place floormats on top of one
Clearing the remote control memory another.
lock.
X Press and hold transmitter buttons 2 and
4 for approximately 20 seconds until indi-
cator lamp 1 flashes rapidly.
The memory is cleared.
i You should clear the remote control mem-

ory before selling the vehicle.
1 Press-studs
Floormat* on the driver's side
2 Retainers
G Risk of accident
X Slide seat backwards.
Make sure that there is sufficient clearance
around the pedals when floormats are X To fit: place the floormat in position.
used, and that the floormats are properly X Press stud 1 onto retainer 2.
secured.
The floormats must be secured at all times X To remove: pull floormat off retainers 2.
using retainers and studs. X Remove the floormat.
Before you drive off, make sure that the
floormats are secure and rectify if neces-
sary. A floormat which is not properly
* optional
216
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 217

Operation
Running-in notes ............................... 218

Refuelling ........................................... 218
Engine compartment ........................ 222
Tyres and wheels .............................. 227
Winter driving ................................... 234
Driving tips ........................................ 236
Driving abroad ................................... 238
Trailer towing .................................... 239
Service ............................................... 243
Care .................................................... 244
217
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 218

Operation
Refuelling
Running-in notes RDo not drive faster than 140 km/h for the Refuelling
first 1,500 km.
The first 1,500 km ROnly
Refuelling
bring the engine up to a maximum
If you treat the engine with sufficient care speed of 4,500 rpm for a brief period. G Risk of explosion
from the very start, it will reward you with Fuel is highly flammable. Fire, naked flames
excellent performance for a very long period i You should also observe these notes if the
and smoking are therefore prohibited when
afterwards. engine or rear axle transmission on your handling fuels.
RYou should therefore drive at varying road vehicle has been replaced.
Switch off the engine and the auxiliary heat-
and engine speeds for the first 1,500 km.
ing* before refuelling.
RAvoid heavy loads, e.g. driving at full throt- AMG vehicles with a rear axle differ-
tle, during this time. Do not exceed 2/3 of G Risk of injury
ential lock*
the maximum permissible engine speed for Do not come into direct contact with fuel.
each gear. Your vehicle is equipped with a self-locking Direct skin contact with fuels or the inha-
differential on the rear axle. To better protect lation of fuel vapours is a health hazard.
RChange gear in good time. the differential gear on the rear axle, you
RDo not shift down a gear manually in order should perform an oil change after a running- G Risk of fire
to brake. in phase of 3,000 km. This oil change will Do not use petrol to refuel vehicles with a
Vehicles with automatic transmission*: increase the service life of your differential. diesel engine. Never mix diesel with petrol.
RTry to avoid depressing the accelerator
Have the oil change performed at a qualified This causes damage to the fuel system and
specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recom- engine and could result in the vehicle catch-
pedal beyond the pressure point (kick-
mends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service ing fire.
down).
Centre for this purpose.
ROnly use ranges 3, 2 or 1 for slow driving,
! Do not use petrol to refuel vehicles with a
e.g. in mountainous terrain.
diesel engine. Do not use diesel to refuel
After 1,500 km you may gradually bring the vehicles with a petrol engine. Even small
vehicle up to full road and engine speeds. amounts of the wrong fuel will cause dam-
Additional driving tips for AMG vehicles: age to the injection system. Damage result-
ing from adding the wrong fuel is not
covered by the warranty.
* optional
218
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 219

Operation
Refuelling
! If the wrong fuel has been added by mis- X Turn the fuel filler cap to the left and Petrol (EN 228)
take, do not switch on the ignition. If you remove it.
do, the fuel could enter the fuel lines. The ! Refuel using only unleaded premium
X Insert the fuel filler cap into the holder grade petrol with a minimum octane num-
tank and the fuel lines would then have to bracket on the inside of filler flap 2.
be emptied. Inform a qualified specialist ber of 95 RON/85 MON conforming to
workshop and have the tank and the fuel X Only fill the tank until the pump nozzle European standard EN 228.
lines emptied completely. switches off. You could otherwise impair engine output
or damage the engine.
When you open or close the vehicle with the ! Overfilling the tank could damage the fuel
key or KEYLESS GO*, the fuel filler flap is You will find further information about pet-
system.
automatically unlocked or locked. rol under "Fuel" in the index.
The fuel filler flap is to the rear on the right.
X To close: replace the fuel filler cap and turn
it clockwise. The fuel filler cap audibly i As a temporary measure, but only when
engages. the recommended fuel is not available, you
may also use regular unleaded petrol,
X Close the fuel filler flap. 91 RON/82.5 MON. This may reduce per-
formance and increase petrol consump-
i Vehicles with a diesel engine:
tion. Avoid driving at full throttle.
If the tank has been run completely dry, it
In some countries, the available petrol qual-
will be necessary to bleed the fuel system
ity may not be sufficient and could cause
(Y page 294).
coking around the inlet valve. In such
cases, and in consultation with a
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre, the petrol
may be mixed with the additive recommen-
1 To open the fuel filler flap
ded by Mercedes-Benz (part no.
2 To insert the fuel cap A000989254510). You must observe the
3 Tyre pressure table notes and mixing ratios given on the con-
4 Fuel type tainer.
* optional
219
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 220

Operation
Refuelling
E 350 CGI i If the recommended fuel is not available Diesel (EN 590)
and only as a temporary measure, you may
! Refuel using only unleaded premium also use premium unleaded petrol, ! Only use diesel that complies with the
grade petrol with a minimum octane num- 95 RON/85 MON. This may reduce per- EN 590 European standard.
ber of 95 RON/85 MON conforming to formance and increase petrol consump- You could otherwise impair engine output
European standard EN 228. tion. You must avoid driving at full throttle. or damage the engine.
You could otherwise impair engine output You will find further information about die-
or damage the engine. ! In emergencies, only when the recom- sel under "Fuel" in the index.
You will find further information about pet- mended fuel is not available, you may also
rol under "Technical data" in the index. use standard unleaded petrol, 91 RON/ ! When refuelling vehicles with a diesel par-
82.5 MON. However, using this fuel results ticle filter in countries outside the EU, only
i In some countries, only petrol of insuffi- in considerably higher petrol consumption low-sulphur Euro diesel with less than
cient quality (high-sulphur fuel) may be and significantly reduced performance. 0.005 percent sulphur content by weight
available. This fuel can temporarily produce Avoid driving at full throttle, and only drive should be used. In countries in which diesel
unpleasant odours, especially on short in drive program C. with a higher sulphur content is available
journeys. Refuelling with petrol of sufficient If no fuel other than regular petrol fuel 91 (e.g. 0.035 percent by weight), the engine
quality (sulphur-free fuel) will reduce such RON/82.5 MON or a lower grade is per- oil should be renewed at more frequent
odours. manently available, you should have the intervals. More information about intervals
vehicle adapted to run on this fuel by the for changing the engine oil can be obtained
AMG vehicles local after-sales service. from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
! Refuel using only super unleaded petrol ! Using fuel that does not comply with EN
with a minimum octane number of 98 590 can increase wear and damage the
RON/88 MON conforming to European engine and the exhaust system. Do not use
standard EN 228. the following:
You could otherwise impair engine output RMarine diesel
or damage the engine. RHeating oil
You will find further information about pet- RBio-diesel
rol under "Technical data" in the index.
220
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 221

Operation
Refuelling
RVegetable oil be refuelled with this winter diesel at temper- improvers that have been tested and
RPetrol atures of -5 °C or below. approved by Mercedes-Benz can be obtained
You can use this winter diesel at tempera- from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
RPetroleum
tures down to about -20 °C without problems.
RKerosene
If only summer diesel fuel or less cold-resist-
Do not add such fuels to diesel fuel and do ant winter diesel fuel (e.g. in Mediterranean
not use any special additives (exception: regions) is available, you should add an
flow improvers – see "Low outside temper- amount of flow improver to the fuel corre-
atures"). sponding to the outside temperature.
Damage caused by the use of unapproved Mix the additive with the diesel in good time,
fuels or additives is not covered by the war- before the flow properties of the diesel
ranty. become insufficient. Otherwise, malfunctions
can only be rectified by heating the entire fuel
system, e.g. by parking the vehicle in a heated
E 300 BLUETEC garage.
! When refuelling vehicles with a diesel par- G Risk of fire
ticle filter in countries outside the EU, only Do not use petrol to refuel vehicles with a
low-sulphur Euro diesel with less than diesel engine. Never mix diesel with petrol.
0.005 percent sulphur content by weight (< This would damage the fuel system and
50 ppm) should be used. engine and could result in a vehicle fire.
Low outside temperatures Flow improver

The flow properties of diesel may be insuffi- The effectiveness of a flow improver is not
cient at low ambient temperatures. guaranteed with every fuel. Observe the infor-
To prevent operating problems, diesel fuel mation provided by the manufacturer when
with improved cold flow qualities is available using a flow improver. Only use flow improv-
during the winter months. Your vehicle must ers that have been tested and approved by
Mercedes-Benz. Information about flow Z
221
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 222

Operation
Engine compartment
Engine compartment Vehicles with a petrol engine: Make sure that the windscreen wipers are
the electronic ignition system uses high switched off and that the key has been
Bonnet voltage. For this reason you must never pulled out of the ignition lock before open-
G Risk of accident touch components of the ignition system ing the bonnet.
(ignition coil, ignition cable, spark plug con-
Do not pull the release lever while the vehi- The bonnet release lever is located in the
nector or test socket) when:
cle is in motion. If you do so, the bonnet driver's footwell.
may open up and block your view. Rthe engine is running
Rthe engine is being started
Opening Rthe ignition is switched on and the engine
is being cranked by hand
G Risk of injury
There is a risk of injury if the bonnet is open, Vehicles with a diesel engine:
even if the engine is not running. the electronic injection control uses high
voltage. Therefore, never touch fuel injec-
Some engine components can become tion system components when:
very hot.
Rthe engine is running
To avoid the risk of burns, only touch those
components described in the Owner’s Man- Rthe engine is being started 1 Bonnet release lever
ual and observe the relevant safety notes. Rthe ignition is switched on
X Pull release lever 1.
G Risk of injury The bonnet is released.
The radiator fan between the radiator and
X Make sure that the windscreen wipers are
the engine can start automatically, even if switched off. ! Make sure that the windscreen wipers
the key has been removed from the ignition G Risk of injury are not folded out away from the wind-
lock. For this reason you must not reach The windscreen wipers and wiper linkage screen. You can otherwise damage the
into the turning area of the fan. You can could be set in motion. windscreen wipers or the bonnet.
otherwise be injured.
When the bonnet is open, you or others
could be injured by the wiper rods.
222
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 223

Operation
Engine compartment
The handle for opening the bonnet is located X Lower the bonnet and let it fall from a Rthe vehicle should be parked on level
above the radiator grille. height of approximately 20 cm. ground.
X Check that the bonnet has engaged prop- Rthe engine should be switched off for at
erly. least five minutes if the engine was at nor-
mal operating temperature.
i If the bonnet can be raised slightly, it is Rthe engine should be switched off for at
not properly engaged. Open it again and
least 30 minutes if the engine was not at
close it with a little more force.
operating temperature (i.e. if you only star-
ted the engine briefly).
Engine oil
Via the on-board computer*
Depending on driving style, the vehicle con-
sumes a maximum of 0.8 l oil per 1,000 km.
i Only possible on the E 420 CDI. On all
2 Bonnet catch handle other models a dipstick is used to check
The oil consumption may be higher than this
when the vehicle is new or if you frequently the engine oil level (Y page 224).
X Pull handle 2 of the bonnet catch out-
wards from the radiator grille and lift the drive at high engine speeds. You can only X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in
bonnet from underneath by the radiator estimate the oil consumption after you have the ignition lock (Y page 76).
grille. driven a considerable distance.
X Press the j or k button to select the
You will find further information about engine
message: Engine oil level Measuring
Closing oil in the "Technical data" section
(Y page 385). now
G Risk of injury The measurement takes a few seconds. You
Make sure that nobody can become trap- Checking the engine oil level will see one of the following messages in the
ped as you close the bonnet. display:
To do so: REngine oil level OK
RAdd 1.0 litre to reach maximum oil

level
Z
* optional
223
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 224

Operation
Engine compartment
RAdd 1.5 litres to reach maximum oil X Repeat the measurement after about five Using the oil dipstick
level minutes if the engine is at normal operating
RAdd
temperature.
2.0 litres to reach maximum oil
level X Repeat the measurement after about
30 minutes if the engine is not at normal
X Top up the oil if necessary (Y page 225). operating temperature (if the engine was
only started briefly).
Other messages in the multi-function dis-
play The following message appears if the engine
is running:
If the engine is at normal operating tempera-
ture and there is too much oil, you will see the Engine oil level Not when engine on
following message: X Switch off the engine and wait for five
minutes if the engine is at normal operating Illustration: vehicle with a petrol engine (E 350)
Eng. oil level
temperature, or for about 30 minutes if the 1 Oil dipstick
Reduce oil level
engine is not at normal operating temper- 2 Maximum mark
X Have excess oil siphoned off.
ature (if the engine was only started 3 Minimum mark
briefly), before measuring.
! There is a risk of damage to the engine or
X Pull oil dipstick 1 out of the oil dipstick
the catalytic converter if there is excess oil i If you wish to cancel the measurement, tube.
in the engine. press the k or j button on the multi-
X Wipe off oil dipstick 1.
If the Switch ignition on to check function steering wheel.
engine oil level message appears: X Insert oil dipstick 1 into the oil dipstick
tube to the stop, and take it out again.
lock (Y page 76). The oil level is correct if the level is between
minimum mark 3 and maximum mark
You will see the following message if you did
2.
not observe the required waiting time:
Observe waiting period X Top up the oil if necessary.
224
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 225

Operation
Engine compartment
i The difference in quantity between mini- Coolant
mum mark 3 and maximum mark 2 is
approximately 2 litres. G Risk of injury
The cooling system is pressurised. There-
i On vehicles with a 4-cylinder petrol fore, only unscrew the cap once the engine
engine and vehicles with an 8-cylinder pet- has cooled down. The coolant temperature
rol engine, the difference between MIN gauge must display less than 70°C. You
mark 3 and MAX mark 2 is approxi- could otherwise be scalded by escaping hot
mately 1.5 litres. coolant.
Coolant consists of water and antifreeze/cor-
Topping up the engine oil Example of a vehicle with a diesel engine (E 220 rosion inhibitor. Only check the coolant level
CDI) when the vehicle is on a level surface and the
1 Cover engine has cooled down.
X Unscrew cap 1 and remove it.
X Top up with the amount of oil required.
! Do not add too much oil. If too much oil

is added and the oil level is above the max-
imum mark on the dipstick, the engine or
catalytic converter could be damaged.
Have excess oil siphoned off.
Illustration: vehicle with a petrol engine (E 500)
X Screw cap 1 onto the filler neck.
1 Cover
When topping up the oil, take care not to
spill any. Oil must not be allowed to escape
into the soil or waterways. You would oth- Z
erwise be damaging the environment.
225
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 226

Operation
Engine compartment
Checking the coolant level X Top up the coolant if necessary. X Add windscreen washer concentrate to the
X Replace cap 1 and tighten all the way to washer fluid all year round.
The expansion tank is located in the engine
compartment on the left when viewed in the the stop. G Risk of fire
direction of travel. You will find further information about coolant Windscreen washer concentrate is highly
in the "Technical data" section flammable. Fire, naked flames and smoking
(Y page 388). are prohibited when windscreen washer
concentrate is being handled.
Windscreen washer system/head- Use

lamp cleaning system* Ra windscreen washer fluid additive
such as MB Summerwash to prevent
The washer fluid reservoir is located in the smearing (for temperatures above freez-
engine compartment on the right when ing).
viewed in the direction of travel. The head-
Ra windscreen washer fluid additive with
lamp cleaning system is also supplied from
the washer fluid reservoir. antifreeze properties such as MB Winter-
1 Cover wash (if there is a risk of frost).
2 Expansion tank
3 Marker bar
X Mix the windscreen washer fluid in a con-
tainer beforehand. Adapt the mixing ratio
X Slowly turn cap 1 by half a turn anti-clock- to the outside temperatures.
wise to allow excess pressure to escape.
! Only use windscreen washer fluid which
X Turn cap 1 further anti-clockwise and is suitable for plastic lamp lenses. Unsuit-
remove it. able windscreen washer fluid could dam-
There is sufficient coolant in expansion age the plastic lamp lenses of the head-
tank 2 if the coolant is level with the lamps.
marker bar 3 in the filler neck when cold
or approximately 1.5 cm higher when hot. 1 Cover
* optional
226
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 227

Operation
Tyres and wheels

X To open: pull cap 1 upwards by the tab. Tyres and wheels may be adversely affected. In addition, the
X To close: press cap 1 onto the filler neck wheels may come into contact with the
Points to remember body or axle components when heavily loa-
until it clicks into place.
! For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz rec- ded or when driving with snow chains. This
ommends that you only use tyres and could result in damage to the tyres or the
wheels which have been approved by vehicle.
Mercedes-Benz specifically for your vehi- ! Retreaded tyres are neither tested nor
cle. These tyres have been specially adap-
recommended by Mercedes-Benz, since
ted for use with the control systems, such
previous damage cannot always be detec-
as ABS or ESP®, and are marked as follows: ted on retreaded tyres. As a result,
RMO = Mercedes-Benz Original
Mercedes-Benz cannot guarantee vehicle
RMOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended safety if retreaded tyres are fitted. Do not
(with run-flat characteristics)* fit used tyres if you have no information
about their previous usage.
Mercedes-Benz Original Extended tyres*
should only be used on wheels that have G Risk of accident
been specifically approved by Mercedes- If wheels or tyres other than those which
Benz. have been tested are fitted:
If you use other tyres and wheels, Rthe brakes or chassis components could
Mercedes-Benz cannot accept any respon- be damaged
sibility for damage that may result from Rwheel and tyre clearances can no longer
this. Further information about tyres, be guaranteed
wheels and approved combinations can be
obtained from any Mercedes-Benz Service This could cause an accident.
Centre. Modification work on the brake system and
If you use tyres other than those tested and wheels is not permitted, nor is the use of
recommended for Mercedes-Benz vehi- spacer plates or brake dust shields. This inva-
cles, characteristics such as handling, vehi- lidates the General Operating Permit for the Z
cle noise emissions and fuel consumption vehicle.
* optional
227
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 228

Operation
Tyres and wheels

Notes on selecting, fitting and replacing Notes on regularly inspecting wheels cate that the wheels or tyres are damaged.
tyres and tyres If you suspect that a tyre is defective,
ROnly
reduce your speed and stop the vehicle as
fit tyres and wheels of the same type RRegularly check the wheels and tyres of
soon as possible to check the wheels and
and make. your vehicle for damage (e.g. cuts, punctu-
tyres for damage. Hidden tyre damage
ROnly fit tyres of the correct size onto the res, tears, bumps on tyres and deforma-
could also be causing the unusual handling
wheels. tion, cracks or severe corrosion on wheels),
characteristics. If you find no signs of dam-
at least every 14 days, as well as after off-
RAfter fitting new tyres, run them in at mod- age, have the wheels and tyres inspected
road trips or after travelling on rough roads.
erate speeds for the first 100 km as they at a specialist workshop, for example at a
Damaged wheels could cause a loss of tyre
only reach their full performance after this Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
pressure.
distance. RWhen parking your vehicle, make sure that
RRegularly check the tyre tread depth and
RFit new tyres on the front wheels first if the tyres do not get deformed by the kerb
the condition of the tread across the whole
tyres of the same size are required on the or other obstacles. If it is necessary to drive
width of the tyre (Y page 229). If neces-
front and rear wheels. over kerbs, speed humps or similar, try to
sary, turn the front wheels to full lock in
do so slowly and at an obtuse angle. Oth-
RReplace the tyres after six years at the lat- order to inspect the inner side of the tyre
erwise, the tyres, particularly the sidewalls,
est, regardless of wear. This also applies to surface.
could get damaged.
the spare wheel*. RAll wheels must have a valve cap to protect
RDo not drive with tyres which have too little the valve against dirt and moisture.
tread depth as this significantly reduces RRegularly check the pressure of all your
the traction on wet roads (aquaplaning). tyres (including the spare tyre*), particu-
larly prior to long trips, and correct the
! Store tyres that are not being used in a
pressure as necessary (Y page 229).
cool, dry and preferably dark place. Protect
the tyres against oil, grease, petrol and die-
sel. Notes on driving
RWhile driving, pay attention to vibrations,
noises and unusual handling characteris-
tics, e.g. pulling to one side. This may indi-
* optional
228
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 229

Operation
Tyres and wheels

Direction of rotation It is therefore recommended to additionally depth and the condition of the tread
equip your vehicle with the TIREFIT kit* across the entire width of all tyres. If nec-
Direction of rotation when fitting tyres that do not feature run- essary, turn the steering wheel so that
flat properties, e.g. winter tyres. you can see the tyre tread more easily.
Tyres with a specified direction of rotation
have additional benefits, e.g. if there is a risk i A TIREFIT kit* is available from any quali- You could otherwise lose control of the
of aquaplaning. You will only gain these ben- fied specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes- vehicle and cause an accident due to the
efits if the correct direction of rotation is Benz Service Centre. reduced grip of the tyres on the road.
observed.
You will find notes on driving with a flat tyre
An arrow on the sidewall of the tyre indicates in the "Practical advice" section
its correct direction of rotation. Tyre pressures
(Y page 328).
i You may fit a spare tyre* against the G Risk of accident
direction of rotation. Tyre pressure that is either too high or too
Tyre tread
low has a negative effect on the vehicle’s
G Risk of accident driving safety, which could lead you to
MOExtended run-flat system* Bear in mind that: cause an accident. You should therefore
regularly check the pressure of all your
The MOExtended run-flat system allows you Rtyre grip decreases rapidly on wet roads
to continue driving the vehicle even when one tyres (including the spare tyre*), particu-
when the tread depth is less than 3 mm.
or more tyres lose all air pressure. larly prior to long trips, and correct the
You should thus replace tyres that have
pressure as necessary.
The MOExtended run-flat system may only be insufficient tread.
used in conjunction with the tyre pressure Rwinter tyres should be replaced when the To test tyre pressure, use a suitable pressure
loss warning system or the tyre pressure tread depth is 4 mm or less because oth- gauge. The outer appearance of a tyre does
monitor* and on wheels specifically tested by erwise they no longer provide adequate not permit any reliable conclusion about the
Mercedes-Benz. grip. tyre pressure. On vehicles fitted with the elec-
i Vehicles with MOExtended run-flat sys- Rthe
tronic tyre pressure monitor*, the tyre pres-
tread on a tyre may not wear evenly.
sure can be checked in the on-board com-
tem are not equipped with the TIREFIT You should thus regularly check the tread
puter.
kit*30. Z
30 Only for certain countries
* optional
229
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 230

Operation
Tyres and wheels

If the vehicle is to be heavily laden or driven Therefore, you should only correct tyre pres- This improves the ride comfort of your vehi-
at high speeds, the tyre pressure must be sures when the tyres are cold. cle, however the fuel consumption could
adapted according to the specifications given The pressure of warm tyres should only be increase slightly.
in the fuel filler flap (Y page 218). corrected if it is too low for the current oper- Also check the tyre pressure of the spare
Use the highest specified tyre pressure for ating conditions. wheel*.
the spare wheel*. You will find a table of tyre pressures for var- H Environmental note
G Risk of accident ious operating conditions on the inside of
Check the tyre pressure regularly, at least
your vehicle's fuel filler flap.
Should the tyre pressure drop repeatedly: every 14 days.
RCheck the tyre for foreign bodies. Driving with tyre pressure that is too high or
too low can:
RCheck whether the wheel is losing air or Rshorten the service life of the tyres
the valve is leaking. Tyre pressure loss warning system
Rcause increased tyre damage
Tyre pressure that is too low has a negative G Risk of accident
Rhave a negative effect on handling charac-
effect on the vehicle’s active safety, which The tyre pressure loss warning system does
could lead to your causing an accident. teristics (e.g. by causing aquaplaning)
not warn you of an incorrectly set tyre pres-
E 350 CGI31/E 300 BLUETEC: the values on sure. The table on the inside of the fuel filler
Tyre pressure changes by approximately
the tyre pressure information label (fuel filler flap will help you decide whether the tyre
0.1 bar for every 10 °C change in ambient
flap) are for the use of the vehicle in partially pressures should be corrected.
temperature.
laden and fully laden condition whilst driving The tyre pressure loss warning system does
If you measure the tyre pressure in enclosed at maximum speed. not replace the need to regularly check
spaces where the temperature differs from
Despite what is stated on the tyre pressure your vehicle's tyre pressures, since an even
the outside temperature, you will have to cor-
information label, for speeds up to loss of pressure on several tyres at the
rect the measured value accordingly.
210 km/h the values stated can be reduced same time cannot be detected by the tyre
When the vehicle is driven, the tyre tempera- as follows, without a reduction in safety: pressure loss warning system.
ture, and with it the tyre pressure, will
-0.4 bar /-6 psi: E 350 CGI The tyre pressure loss warning system is
increase depending on the road speed and
-0.3 bar/-4 psi: E 300 BLUETEC not able to warn you of a sudden loss of
the load on the tyres.
* optional
230
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 231

Operation
Tyres and wheels

pressure, e.g. if the tyre is penetrated by a Restarting the tyre pressure loss warn- X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in
foreign object. ing system the ignition lock.
In the event of a sudden loss of pressure, Restart the tyre pressure loss warning system The standard display appears in the multi-
bring the vehicle to a halt by braking care- if you have: function display (Y page 125).
fully. Do not make any sudden steering Rchanged the tyre pressure X Press k or j to select the tyre pres-
movements when doing so. sure function:
Rchanged the wheels or tyres
While the vehicle is in motion, the tyre pres- Run Flat Indicator active
Rfitted new wheels or tyres
sure loss warning system monitors the set Menu: R-Button æ
tyre pressure using the rotational speed of X Before restarting, consult the table of tyre X Press the reset button on the left of the
the wheels. This enables the system to detect pressures on the inside of the fuel filler flap instrument cluster.
significant pressure loss in a tyre. If the speed to ensure that the tyre pressure in all four
The following message appears in the
of rotation of a wheel changes as a result of tyres is set correctly for the operating con-
multi-function display:
a loss of pressure, a corresponding warning ditions concerned.
message will appear in the multi-function dis- Restart Run Flat Indicator?
X Also observe the notes in the section on Yes Cancel
play. tyre pressures (Y page 229).
The function of the tyre pressure loss warning If you wish to confirm the restart:
system is limited or delayed if: G Risk of accident X Press the æ button.
Rsnow chains are fitted to your vehicle's The tyre pressure loss warning system can
tyres only give reliable warnings if you have set
the correct tyre pressure.
Rroad conditions are wintry Run Flat Indicator restarted
If an incorrect tyre pressure is set, these
Ryou are driving on sand or gravel incorrect values will be monitored. After a teach-in period, the tyre pressure
Ryou adopt a very sporty driving style (cor- loss warning system will monitor the set
A tyre with insufficient pressure results in
nering at high speeds or driving with high tyre pressures of all four tyres.
an instability of the vehicle when driving,
rates of acceleration) thus increasing the risk of an accident. If you wish to cancel the restart:
Ryou are towing a very heavy or large trailer X Press the ç button.
Ryou are driving with a heavy load (in the or Z

vehicle or on the roof) X Wait until the message
231
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 232

Operation
Tyres and wheels

Restart Run Flat Indicator? i The operation of the tyre pressure moni- The current tyre pressure for each wheel will
Yes Cancel disappears. tor can be affected by interference from be displayed.
The tyre pressure values stored at the last radio transmitting equipment (e.g. radio If the vehicle has been parked for longer than
restart will continue to be monitored. headphones, two-way radios) that may be 20 minutes or you have not driven faster than
being operated in or near the vehicle. 25 km/h since the vehicle was parked, the
following message appears:
Checking the tyre pressure electroni- i If you are carrying a deflated tyre in the
Tyre pressure displayed only after
cally* vehicle, you may only reactivate the tyre
driving for a few minutes
pressure monitor if:
The tyre pressure monitor only functions if Rthe deflated tyre is no longer in the vehi- i The tyre pressure values indicated by the
the correct wheel electronics are fitted to all cle on-board computer may differ from those
wheels. These monitor the pressure in all four measured at a filling station with a pressure
Ryou have adjusted the tyre pressure cor-
tyres, which you have set when restarting the gauge. The tyres pressures shown by the
tyre pressure monitor. The monitor warns you rectly
on-board computer refer to those meas-
when the pressure drops in one or more of ured at sea level. The tyre pressure values
the tyres. indicated by the on-board computer may
Calling up the tyre pressure using the
G Risk of accident on-board computer differ when the vehicle is at high altitude.
The tyre pressure monitor does not warn In this case, do not reduce the tyre pres-
X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in sures.
you of an incorrectly set tyre pressure. The
the ignition lock.
table on the inside of the fuel filler flap will
help you decide whether the tyre pressures X Press the j or k button to select the Tyre pressure warning
should be corrected. tyre pressure function.
If the tyre pressure on one or more wheels
The tyre pressure monitor is not able to drops significantly, a message appears in the
warn you of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. multi-function display.
if the tyre is penetrated by a foreign object.
In the event of a sudden loss of pressure, The tyre pressure of the affected wheel(s) will
bring the vehicle to a halt by braking care- be displayed in a red rectangle. You will also
fully. Do not make any sudden steering hear a warning tone.
movements when doing so.
* optional
232
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 233

Operation
Tyres and wheels

Restarting the tyre pressure monitor X Press the reset button on the left of the Benz recommends that you use a
instrument cluster (Y page 243). Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this pur-
In most cases, the tyre pressure monitor will
automatically detect the new reference val- The following message appears in the pose. In particular, work relevant to safety
ues, e.g. if you have: multi-function display: Check current or on safety-related systems must be car-
Rchanged the tyre pressure tyre pressure? ried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
X Press the æ button. The wheels could work loose if they are not
Rchanged the wheels or tyres tightened to a torque of 130 Nm.
Rfitted
new wheels or tyres For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-
If you wish to define the new reference values mends that you only use wheel bolts of the
Tyre pressure monitor restarted
manually: correct size which have been approved for
The tyre pressure monitor has stored the Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
X Use the table on the inside of the fuel filler pressure of the tyres as a new reference
flap to ensure that the tyre pressure is set value. The wheels may be interchanged every
correctly in all four tyres for the current 5,000 km to 10,000 km depending on the
operating conditions. If you wish to cancel the restart:
degree of tyre wear, provided that the vehicle
X Press the ç button.
Also observe the notes in the section on has the same size front and rear tyres. Do not
tyre pressures (Y page 229). reverse the direction of tyre rotation.
X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in The wear patterns on the front and rear tyres
Interchanging the wheels differ depending on the operating conditions.
the ignition lock.
The standard display appears in the multi- G Risk of accident Interchange the wheels before a clear wear
function display (Y page 125). Interchange the front and rear wheels only pattern has formed on the tyres. The front
if they have the same dimensions: for exam- tyres typically wear more on the shoulders
X Press the j or k button to select the and the rear tyres in the centre.
ple size, offset, etc.
Tyre pressure function or wait until the Clean the contact surfaces of the wheel and
following message appears: After every wheel interchange/change,
have the tightening torque checked at a the brake disc thoroughly every time a wheel
Tyre pressure displayed only after is interchanged. Check the tyre pressure and,
qualified specialist workshop that has the
driving for a few minutes if necessary, restart the tyre pressure loss
necessary specialist knowledge and tools
to carry out the work required. Mercedes- warning system or the tyre pressure moni-
Z
tor*.
* optional
233
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 234

Operation
Winter driving
! On vehicles fitted with a tyre pressure Winter driving lower maximum permitted speed than that of
monitor*, electronic components are loca- the vehicle, affix an appropriate warning sign
ted in the wheel. Points to remember in the driver's field of vision. This can be
Tyre fitting tools should not be applied in Have your vehicle winterproofed at a qualified obtained at a qualified specialist workshop,
the area of the valve, as this could damage specialist workshop, e.g. at a Mercedes-Benz e.g. from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
the electronic components. Service Centre, at the onset of winter. In such circumstances, you should also
Always have the wheels interchanged/ restrict the maximum speed of the vehicle
changed at a qualified specialist workshop, using permanent Speedtronic 32 to the maxi-
e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Winter tyres mum permissible speed for winter tyres
Use winter tyres at temperatures below +7 ° (Y page 154).
C and on snow or ice-covered roads. Only Once you have fitted the winter tyres:
then can the effect of the ABS, ESP® and X Check the tyre pressures (Y page 229).
4MATIC* driving systems be ensured in win- X Restart the tyre pressure moni-
ter too.
tor* (Y page 232).
Use winter tyres of the same make and tread
on all wheels to maintain safe handling char- G Risk of accident
acteristics. If you fit the spare wheel* when driving with
G Risk of accident winter tyres, bear in mind that driving sta-
bility will be impaired owing to unstable
Winter tyres with a tread depth of less than
cornering characteristics caused by the dif-
4 mm must be replaced immediately. They
ferent tyres. You should therefore adapt
are no longer suitable for winter use, can
your driving style and drive carefully.
no longer provide sufficient grip. This could
cause you to lose control of your vehicle Have the spare wheel* replaced at the
and cause an accident. nearest qualified specialist workshop
which has the necessary specialist knowl-
Always observe the maximum permitted edge and tools to carry out the work
speed specified for the winter tyres you have required. Mercedes-Benz recommends
fitted. If you fit winter tyres which have a
32 Only available for certain countries.
* optional
234
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 235

Operation
Winter driving
that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service with the manufacturer's installation Winter driving
Centre for this purpose. In particular, work instructions.
relevant to safety or on safety-related sys- G Risk of accident
tems must be carried out at a qualified ! If snow chains are fitted to the front Do not shift down for additional engine
specialist workshop. wheels, they may come into contact with braking on a slippery road surface. This
the bodywork and axle components when could cause the drive wheels to lose their
the vehicle is in motion and damage the grip and the vehicle could skid.
tyre or the vehicle.
Snow chains You should drive particularly carefully on slip-
On vehicles with AIRMATIC DC*, you must pery road surfaces. Avoid sudden accelera-
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom- only drive at raised vehicle level if snow
mends that you only use snow chains which tion, steering and braking manoeuvres.
chains have been fitted (Y page 156).
have been specially approved for your vehicle If the vehicle threatens to skid or cannot be
Do not exceed the maximum permissible stopped when moving at low speed:
by Mercedes-Benz or are of a corresponding
speed of 50 km/h.
standard of quality. X Vehicles with manual transmission: engage
i You may wish to deactivate ESP® when neutral.
! Information about the use of snow chain-
pulling away with snow chains fitted
compatible AMG winter tyres is applicable X Vehicles with automatic transmission*:
(Y page 60). This way you can allow the
for AMG tyres. Use of snow chains is only shift the selector lever to N.
wheels to spin in a controlled manner, ach-
permissible with these tyres.
ieving an increased driving force (cutting X Try to bring the vehicle under control using
If you intend to fit snow chains, please bear action). corrective steering.
the following points in mind:
RSnow chains cannot be fitted to all wheel/
tyre combinations.
RSnow chains must not be fitted to emer-
gency spare wheels, e.g. the "Minispare" or
collapsible emergency spare wheel.
RAlways fit snow chains to both rear wheels,
even on vehicles with 4MATIC*. Comply
Z
* optional
235
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 236

Operation
Driving tips
Driving tips Downhill gradients constant slight pedal pressure. This causes
On long and steep downhill stretches, espe- the brake system to overheat, increases
Rolling with the engine switched off the braking distance and can lead to the
cially if the vehicle is laden or towing a trailer,
G Risk of accident you must shift to a lower gear in good time or, brakes failing completely.
Do not switch off the engine while the vehi- on vehicles with automatic transmission*, If the brakes have been used only moderately,
cle is in motion. select shift range 1, 2 or 3. you should occasionally test their effective-
There is no power assistance for the steer- i This also applies if you have activated ness. To do this, brake more firmly from a
ing or the service brake when the engine is cruise control, Speedtronic or Distronic*. higher speed. This improves the grip of the
not running. brakes.
This uses the braking effect of the engine and
Steering and braking require significantly
you will not have to brake to such an extent
more effort and you could lose control of Wet roads
to maintain the same speed. This relieves the
the vehicle and cause an accident as a
load on the brake system and prevents the If driving in heavy rain for a prolonged period
result.
brakes from overheating and wearing too of time without braking, there may be a
quickly. If you need additional braking, delayed reaction from the brakes, when brak-
depress the brake pedal repeatedly rather ing for the first time. You must brake harder.
Braking than continuously. You must therefore maintain a greater dis-
G Risk of accident tance from the vehicle in front.
Do not change down for additional engine Heavy and light loads Brake firmly after driving on a wet road. This
braking on a slippery road surface. This If the brakes have been subjected to a heavy way the brake discs will become warm, drying
could cause the drive wheels to lose their load, do not stop the vehicle immediately, but more quickly, which will protect them against
grip and the vehicle could skid. drive on for a short while. This allows the air- corrosion.
flow to cool the brakes more quickly.
G Risk of accident
Make sure that other road users are not G Risk of accident
endangered by your braking. Never depress the brake pedal continu-
ously while the vehicle is in motion, e.g.
never cause the brakes to rub by applying
* optional
236
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 237

Operation
Driving tips
Limited braking performance on salted for Mercedes-Benz vehicles or which corre- or brake discs, depends on the individual driv-
roads spond to an equivalent quality standard. ing style and operating conditions.
Brake pads/linings which have not been Because of this, it is impossible to state a
G Risk of accident approved for Mercedes-Benz or which are not mileage that will be valid under all circum-
The layer of salt on the brake discs and the of an equivalent quality could affect your vehi- stances. An aggressive driving style will lead
brake pads/linings may cause a delay in cle's operating safety. to high wear.
the braking effect, resulting in a signifi-
G Risk of accident
cantly longer braking distance, which could
lead to an accident. New brake pads/linings only reach their
Tyre grip
optimum braking effect after several hun-
To avoid this danger, you should:
dred kilometres of driving. Before this opti- G Risk of accident
Roccasionally brake carefully, without put-
mum braking effect is reached, you should Whereas the vehicle can be fully controlled
ting other road users at risk, when you compensate for the reduced braking effect
are driving on salted roads. This helps to at a certain speed on dry roads, you must
by applying greater pressure when braking. reduce your speed on wet or icy roads to
remove any salt that may have started to This also applies after the brake discs or the
build up on the brake discs and the brake achieve the same road safety. Otherwise
brake pads/linings have been replaced. you could cause an accident.
pads/linings.
Pay particular attention to the road condi-
Rmaintain a greater distance to the vehicle
High-performance brake system for tions at temperatures around freezing
ahead and drive with particular care. point.
AMG vehicles
Rcarefully apply the brakes at the end of a
If ice has formed on the road surface (e.g.
trip and immediately after commencing a The high-performance brake system is from fog), a light film of water rapidly forms
new trip, so that salt residues are designed for heavy loads. Braking can there- on the ice when you brake, considerably
removed from the brake disc. fore cause noises. This will depend on: reducing tyre grip. Drive with particular
Rspeed
care in such weather conditions.
Rbraking force
New brake pads/linings
Renvironmental conditions, such as temper-
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom- ature and humidity
mends that you only have brake pads/linings
The wear of individual components of the Z
fitted to your vehicle that have been approved
brake system, such as the brake pads/linings
237
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 238

Operation
Driving abroad
Driving on wet roads Driving abroad Do not change xenon headlamps yourself,
but have them replaced at a qualified spe-
If water has accumulated to a certain depth Points to remember cialist workshop which has the necessary
on the road surface, there is a danger of aqua-
An extensive Mercedes-Benz Service network specialist knowledge and tools to carry out
planing occurring, even if:
is also available in other countries. You can the work required.
Ryou drive at low speeds
obtain the relevant workshop directories Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use
Rthe tyres have adequate tread depth from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this
For this reason, do not drive in tyre ruts, and Only low-octane fuel is available in certain purpose. In particular, work relevant to
brake carefully. countries. safety or on safety-related systems must be
You can find further information about fuel carried out at a qualified specialist work-
grades on (Y page 218). shop.
Driving on flooded roads
If you have to drive on stretches of road on
which water has collected, please bear in Symmetrical dipped beam
mind that: If your journey takes you to countries where
Rthe maximum permitted still water depth is vehicles are driven on the opposite side of the
25 cm. road to the country in which the vehicle is
Ryou
registered, your headlamps must be switched
should drive no faster than at walking
to symmetrical dipped beam. Oncoming traf-
pace.
fic will be dazzled less.
! Note that vehicles in front or oncoming G Risk of injury
vehicles create waves. This could mean Vehicles with xenon headlamps*:
that the maximum permitted water depth 1 Protective cap
Xenon bulbs are under high voltage. You
is exceeded. could get an electric shock and be seriously X Turn cap 1 anti-clockwise and remove it.
You must observe these notes, otherwise or even fatally injured if you touch the elec-
damage may occur to the engine, electrics tric contacts on xenon bulbs. Do not, there-
or transmission. fore, remove the cover on xenon bulbs.
238
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 239

Operation
Trailer towing
Trailer towing G Risk of accident
Make sure that the ball coupling is fully
Folding out the ball coupling
engaged both when it is folded in and when
Before you can tow a trailer with your vehicle, it is folded out. The indicator lamp is not lit.
you must fit the ball coupling. Do not pull the telescopic lever if a trailer
i In vehicles with a folding bench seat, first is attached. The trailer could otherwise
remove the folding bench seat cushion come loose.
(Y page 86) and fold up the luggage com-
partment floor (Y page 195). X Pull telescopic lever 1 out forwards.
The telescopic lever is under the boot/lug- X Pull telescopic lever 1 upwards.
1 Switchover lever
gage compartment mat on the left-hand side. The ball coupling disengages and folds out
X Switch lever 1 over. from under the rear bumper.
Indicator lamp 2 flashes. The trailer power
X Replace the cap.
socket folds away automatically.
G Risk of accident X Guide telescopic lever 1 back again.
Have your headlamps switched back to
asymmetrical dipped beam if you visit a
country in which traffic drives on the same
side of the road as in the country in which
your vehicle was registered. You may oth-
erwise dazzle the oncoming traffic and
could cause an accident.
1 Telescopic lever
2 Indicator lamp
239
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 240

Operation
Trailer towing
X Press the ball coupling in the direction of RThe permitted rear axle load of the towing Bear in mind that the payload and the rear
the arrow by hand until it engages in a ver- vehicle axle load are reduced by the actual nose-
tical position. RThe
weight.
maximum permissible gross vehicle
Indicator lamp 2 goes out. weight of both the towing vehicle and the i On vehicles without level control, the
The message Trailer tow hitch trailer height of the ball coupling will alter accord-
Check locking mech. is shown in the You will find the applicable permissible val- ing to the load placed on the vehicle. In this
multi-function display until the ball cou- ues which must not be exceeded in the case, you should use a trailer with a height-
pling is engaged. vehicle documents. adjustable drawbar.
X Remove the protective cap from the ball You will find the values approved by the
coupling. manufacturer on the vehicle identification Coupling up a trailer
plates and those for the towing vehicle in
the “Technical data” section. G Risk of injury
Notes on towing a trailer Do not connect a trailer with an engaged
You will find installation dimensions and loads
G Risk of accident overrun brake. Otherwise, your hand could
in the "Technical data" section
become trapped between the bumper and
When reversing the vehicle towards the (Y page 375).
drawbar.
trailer, make sure there is nobody between The maximum permissible trailer drawbar
the trailer and the vehicle. noseweight on the ball coupling is 76 kg ! Do not uncouple a trailer with overrun
Couple and uncouple the trailer carefully. If (Saloon) or 84 kg (Estate). However, the brake between the bumper and drawbar,
you do not couple the trailer to the towing actual noseweight must not exceed the value otherwise your vehicle could be damaged
vehicle correctly, the trailer could become given on the trailer coupling and trailer iden- by the spring action of the overrun brake.
detached. tification plates. The lowest weight applies.
Make sure that the following values are not ! Use a noseweight as close as possible to X Position the trailer level behind the vehicle.
exceeded: the maximum permissible noseweight. Do X Couple up the trailer.
RThe permitted trailer drawbar nose- not use a noseweight of less than 50 kg, X Establish the electrical connection
weight otherwise the trailer may come loose. between the vehicle and the trailer.
RThe permitted trailer load
240
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 241

Operation
Trailer towing
Driving tips This uses the braking effect of the engine and and consequently the vehicle's gradient-
you will not have to brake to such an extent climbing capability, decrease with increas-
In Germany, the maximum permitted speed
to maintain the same speed. This relieves the ing altitude.
for vehicle/trailer combinations is 80 km/h.
load on the brake system and prevents the If the trailer swings from side to side:
! A maximum speed of 80 km/h should not brakes from overheating and wearing too
X Do not accelerate.
be exceeded, even in countries where quickly. If you need additional braking,
higher speeds are permitted for vehicle/ depress the brake pedal repeatedly rather X Do not counter-steer.
trailer combinations. than continuously. X Brake if necessary.
When towing a trailer, your vehicle's handling G Risk of accident
characteristics will be different in comparison
G Risk of accident
Never depress the brake pedal continu-
to when driving without a trailer. On no account should you attempt to draw
ously while the vehicle is in motion, e.g.
the vehicle/trailer combination out by
The vehicle/trailer combination: never cause the brakes to rub by applying
increasing speed.
Ris heavier constant slight pedal pressure. This causes
the brake system to overheat, increases
Ris restricted in its acceleration and gradi-
the braking distance and can lead to the
ent-climbing capability Folding in the ball coupling
brakes failing completely.
Rhas an increased braking distance i Fold in the ball coupling when you are not
Ris affected more by strong crosswinds Driving tips using the trailer tow hitch.
Rdemands RMaintain a greater distance from the vehi-
more sensitive steering
cle in front than when driving without a
Rconsumes more fuel
trailer.
On long and steep downhill gradients you RAvoid braking abruptly. If possible, brake
must select a lower gear in good time, or in
gently at first to allow the trailer to run on.
vehicles with automatic transmission*, select Then increase the braking force rapidly.
shift range 1, 2 or 3.
RThe values given for gradient-climbing
i This also applies if you have activated capabilities from a standstill refer to sea
cruise control, Distronic* or Speedtronic. level. When driving in mountainous areas,
Z
note that the power output of the engine,
* optional
241
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 242

Operation
Trailer towing
Trailer power supply
The trailer socket of your vehicle is equipped
at the factory with a permanent power supply.
The permanent power supply is supplied via
trailer socket pin 9.
! You can connect accessories with a max-
imum power consumption of 240 W to the
permanent power supply.
You must not charge a trailer battery using
1 Telescopic lever the power supply.
X Press the ball coupling in the direction of
2 Indicator lamp the arrow by hand until it engages behind You can obtain further information about
the bumper. installing the trailer electrics from a qualified
X Place the protective cap on the ball cou- specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz
pling. Indicator lamp 2 goes out and the mes-
Service Centre.
sage in the multi-function display disap-
G Risk of injury pears.
Make sure that no persons or animals are Trailer with 7-pin connector
in the pivoting range of the ball coupling.
Otherwise, they could be injured. If your trailer has a 7-pin connector, you can
connect it to the 13-pin socket on the ball
X Pull telescopic lever 1 out forwards. coupling using an adapter or, if necessary, an
adapter cable. Both of these can be obtained
X Pull telescopic lever 1 upwards.
at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. at a
The ball coupling disengages and folds Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
down under the rear bumper. Indicator
lamp 2 flashes.
X Guide telescopic lever 1 back again.
242
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 243

Operation
Service
Fitting the adapter Service to subtract the battery-disconnection periods
from the service date shown on the display.
Active Service System PLUS
ASSYST PLUS, the Active Service System,
Fading out the service message
tells you when the next service is due. When-
ever a service is due, this is shown in the
Service A due in .. days
Service A due in .. km
Service A due now
1 Connector with lug

2 Socket with groove
X Open the socket cover.

1 Reset button
X Insert the connector with lug 1 into
groove 2 on the socket and turn the con- X Press reset button 1.
nector clockwise to the stop. The letter indicates how much time the work-
shop will require to carry out the service work.
X Make the cover engage.
The letters displayed range from A for a short
X If you are using an adapter cable, secure service duration to H for a long service dura-
the cable to the trailer with cable ties. tion.
ASSYST PLUS does not record any periods of
! Make sure that there is sufficient cable
time during which the battery is disconnec-
play so that the cable cannot become
ted. In order to maintain the time-dependent
detached when cornering.
service schedule, you should call up the
service due date and make a note of it before
Z
you disconnect the battery. The alternative is
243
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 244

Operation
Care
Exceeding the service due date Calling up the service due date Care
One of the following messages appears in the Use the buttons on the multi-function steer- Notes on care
multi-function display: ing wheel.
Regular and proper care maintains the value
Service A overdue by .. days X Switch on the ignition.
of your vehicle.
Service A overdue by .. km X Press è or ÿ to select the Basic
i It is advisable to use Mercedes-Benz care
You will also hear a warning tone. display menu (Y page 125). products.
A qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a X Press j or k to select the service
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre, will reset the Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affected
information. by corrosion and damage caused by inade-
service indicator when it carries out the nec-
The 9 service symbol and the service quate care cannot always be completely
essary service work.
due date are displayed. repaired. In such cases, visit a qualified spe-
i If you fail to have the service performed cialist workshop immediately, e.g. a
X To select a different display, press j,
by the specified date, you may be contra- Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
è or ÿ.
vening the relevant laws, your warranty Repair damage caused by loose chippings
may be invalidated and ex gratia claims and remove the following substances imme-
may be refused. diately, whilst avoiding rubbing too hard:
RSoak insect remains with insect remover
and rinse off afterwards.
RSoak bird droppings with water and rinse
off afterwards.
RRemove tree resin, oils, fuels and greases
by rubbing gently with a cloth soaked in
petroleum ether or lighter fluid.
RUse silicone remover to remove wax.
RUse tar remover to remove tar stains.
244
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 245

Operation
Care
H Environmental note Automatic car wash sweeps being triggered. This could cause
Dispose of empty packaging, cleaning damage to the vehicle.
G Risk of accident
cloths and polishing wads in an environ- After using an automatic car wash, wipe any
The vehicle is braked when HOLD is activa-
mentally responsible manner. wax and drying agents off the windscreen and
ted. Therefore, deactivate HOLD before the
the wiper blades. This will prevent smears and
vehicle is washed in an automatic car wash.
! Do not affix: reduce wiping noises caused by residue on
Rstickers You can wash the vehicle in an automatic car the windscreen.
Rfilms
wash from the very start.
! Do not use a touch-free automatic car High-pressure cleaners
Rmagnetic plates or similar items
wash that uses chemical agents to wash G Risk of accident
to painted surfaces, otherwise you could the vehicle.
damage the paintwork. Do not use high-pressure cleaners with cir-
Preferably use one with high-pressure jets for cular-jet nozzles (dirt grinders) to clean
prewashing. your vehicle or - especially - the tyres. You
Vehicle care If the vehicle is very dirty, prewash it before could otherwise damage the tyres and
cleaning it in an automatic car wash. cause an accident.
! Do not park the vehicle for a long period
of time directly after cleaning, especially if ! Make sure that the automatic car wash is
! Observe the instructions issued by the
the wheels have just been cleaned with a suitable for the size of the vehicle. Fold in
the exterior mirrors before the vehicle is equipment manufacturer concerning the
wheel cleaner. Wheel cleaners could cause distance to be maintained between the
rapid corrosion of the brake discs and washed. There is otherwise a risk of dam-
age to the exterior mirrors. nozzle of the high-pressure cleaner and the
brake pads/linings. After cleaning, park vehicle (at least 30 cm).
the vehicle when it is at normal operating
! Make sure the side windows are com- Move the high-pressure cleaner nozzle
temperature.
pletely closed, the ventilation/heater around when cleaning your vehicle.
blower is fully turned off and the wind- Do not aim directly at any of the following:
screen wiper switch is set to 0. The rain Rtyres
sensor may otherwise be activated, for
Rdoor joint
instance, leading to inadvertent wiper Z
Relectrical components
245
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 246

Operation
Care
Rbattery ! Only fold the wiper arms away from the i Anti-glare film retrofitted to the insides of
Rconnectors windscreen when they are in a vertical posi- the windows could interfere with radio or
tion, otherwise you will damage the bonnet. mobile phone reception, especially if it is
Rlights
conductive or metal-coated film. Informa-
Rseals
X Fold the wiper arms away from the wind- tion about anti-glare film can be obtained
screen until you feel them engage. from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
Damaged seals or electrical components
can lead to failures or leaks.
X Clean the windscreen and the wiper blades.
X Fold the windscreen wipers back again Cleaning the headlamps
before the ignition is switched on.
Cleaning the wiper blades and the out- X Clean the headlamp lenses with a wet
side of the windscreen ! Do not clean the wiper blades too often, sponge.
G Risk of injury otherwise the rubber may become porous,
resulting in wiper noise.
! Only use washer fluid which is suitable
Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition for plastic lenses. Unsuitable washer fluid
lock before cleaning the windscreen or the could damage the plastic lenses of the
wiper blades. There is otherwise a risk of Cleaning the windows headlamps.
the windscreen wipers being set in motion Do not use the following:
! Do not use dry cloths, abrasive products,
and causing injury. Rdry cloths
solvents or cleaning agents containing sol-
X Turn the key to position 1 in the ignition vents to clean the inside of the windows. Rabrasive cleaning agents
lock (Y page 76). Clean the insides of the windows with a
Rsolvents
damp cloth or commercially-available glass
X Set the windscreen wipers to position cleaner. Avoid touching the inside of the Rcleaning agents containing solvent
u on the combination switch rear windscreen and the side windows with You could otherwise scratch or damage the
(Y page 105). hard objects, e.g. ice scrapers or rings. You surface of the lenses.
X Turn the key to position 0 or remove it when could otherwise cause damage to the win-
the wiper arms are vertical (Y page 76). dows, rear window heating or aerial on the
rear window.
246
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 247

Operation
Care
Plastic trim bag being triggered, plastic parts that have ing results depend on the type of dirt and
become loose could cause considerable how long it has been there.
! Do not use dry, coarse or hard cloths and
injuries. RClean Alcantara covers with a damp
do not scrub. Doing so will scratch or dam-
age the surfaces. cloth. Make sure you wipe entire seat
sections to avoid leaving visible lines.
X Wipe plastic parts with a damp, lint-free Leather upholstery*
cloth (e.g. a microfibre cloth). ! Cleaning i Note that leather covers are a natural
X Light soiling: use a low-foaming soap (e.g. RClean genuine leather covers using a product and as such are subject to a natural
a light liquid hand soap) diluted in water. damp cloth, then wipe the covers down ageing process and may react differently
using a dry cloth. When doing this, make (e.g. increased formation of wrinkles) to
X Heavy soiling: use a cleaning agent that is
sure that the leather does not become certain environmental influences (such as
solvent-free and non-corrosive. Mercedes-
soaked. For leather care, you should use high humidity, intense heat).
Benz recommends that you use a
Mercedes-Benz cleaning product for this leather care foam A 001 986 59 71 10. Note that regular care is essential to ensure
purpose. You can purchase this from any that the quality (both appearance and com-
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. fort) of the covers is retained over time.
RClean artificial leather covers with a cloth
Cleaning the steering wheel boss and
dashboard moistened with a solution containing 1% Care of exhaust tail pipes (AMG vehi-
detergent (e. g. washing up liquid). cles)
X Moisten a clean lint-free cloth with water. RClean fabric covers with a microfibre Impurities combined with the effects of road
X Clean the plastic parts and the dashboard. cloth moistened with a solution contain- grit and corrosive environmental factors may
X If particularly dirty, use a mild detergent. ing 1% detergent (e.g. washing up liquid). cause flash rust to form on the surface.
When cleaning, take care not to rub too Regular care of the exhaust tail pipes will
G Risk of injury vigorously and always wipe entire seat ensure that their original shine is restored.
Do not use cleaners and cockpit care sections to avoid leaving visible lines.
sprays containing solvents to clean the Leave the seat to dry afterwards. Clean- ! Do not clean exhaust tail pipes with alka-
cockpit and steering wheel boss. Cleaners line-based cleaning agents such as wheel
containing solvents cause the surface to cleaner.
become porous and in the event of an air- Z
* optional
247
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 248

Operation
Care
Use the chrome cleaning agent recommen- Cleaning Parktronic* Trailer coupling*
ded by Mercedes-Benz for cleaning. Infor-
mation about chrome cleaning agents can The sensors are located in the front and rear The ball coupling must be cleaned if it
be obtained from any Mercedes-Benz bumpers. becomes dirty or corroded.
Service Centre. X Remove any rust using a wire brush.
X Remove dirt with a clean, lint-free cloth or

Cleaning Distronic* a brush.
! Do not clean the ball coupling with a high-

pressure cleaner. Do not use solvents.
1 Parktronic* sensors in the front bumper

(left-hand side)
X Clean sensors 1 in the bumper with water,
1 Distronic* cover car shampoo and a soft cloth.
X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition ! Do not use dry, coarse or hard cloths and
lock. do not scrub. You will otherwise scratch or 1 Ball neck head
damage the sensors. If you intend to use a
X Clean cover 1 in the radiator grille with
high-pressure cleaner or a steam cleaner to X After cleaning, lightly oil or grease ball cou-
water, car shampoo and a soft cloth. clean the sensors, observe the instructions pling 1.
! Do not use dry, coarse or hard cloths and issued by the equipment manufacturer X Check that the vehicle's trailer coupling is
concerning the distance to be maintained
do not scrub. Doing so will scratch or dam- working properly.
between the nozzle of the high-pressure
age the surfaces.
cleaner and the vehicle.
* optional
248
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 249

Operation
Care
i Maintenance on the ball coupling and
trailer coupling can also be performed by
any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
Dispose of oily and greasy cloths in an envi-
ronmentally-responsible manner.
249
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 250

250
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 251

Practical advice
Where will I find...? ........................... 252

Display messages ............................. 257
Troubleshooting ................................ 282
Locking/unlocking in an emer-
gency ................................................. 306
Resetting triggered NECK-PRO
head restraints .................................. 309
Changing the batteries ..................... 310
Changing the bulbs ........................... 311
Replacing the wiper blades .............. 315
Flat tyre ............................................. 317
Battery ............................................... 329
Jump-starting .................................... 333
Towing and tow-starting .................. 337
Fuses .................................................. 340
251
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 252

Practical advice
Where will I find...?

Where will I find...? Estate
Warning triangle The warning triangle is located in a red box
behind the side trim panel on the left-hand
side of the luggage compartment.
Saloon
The warning triangle is secured on the inside
of the boot lid.
1 Warning triangle
X Remove warning triangle 1.
1 Release button
2 Side trim panel
1 Warning triangle X Press release button 1.
X Turn the catch 90° in the direction of the

X Fold side trim 2 inwards.
arrow and remove warning triangle 1.
252
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 253

Practical advice

Setting up the warning triangle First-aid kit Fire extinguisher*
i Check the expiry date of the first-aid kit i Have the fire extinguisher refilled after
annually, and replace the contents if nec- each use and checked every two years.
essary. Otherwise, it may fail in an emergency.
The first-aid kit is located in the stowage com- Observe the legal requirements in all coun-
partment under the front-passenger seat. tries concerned.
The fire extinguisher is located in the stowage
compartment underneath the driver's seat.
1 Retainer
2 Side reflectors
3 Feet
X Fold feet 3 down and out to the side.

X Pull side reflectors 2 upwards to form a
1 Handle
triangle and lock them at the top using
retainer 1. X To open: pull handle 1 up.
1 Handle
X Fold the cover forwards. 2 Cover
X Remove the first-aid kit.
X To open: pull handle 1 up.
X Pull cover 2 forwards in the direction of
the arrow.
X Remove the fire extinguisher from the
stowage compartment. Z
* optional
253
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 254

Practical advice

Vehicle tool kit, jack and spare i When using the jack, you should also
wheel* observe the safety notes in the "Flat tyre"
section (Y page 324).
The vehicle tool kit is located in a stowage
compartment underneath the floor of the
boot/luggage compartment. Saloon
G Risk of injury X Fold up the boot floor (Y page 192).
The jack is designed only to raise and hold
the vehicle for a short time while a wheel Estate
is being changed.
X Open the luggage compartment floor
If you are carrying out work on the vehicle, 1 Rotary catch
(Y page 193).
you must use stands. 2 Cover
Make sure that the jack is placed on a firm, Vehicles with folding bench seat*
non-slip and level surface. Do not use X Turn rotary catch 1 clockwise to the stop
X Open the luggage compartment floor
wooden blocks or similar objects as a jack and remove cover 2.
underlay. Otherwise, the jack will not be (Y page 193).
able to achieve its load-bearing capacity
i To reach the vehicle tool kit, the side
due to the restricted height.
cover must first be released.
Do not start the engine at any time while a
wheel is being changed.
Do not lie under the vehicle when it is being
supported by the jack. If you do not raise
the vehicle as described, it could slip off the
jack (e.g. if the engine is started or a door
or the boot lid/tailgate is opened or closed)
and you could be seriously injured.
* optional
254
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 255

Practical advice

Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit Estate Vehicles with "Minispare" emergency
spare wheel*/collapsible emergency
Saloon spare wheel* or a spare wheel
1 Vehicle tool kit, jack, folding chock

2 Electric air pump
1 Vehicle tool kit, jack, folding chock
3 TIREFIT kit 1 Vehicle tool kit, wheel wrench, jack, fold-
2 Electric air pump ing chock
3 TIREFIT kit 2 "Minispare" emergency spare wheel/col-
lapsible emergency spare wheel or spare
wheel
3 Fastening element
i Vehicles with collapsible emergency

spare wheel:
The electric air pump is under fastening
element 3.
* optional
255
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 256

Practical advice

Removing the "Minispare" emergency 2 Luggage well Setting up the foldable wheel chock
spare wheel*/collapsible emergency
X To remove: unscrew securing clips 1 The folding wheel chock serves as an addi-
spare wheel or spare wheel* tional measure for securing the vehicle
from the securing bolts by turning the clips
X Saloon: remove the luggage well against rolling away, e.g. when a wheel is
anti-clockwise.
(Y page 256). being changed.
X Lift up luggage well 2 in the area of secur-
X Estate: remove the luggage compartment
ing clips 1.
floor (Y page 194).
X Remove luggage well 2 from the boot.
X Turn fastening element 3 anti-clockwise.
X Remove the "Minispare" emergency spare
wheel/collapsible emergency spare wheel
or the spare wheel 2.
Removing or fitting the luggage well

You can only remove the luggage well from
the Saloon. 1 To fold the plates upwards
2 To fold out the lower plate
3 To insert the plate
X To fit: insert the luggage well into the boot X Fold both plates 1 upwards.
in such a way that securing clips 1 are X Fold out lower plate 2.
roughly aligned with the securing bolts.
X Guide the lugs on the lower plate fully into
X Press the front edge of the luggage well openings in base plate 3.
under the trim of the loading edge in the
direction of the arrows.
X Press securing clips 1 up to the stop
1 Securing clips against the securing bolts.
* optional
256
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 257

Practical advice
Display messages
Display messages speed, outside temperature, warning/indi- Hiding display messages
cator lamps, display messages or system After a few seconds, the on-board computer
Notes failures. The vehicle's handling character- automatically hides some low priority display
The on-board computer shows warnings or istics may be affected. Adjust your driving messages. Other messages remain visible in
malfunctions in the multi-function display. style and speed accordingly. the multi-function display until you hide them
Certain display messages are accompanied Immediately consult a qualified specialist yourself.
by a warning tone or a continuous tone. workshop which has the necessary special- Some high priority display messages cannot
The multi-function display shows high-priority ist knowledge and tools to carry out the be hidden. The multi-function display shows
display messages in red. In the following work required. Mercedes-Benz recom- these messages continuously until the cau-
tables, these display messages are printed in mends that you use a Mercedes-Benz ses of the messages have been remedied.
red. Service Centre for this purpose. In particu-
Please respond in accordance with the dis- lar, work relevant to safety or on safety-
ing wheel.
play messages and follow the additional related systems must be carried out at a
qualified specialist workshop. X Use the è, ·, j or k button
notes in this Owner's Manual.
to select another display.
G Risk of accident When you stop and park the vehicle, please The on-board computer saves certain dis-
No further messages can be displayed if the observe the instructions provided for HOLD play messages in the message mem-
instrument cluster and/or the multi-func- (Y page 155) and parking (Y page 113). ory (Y page 131).
tion display fails. The following tables contain all the display
This means that you will not see information messages.
about the driving situation, such as the
257
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 258

Practical advice
Display messages
Text messages

The operating safety of the vehicle could be impaired if service work is carried out incorrectly. There is a risk that you could lose control of
the vehicle and cause an accident. The safety systems may no longer be able to protect you or others as they are designed to do.
Always have maintenance work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to
carry out the work required.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose.
In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
Display messages Possible cause/consequence Possible solution
120 km/h Maximum speed The maximum speed has been excee- X Drive more slowly.
exceeded ded33.
ABS ABS, ESP inopera- G Risk of accident X Drive on carefully.

tive See Owner's X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
ABS, ESP® and therefore also PRE-
Manual
SAFE® are unavailable due to a malfunc-
tion. BAS has also been deactivated.
The brake system is still available with
complete brake boosting effect.
258
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 259

Practical advice
Display messages
ABS ABS, ESP unavaila- G Risk of accident X Drive on carefully.

ble See Owner's X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
ABS, ESP® and therefore also PRE-
Manual
SAFE® are unavailable due to undervolt-
age. BAS has also been deactivated.
DISTRONIC Override Distronic* is no longer controlling the X Ease off the accelerator pedal.
speed of the vehicle.
DISTRONIC - - - An activation condition for Distronic* is X If conditions permit, drive faster than
not fulfilled. 30 km/h and store the speed (Y page 145).
or
X Check activation conditions for Distronic*.
DISTRONIC inoperative Distronic* is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
* optional
259
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 260

Practical advice
Display messages
DISTRONIC currently unavail- Distronic* is deactivated and is tempora- Distronic* is available again and the display mes-
able See Owner's rily inoperative, if: sage disappears when the dirt (e.g. slush) falls off
Manual Rthe Distronic* cover in the radiator while you are driving or if the system detects that
the sensors are fully available again.
grille is dirty
If the display message does not disappear:
Rits function is impaired due to heavy
X Clean the Distronic* cover in the radiator grille
rain, snow or fog.
(Y page 248).
Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily
X If necessary, wait until the system has cooled
unavailable, e.g. because of electro-
magnetic radiation. down.
Rthe radar sensor system has not detec- X Restart the engine.
ted any vehicles or stationary objects,
e.g. traffic signs, for a long time.
Rthe system has overheated.
ESP inoperative See G Risk of accident X Drive on carefully.

Owner's Manual X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
ESP® and therefore also Brake Assist and
PRE-SAFE® are unavailable due to a mal-
function. The v warning lamp also
lights up in the instrument cluster.
* optional
260
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 261

Practical advice
Display messages
P Selector lever in You have switched off the engine with the X Move the selector lever to P.
park position KEYLESS GO button* and opened the driv- The engine can be started again.
er's door.
or
With HOLD activated, you have either:
Ropened the driver’s door and released
the seat belt or
Rswitched off the engine or
Ropened the bonnet
The horn may also sound at regular inter-
vals. The horn becomes louder if you
attempt to lock the vehicle.
The engine cannot be started.
P Selector lever in You have tried to switch off the engine X Move the selector lever to P.
park position with the KEYLESS GO button* while the
selector lever is in position R or D.
Please shift to P or N You have attempted to start the engine X Move the selector lever to P or N.
while the selector lever is not in position
P or N.
* optional
261
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 262

Practical advice
Display messages
PRE-SAFE inoperative See G Risk of injury X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Owner's Manual
PRE-SAFE® has failed. All other occupant
safety systems, e.g. airbags, remain avail-
able.
Tyre pressure displayed only The tyre pressure monitor* is measuring X Drive on.
after driving for a the tyre pressure. The tyre pressures will appear in the multi-
few minutes function display after you have been driving for
a few minutes.
Please correct the tyre pressure Vehicles with tyre pressure monitor*: the X Check the tyre pressure at the next opportunity
pressure of one or more tyres is too low and correct it if necessary (Y page 229).
or the tyre pressures of the individual
wheels display a large discrepancy.
Tyre pressure inoperative The tyre pressure monitor* is malfunc- X Have the tyre pressure monitor* and wheels
monitor tioning. checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Tyre pressure inoperative No The tyre pressure monitor* is deactivated X Have wheels with suitable wheel sensors fitted
monitor wheel sensors because the vehicle is fitted with wheels at a qualified specialist workshop.
that do not have suitable wheel sensors. Once wheels with the correct wheel sensors
have been fitted, the tyre pressure monitor*
reactivates automatically after a few minutes
of driving.
* optional
262
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 263

Practical advice
Display messages
Tyre press. Wheel sensor miss- The tyre pressure monitor* is not receiv- X Have the tyre pressure monitor* and wheels
mon. ing ing a signal from at least one wheel checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
because a wheel has been fitted which Once wheels with suitable wheel sensors have
does not have suitable sensors (e.g. the been fitted again, the tyre pressures are dis-
spare wheel). Or there is a malfunction in played in the multi-function display after driv-
at least one wheel sensor. ing for a few minutes.
A line is displayed in the multi-function
display for the tyre concerned instead of
the tyre pressure value.
Tyre pressure currently unavail- The tyre pressure monitor* is temporarily X Drive on.
monitor able deactivated. The voltage of the vehicle's Once the causes have been eliminated, the tyre
electrical system is too low or radio inter- pressure monitor* automatically reactivates
ference prevents the reception of sensor after a few minutes of driving.
signals.
* optional
263
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 264

Practical advice
Display messages
Tyre pressure Check tyres G Risk of accident X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden
steering or braking manoeuvres. Pay attention
The tyre pressure loss warning system has
to the traffic conditions as you do so.
detected a significant pressure loss.
X Check the tyres.
X Check the tyre pressure and correct it if nec-
essary (Y page 229).
X Repair or change the faulty wheel as necessary
(Y page 317).
X Then restart the tyre pressure loss warning
system once the tyre pressure is correct
(Y page 230).
Run Flat Indi- inoperative The tyre pressure loss warning system is X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
cator deactivated due to a malfunction.
Check tyres, then restart Run There was a tyre pressure warning mes- X Make sure that the pressure set is correct for
Flat Indicator sage. all tyres (Y page 229).
X Then restart the tyre pressure loss warning
system (Y page 230).
HOLD off HOLD has been deactivated. The vehicle X Reactivate HOLD later.
is skidding or a condition for activating
SBC HOLD is no longer met when the
brake pedal is firmly depressed.
264
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 265

Practical advice
Display messages
HOLD cannot be activa- A condition for activating HOLD has not Check the conditions for activating HOLD
ted See Owner's been met. (Y page 155).
Manual X Close the bonnet.
X Close the driver's door.

X Start the engine.
X Release the parking brake.
X Switch off all consumers that are not required.
HOLD can be reactivated as soon as the on-
board voltage is sufficient.
HOLD inoperative See A malfunction has occurred. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Owner's Manual
Cruise control inoperative Speedtronic and cruise control or Dis- X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
and SPEEDTRONIC tronic* are not operational.
SRS Restraint system G Risk of injury X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immedi-
malfunction Con- ately.
The restraint systems are faulty.
sult workshop
Cruise control - - - A condition for activating cruise control X Activate ESP® (Y page 60)
has not been met. X If conditions permit, drive faster than
30 km/h and store the speed (Y page 143).
* optional
265
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 266

Practical advice
Display messages
Symbol messages

# The battery is not being charged. Possible

causes are:
X Stop immediately and safely when traffic con-
ditions allow and check the poly-V-belt.
Ra faulty alternator X If it has torn: do not drive on. Contact the
Ra torn poly-V-belt nearest qualified specialist workshop.
Ra malfunction in the electronics X If it is not damaged: have the vehicle checked
as soon as possible at a qualified specialist
workshop.
& Estate: the tailgate is open. X Close the tailgate.
Ê Saloon: the boot lid is open. X Close the boot lid.
266
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 267

Practical advice
Display messages
Y G Risk of accident X Stop the vehicle. Pay attention to the traffic

conditions as you do so.
Vehicles with an anti-theft alarm sys-
tem*: you are driving with the bonnet X Close the bonnet.
open.
V At least one door is open. The display

symbol shows you which doors are open.
X Close the doors.
D The cooling fan for the coolant is faulty. X If the coolant temperature is less than 120 †,
you can continue driving to the nearest quali-
fied specialist workshop.
X In doing so, avoid heavy loads on the engine
(e.g. driving in mountainous terrain) and stop-
and-go driving.
@ Vehicle rising Vehicles with AIRMATIC Dual Control*:

your vehicle is adjusting to the level you
have selected.
@ Vehicle rising
Please wait
Vehicles with AIRMATIC Dual Control*:
the vehicle level is too low when the vehi-
X Do not pull away.
X Wait until the display message disappears.
cle is stationary.
The vehicle has reached the level required for
driving.
* optional
267
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 268

Practical advice
Display messages
@ STOP Car too low G Risk of accident ! Avoid large steering angles, otherwise the
wing or the tyres could be damaged when you
AIRMATIC Dual Control* is faulty. drive on. Listen for scraping sounds.
X Do not exceed a maximum speed of 80 km/h.
X Pull over and select a higher vehicle level.
The vehicle may be raised, depending on the
type of fault.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immedi-
ately.
@ Malfunction The AIRMATIC Dual Control* function is

restricted. The vehicle's handling charac-
X Do not exceed a maximum speed of 80 km/h.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
teristics may be affected.
\ Trailer tow hitch

Check lock mecha-
The trailer tow hitch* is not correctly
engaged.
X Stop the vehicle. Pay attention to the traffic
nism X Allow the ball coupling to engage in the end
position (Y page 239).
2 Brake wear The brake pads/linings have reached

their wear limit.
X Have the brake pads/linings replaced as soon
as possible at a qualified specialist workshop.
* optional
268
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 269

Practical advice
Display messages
3 Brake immediately A malfunction occurred with HOLD acti-

vated.
X Immediately depress the brake pedal firmly
until the warning message in the multi-function
or display disappears.
Vehicles with manual transmission: with X Prevent the vehicle from rolling away before
HOLD activated, you have either: you leave it (Y page 113).
Ropened the driver’s door and released The engine can be started again.
the seat belt or
Rswitched off the engine or
Ropened the bonnet
The horn may also sound at regular inter-
vals. The horn becomes louder if you
attempt to lock the vehicle.
The engine cannot be started.
3 EBV, ABS, ESP inop- G Risk of accident

erative See Own-
X Drive on carefully.
EBV, ABS and ESP® are unavailable due to X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immedi-
er's Manual ately.
a malfunction. BAS has also been deacti-
vated. PRE-SAFE® is therefore also not
operational.
269
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 270

Practical advice
Display messages
3 Check brake fluid

level
G Risk of accident X Pull over as soon as it is safe to do so.
There is insufficient brake fluid in the X Do not continue driving under any circumstan-
brake fluid reservoir. ces.
X Consult the nearest qualified specialist work-
shop.
X Do not top up the brake fluid. This will not rec-
tify the malfunction.
! Release parking
brake
You are driving with the parking brake
applied.
X Release the parking brake.
? Rear left backrest

not locked
The left or right rear seat backrest is not
engaged.
X Fully engage the rear seat backrest
(Y page 198).
or
Rear right back-
rest not locked
[ Clean fuel filter X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
270
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 271

Practical advice
Display messages
D Coolant Stop vehi-

cle, turn engine
The coolant is too hot. X Stop the vehicle. Pay attention to the traffic
off X Switch off the engine.
X Wait until the display message disappears
before restarting the engine. There is other-
wise a risk of engine damage.
X Observe the coolant temperature gauge.
X If the temperature increases again, visit a quali-
fied specialist workshop immediately.
D Coolant Stop vehi-

cle, turn engine
The poly-V-belt may have torn. X Stop the vehicle. Pay attention to the traffic
off X Switch off the engine.
X Check the poly-V-belt.
X If it is not damaged: do not start the engine
again until the display message goes out. There
is otherwise a risk of engine damage.
X If it has torn: do not drive on. Contact the
nearest qualified specialist workshop.
271
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 272

Practical advice
Display messages
B Top up coolant See

Owner's Manual
The coolant level is too low. X Top up the coolant, observing the warning
notes before doing so (Y page 225).
X Have the coolant system checked at a qualified
specialist workshop if the coolant needs top-
ping up more often than usual.
. Left-hand corner-
ing light
The left-hand and/or right-hand cornering
lamp* is faulty.
or
Right-hand corner-
ing light
. Dipped beam, left

or
The right-hand or left-hand dipped-beam
headlamp is faulty.
X Halogen headlamp: replace the bulb
(Y page 311).
Dipped beam, right X Bi-xenon headlamp*: visit a qualified special-
ist workshop.
. Left-hand trailer
turn signal
The left-hand or right-hand trailer turn sig-
nal is faulty.
X Replace the bulb.
or
Right-hand trailer
turn signal
. Trailer brake lamp The trailer brake lamp is faulty. X Replace the bulb.
* optional
272
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 273

Practical advice
Display messages
. Trailer Left-hand
tail lamp
The left-hand or right-hand trailer tail lamp
is faulty.
X Replace the bulb.
or
Trailer Right-hand
tail lamp
. AUTO lights inop-

erative
The light sensor is faulty. Constant head-
lamp mode is switched on.
X Switch the lights to manual control in the on-
board computer (Y page 135).
X Switch the lights on and off using the light
switch.
. Rear left turn sig- The rear left-hand or rear right-hand turn
nal Back-up bulb on signal is faulty.
or
Rear right turn
signal Back-up
bulb on
. Turn signal in
left-hand mirror
The turn signal lamp on the left-hand or
right-hand exterior mirror is faulty. This
or display message will only appear if all

Turn signal in LEDs have failed.
right-hand mirror
273
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 274

Practical advice
Display messages
. Front left turn

signal Back-up
The front left-hand or right-hand turn sig-
nal is faulty.
X Replace the bulb (Y page 311).
bulb on
or
Front right turn
signal Back-up
bulb on
. 3rd brake lamp The third brake lamp is faulty. This display
message will only appear if all LEDs have
failed.
. Left brake-/tail
lamp Back-up bulb
The left-hand or right-hand rear brake
lamp is faulty. This display message will
on only appear if all LEDs have failed.*

or
Right brake-/tail
lamp Back-up bulb
on
. Main beam, left

or
The left-hand or right-hand main-beam
headlamp is faulty.
Main beam, right
. Intell. Light Sys-

tem inoperative
The Intelligent Light System* is faulty. The
lights remain available without the Intelli-
gent Light System*.
* optional
274
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 275

Practical advice
Display messages
. Left-hand licence
plate lamp
The left-hand or right-hand licence plate
lamp is faulty.
or
Right-hand licence
plate lamp
. Switch off lights You did not switch off the lights when
leaving the vehicle.
X Turn the light switch to M or U.
or
X If the rear foglamp is switched on: press the
light switch in to the stop.
. Front left-hand
foglamp
The front left-hand or right-hand foglamp
is faulty.
or
Front right-hand
foglamp
. Rear left-hand
foglamp
The left-hand or right-hand rear foglamp is
faulty.
or
Rear right-hand
foglamp
275
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 276

Practical advice
Display messages
. Front left-hand
parking lamp Back-
The front left-hand or right-hand parking
lamp is faulty.
X Halogen headlamp: replace the bulb
(Y page 311).
up bulb on X Bi-xenon headlamp*: visit a qualified special-
or ist workshop.
Front right-hand
parking lamp Back-
up bulb on
. Left-hand revers-
ing lamp
The left-hand or right-hand reversing lamp
is faulty.
or
Right-hand revers-
ing lamp
. Left-hand tail
lamp Back-up bulb
The left-hand or right-hand tail lamp is
faulty.
on
or
Right-hand tail
lamp Back-up bulb
on
ò Replace air
cleaner
The engine air filter must be replaced. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
* optional
276
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 277

Practical advice
Display messages
N Check engine oil

level when next
The engine oil level has dropped to a crit-
ical level.
X Check the engine oil level (Y page 223) and top
up the engine oil if necessary.
refuelling X Have the engine checked for leaks if the engine
oil needs topping up more often than usual.
N Add 1 litre engine The engine oil level is too low.

oil when next refu-
X Check the engine oil level (Y page 223) and top
up the engine oil if necessary.
elling X Have the engine checked for leaks if the engine
oil needs topping up more often than usual.
N Engine oil level

Stop vehicle, turn
There is insufficient oil in the engine.
There is a danger of engine damage.
engine off X Switch off the engine.
X Top up the engine oil and check the level
(Y page 223).
N Engine oil level

Reduce oil level
You have added too much engine oil.
There is a risk of damaging the engine or
X Siphon off excess engine oil until it is at the
specified level. Observe the legal require-
catalytic converter. ments.
N Cannot measure
engine oil level
The measuring system is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
277
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 278

Practical advice
Display messages
± Display malfunc-
tion Consult work-
One or more electronic systems are
unable to deliver information to the on-
shop board computer. The following systems

may have failed:
RCoolant temperature gauge
RRev counter
RCruise control or Speedtronic display
H Tyre pressure Cau-

tion Tyre defect
G Risk of accident X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden
One or more tyres is losing air rapidly. The
to the traffic conditions as you do so.
affected wheel is highlighted in the tyre
pressure display of the tyre pressure mon- X Repair or change the tyre (Y page 317).
itor*.
* optional
278
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 279

Practical advice
Display messages
H Tyre pressure
Check tyres
The pressure in one or more tyres has
dropped significantly. The affected wheel
X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden
is highlighted in the tyre pressure display to the traffic conditions as you do so.
of the tyre pressure monitor*. X Check the tyres.
X Repair or change the faulty tyre if necessary
(Y page 317).
X Check the tyre pressure and correct it if nec-
essary (Y page 229).
The warning will disappear automatically after
you have been driving for a few minutes with
the corrected tyre pressure.
I Change key batter-

ies
The batteries of the KEYLESS GO key* are
discharged.
X Change the batteries (Y page 310).
I Key not detected The KEYLESS GO key* is not in the vehicle. X Stop the vehicle. Pay attention to the traffic
It will no longer be possible to centrally
lock the vehicle and start the engine if the X Look for the KEYLESS GO key*.
engine is switched off.
I Key not detected The KEYLESS GO* key is not detected

while the engine is running, because there
is interference from a strong source of X Operate the vehicle using the key in the ignition
radio waves. lock if necessary.
Z
* optional
279
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 280

Practical advice
Display messages
I Key not detected The KEYLESS GO key* cannot be detected

at present.
X Change the location of the KEYLESS GO key*
within the vehicle.
X Operate the vehicle using the key in the ignition
lock if necessary.
I Key still in vehi-

cle
The KEYLESS GO key* was detected
inside the vehicle during locking.
X Remove the KEYLESS GO key* from the vehi-
cle.
I Please replace key The key no longer functions. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
X inoperative Bat-
tery weak
The battery voltage is insufficient. The
auxiliary heating/ventilation* has
X Drive for a longer distance.
The battery is being charged. The auxiliary
switched off or cannot be switched on. heating/ventilation* is reactivated as soon as
there is sufficient battery voltage.
X inoperative Refuel There is insufficient fuel in the fuel tank.

The auxiliary heating* cannot be switched
X Refuel at the nearest filling station.
on.
X inoperative See
Owner's Manual
The auxiliary heating* has a temporary
malfunction or is faulty.
X When the vehicle is on a level surface and the
engine has cooled down: try to switch on the
auxiliary heating* four times, waiting for sev-
eral minutes between each attempt.
X If the auxiliary heating* does not switch on:
visit a qualified specialist workshop.
* optional
280
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 281

Practical advice
Display messages
¿ There is only a small amount of fuel in the

fuel tank.
W Reserve fuel level The fuel level has fallen below the reserve
range. The operation of the auxiliary heat-
ing* can no longer be guaranteed.
t Enter PIN: You have not yet logged on to your mobile

phone*.
X Enter the PIN for the SIM card.
t Bluetooth ready The Bluetooth connection between your

mobile phone and the audio system or
X The Bluetooth connection between your
mobile phone and the audio system or
COMAND APS* is not activated. COMAND APS* is not activated, see separate
operating instructions.
t No telephone
inserted
Your mobile phone is not inserted in the
bracket*.
X Insert mobile phone into the bracket*
(Y page 211).
W Top up washer fluid The washer fluid level in the washer fluid
reservoir has dropped below the mini-
X Top up the washer fluid (Y page 226).
mum.
* optional
281
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 282

Practical advice
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
Points to remember

Indicator and warning lamps in switches and buttons
Problem Possible cause/consequence Suggested solutions
One or all of the indicator lamps There is insufficient voltage X Switch off consumers that are not required, e.g. reading lamps,
in the seat ventilation* button are because too many consumers are interior lighting, etc.
flashing. switched on. The seat ventila- The seat ventilation* will automatically switch back on as soon as
tion* has switched itself off auto- there is sufficient voltage again.
matically.
One or all of the indicator lamps There is insufficient voltage X Switch off consumers that are not required, e.g. reading lamps,
in the seat heating* button are because too many consumers are interior lighting, etc.
flashing. switched on. The seat heating* The seat heating* will automatically switch back on as soon as
has switched itself off automati- there is sufficient voltage again.
cally.
* optional
282
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 283

Practical advice
Troubleshooting
The steering wheel heating* indi- There is insufficient voltage X Switch off consumers that are not required, e.g. reading lamps,
cator lamp on the lower left lever because too many consumers are interior lighting, etc.
of the steering column is flashing. switched on. The steering wheel The steering wheel heating* will automatically switch back on as
heating* has switched itself off soon as there is sufficient voltage again.
automatically.
The indicator lamp in the 2 Cooling has been deactivated X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
button on the Thermatic/4-zone due to a malfunction.
Thermotronic* control panel
flashes three times when you
press the button. The cooling sys-
tem cannot be switched on.
The indicator lamp in the ¯ There is insufficient voltage X Switch off consumers that are not required, e.g. reading lamps,
rear-window heating button is because too many consumers are interior lighting, etc.
flashing. The rear-window heat- switched on. The rear-window heating will automatically switch back on as soon
ing has switched itself off prema- as there is sufficient voltage again.
turely or cannot be switched on.
Vehicles with automatic child A special Mercedes-Benz child

seat recognition on the front- seat with automatic child seat
passenger seat*: recognition has been fitted to the
The 5 PASSENGER AIRBAG front-passenger seat. The front-
OFF warning lamp on the centre passenger airbag has therefore
console is lit. been disabled.
* optional
283
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 284

Practical advice
Troubleshooting
Vehicles with automatic child G Risk of injury X Remove electronic equipment from the front-passenger seat, e.g.:
seat recognition on the front- RNotebooks
There is no child seat fitted to the
passenger seat*:
front-passenger seat. The auto- RMobile phones
The 5 PASSENGER AIRBAG matic child seat recognition* is RCards with transponders, e.g. ski passes or access passes
OFF warning lamp on the centre malfunctioning.
console is lit. If the 5 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF warning lamp is still lit:
* optional
284
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 285

Practical advice
Troubleshooting
Indicator and warning lamps in the instrument cluster

- The yellow ABS warning G Risk of accident X Drive on carefully.
lamp comes on while the X Observe the additional messages in the multi-function display
ABS is unavailable due to a mal-
engine is running. (Y page 257).
function. Therefore, Brake Assist,
ESP®, EBV and PRE-SAFE® are, X Visit a qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible.
for example, also deactivated.
The brake system continues to
function normally, but without
electronic support. The wheels
could therefore lock if you brake
hard, for example.
v The yellow ESP® warning G Risk of accident X Reactivate ESP® (Y page 60).
lamp is lit while the engine Exceptions: (Y page 60).
ESP® is deactivated. ESP® will
is running.
not stabilise the vehicle if it starts X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.
to skid or if a wheel starts to spin.
v The yellow ESP® warning G Risk of accident X Observe the additional messages in the multi-function display
lamp is lit while the engine (Y page 258).
ESP® is unavailable due to a mal-
is running. X Drive on carefully.
function. ESP® will not stabilise
the vehicle if it starts to skid or if X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
a wheel starts to spin.
285
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 286

Practical advice
Troubleshooting
v The yellow ESP® warning G Risk of accident X Only depress the accelerator pedal as far as necessary when pull-
lamp flashes while the ing away.
ESP® or traction control has
vehicle is in motion. X Release the accelerator pedal while you are driving.
intervened because at least one
wheel has started to spin. X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.
Cruise control or Distronic* is X Do not deactivate ESP®. Exceptions: (Y page 60).
deactivated.
3 The red brake system You are driving with the parking X Release the parking brake.
warning lamp comes on brake applied. The warning lamp goes out and the warning tone ceases.
while you are driving. You
will also hear a warning
tone.
3 The red brake system G Risk of accident X Do not continue driving under any circumstances.
warning lamp comes on X Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
There is insufficient brake fluid in
while the engine is run-
the fluid reservoir. X Observe the additional messages in the multi-function display
ning. You will also hear a
warning tone. (Y page 257).
X Under no circumstances should you top up the brake fluid. This will
not rectify the fault.
l The red distance warning G Risk of accident X Increase the distance.

lamp* lights up while the
The distance to the vehicle in
vehicle is in motion.
front is too short for the speed
selected.
* optional
286
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 287

Practical advice
Troubleshooting
l The red distance warning G Risk of accident X Be prepared to brake immediately.

lamp* lights up while the X Pay careful attention to the traffic situation. You may have to brake
You are approaching a vehicle in
vehicle is in motion. You or take evasive action.
front at too great a speed or Dis-
will also hear a warning
tronic* has detected a stationary
tone.
obstacle in your line of travel.
D The red coolant warning There is insufficient coolant in the X Stop the vehicle as soon as possible. Pay attention to the traffic
lamp comes on while the expansion tank. conditions as you do so.
engine is running. The coolant is too hot and the X Allow the engine and coolant to cool.
engine is no longer being cooled
X Check the coolant level. Observe the warning notes
sufficiently.
(Y page 225). Top up the coolant if necessary.
X Have the coolant system checked at a qualified specialist work-
shop if the coolant needs topping up more often than usual.
D The red coolant warning If the coolant level is correct, the X If the coolant temperature is less than 120 †, you can continue
lamp comes on while the radiator fan may be faulty. driving to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.
engine is running. The coolant is too hot and the X In doing so, avoid heavy loads on the engine (e.g. driving in moun-
engine is no longer being cooled tainous terrain) and stop-and-go driving.
sufficiently.
* optional
287
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 288

Practical advice
Troubleshooting
D The red coolant warning The coolant level is too low. X Stop the vehicle as soon as possible. Pay attention to the traffic
lamp comes on while the The coolant temperature has conditions as you do so.
engine is running. You will exceeded 120 †. The engine is X Allow the engine and coolant to cool.
also hear a warning tone. not being cooled sufficiently and
X Check the coolant level. Observe the warning notes
may be damaged.
(Y page 225). Top up the coolant if necessary.
X Have the coolant system checked at a qualified specialist work-
shop if the coolant needs topping up more often than usual.
D The red coolant warning If the coolant level is correct, the X Do not continue driving under any circumstances.
lamp comes on while the radiator fan may be faulty. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
engine is running. You will The coolant temperature has
also hear a warning tone. exceeded 120 †. The engine is
not being cooled sufficiently and
may be damaged.
± The yellow engine diagnos- Vehicles with a diesel engine: the X Start the engine three to four times after refuelling.
tics warning lamp comes fuel tank has run dry. Emergency running mode is cancelled. The vehicle need not be
on while the engine is run- checked.
ning.
288
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 289

Practical advice
Troubleshooting
± The yellow engine diagnos- There may be a malfunction: X Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at a qualified spe-
tics warning lamp comes Rin the fuel injection system cialist workshop.
on while the engine is run-
Rin the exhaust system
ning.
Rin the ignition system (on vehi-
cles with a petrol engine)
The emission limit values may be
exceeded and the engine may be
running in emergency mode.
H The yellow tyre pressure G Risk of accident X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking
monitor* warning lamp is manoeuvres. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.
The tyre pressure monitor* has
on. X Observe the additional messages in the multi-function display
detected a sudden or significant
pressure loss in at least one of (Y page 257).
the tyres. The warning light will go out after the flat tyre has been changed
and you have been driving for a few minutes.
1 The red SRS warning lamp G Risk of injury X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
is lit while the engine is
The restraint systems are faulty.
running.
The airbags or belt tensioners
may either be triggered uninten-
tionally or, in the event of an acci-
dent, not be triggered at all.
* optional
289
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 290

Practical advice
Troubleshooting
< The red seat belt warning The seat belt warning lamp X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 95).
lamp lights up for 6 sec- reminds the driver and front
onds after the engine passenger to fasten their seat
starts up34. belts.
< After the engine starts you G Risk of injury X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 95).
will hear a warning tone for The warning tone ceases.
The driver's seat belt is not fas-
up to 6 seconds34.
tened.
< The red seat belt warning G Risk of injury X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 95).
lamp lights up after start- The warning lamp goes out.
The driver or front passenger has
ing the engine, as soon as
not fastened their seat belt.
the driver's door or the
front-passenger door is Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow them
G Risk of injury X
closed. safely.
There are objects on the front-
passenger seat. The warning lamp goes out.
290
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 291

Practical advice
Troubleshooting
< The red seat belt warning G Risk of injury X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 95).
lamp flashes and you hear The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone
an intermittent warning ceases.
not fastened their seat belt and
tone.
you are driving faster than
25 km/h or have driven faster
than 25 km/h for a short time.
G Risk of injury X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow them
safely.
There are objects on the front-
passenger seat and you are driv- The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone
ing faster than 25 km/h or have ceases.
driven faster than 25 km/h for a
short time.
W The yellow reserve fuel The fuel level has fallen below the X Refuel at the nearest filling station.
warning lamp comes on reserve range. The operation of
while the engine is run- the auxiliary heating* can no lon-
ning. ger be guaranteed.
* optional
291
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 292

Practical advice
Troubleshooting
Warning tones
The anti-theft warning alarm* is You have opened the vehicle X Switch off the alarm (Y page 62).
triggered. using the emergency key element
without deactivating the anti-
theft alarm system* first.
You hear a warning tone. A message appears in the multi- X See the explanations for the display message (Y page 257).
function display.
You hear a warning tone. You are driving with the parking X Release the parking brake.
brake applied.
You hear a warning tone. You did not switch off the lights X Turn the light switch to M or U.
when leaving the vehicle.
or
X If the rear foglamp is switched on: press the light switch in to the
stop.
You hear a warning tone. G Risk of injury X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 95).
not fastened their seat belt.
You hear a continuous tone. You have switched off the engine X Deactivate HOLD (Y page 155).
and opened the bonnet or the
driver's door with HOLD activa-
ted.
* optional
292
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 293

Practical advice
Troubleshooting
Accident
Fuel is leaking from the vehicle. G Risk of fire X Switch off the ignition immediately.
The fuel line or the fuel tank has XRemove the ignition key.
been damaged. The leaking fuel Do not restart the engine under any circumstances. The leaking fuel
creates a risk of fire or explosion. creates a risk of fire or explosion.
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
You are unable to determine the X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

extent of the damage.
You cannot detect any damage. X Start the engine as normal.
The NECK-PRO head restraints Your vehicle has been involved in X Reset the NECK-PRO head restraints (Y page 309).
on the driver's and front- a rear-end collision.
passenger seats have been trig-
gered.
293
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 294

Practical advice
Troubleshooting
Fuel and fuel tank
Fuel is leaking from the vehicle. G Risk of explosion or fire X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock immediately and
remove it.
The fuel line or the fuel tank is
defective. X Do not restart the engine under any circumstances.
The fuel filler flap cannot be The fuel filler flap is not released. X Unlock the vehicle (Y page 306).
opened.
The opening mechanism is jam- X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
med.
The fuel tank of a vehicle with a There is air in the fuel system. X Refuel the vehicle.
diesel engine has been run com- X Switch on the ignition for approximately 10 seconds (key in posi-
pletely dry. tion 2 in the ignition lock).
X Start the engine continuously for up to 40 seconds until it runs
smoothly.
The fuel system is now free of air.
If the engine does not start:
X Wait two minutes.
X Repeat the starting procedure for up to 40 seconds.

If the engine still does not start:
294
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 295

Practical advice
Troubleshooting
Engine
The engine will not start. HOLD is activated. X Deactivating HOLD (Y page 155).
X Start the engine again.
The engine will not start. You can RThere is a malfunction in the X Turn the key back to position 0 in the ignition lock before the next
hear the starter motor operating. engine electronics. starting attempt.
RThere is a malfunction in the X Try to start the engine again (Y page 110). Avoid excessively long
fuel supply. and frequent attempts to start the engine, as this will drain the
battery.
If the engine does not start after several attempts:
Vehicles with a diesel engine: The fuel tank has been run dry. X Refuel the vehicle.
The engine will not start. You can X Bleed the fuel system (Y page 294).
hear the starter motor operating.
The reserve fuel warning lamp is
on and the fuel gauge shows 0.
The engine will not start. You can- The on-board voltage is too low X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 333).
not hear the starter motor oper- because the starter battery is too If the engine does not start despite attempting to jump-start it:
ating. weak or discharged.
295
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 296

Practical advice
Troubleshooting
Vehicles with a petrol engine: There is a malfunction in the X Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly.
The engine is not running engine electronics or a mechani- X Have the cause rectified immediately at a qualified specialist work-
smoothly and is misfiring. cal component of the engine con- shop.
trol unit.
Otherwise, non-combusted fuel may get into the catalytic converter
and damage it.
A coolant temperature of over The coolant level is too low. The X Stop as soon as possible and allow the engine and the coolant to
120 °C is displayed. The coolant coolant is too hot and the engine cool down.
warning lamp may also be on and is no longer being cooled suffi- X Check the coolant level (Y page 225). Observe the warning notes
a warning tone may sound ciently. as you do so and top up the coolant if necessary.
(Y page 120).
If the coolant level is correct, the X If the coolant temperature is less than 120 °C, you can continue
radiator fan may be faulty. The driving to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.
coolant is too hot and the engine X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving on
is no longer being cooled suffi- mountain roads and stop/start driving.
ciently.
296
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 297

Practical advice
Troubleshooting
Automatic transmission*
The transmission has problems The transmission is losing oil. X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop
shifting gear immediately.
The acceleration ability is deteri- The transmission is in emergency X Stop the vehicle.
orating. mode. X Move the selector lever to P.
The transmission no longer It is only possible to shift into
X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock.
changes gear. 2nd gear and reverse gear.
X Wait at least 10 seconds before restarting the engine.
X Move the selector lever to position D or R.
If D is selected, the transmission shifts into 2nd gear; if R is selec-
ted, the transmission shifts into reverse gear.
X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop
immediately.
* optional
297
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 298

Practical advice
Troubleshooting
Parktronic*
Only the red segments in the Parktronic has malfunctioned X If problems persist, have Parktronic checked at a qualified spe-
Parktronic warning display are lit. and has switched itself off. cialist workshop.
You also hear a warning tone for
approximately two seconds.
Parktronic is deactivated after
approximately 20 seconds and
the indicator lamp in the Park-
tronic button lights up.
Only the red segments in the The Parktronic sensors are dirty X Clean the Parktronic sensors (Y page 248).
Parktronic warning display are lit. or there is interference. X Switch the ignition back on.
Parktronic is deactivated after
Only the red segments in the The problem may be caused by an X See if Parktronic functions in a different location.
Parktronic warning display are lit. external source of radio or ultra-
Parktronic is deactivated after sound waves.
* optional
298
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 299

Practical advice
Troubleshooting
Headlamps and turn signals
The headlamps or the turn signals Air humidity is very high. X Drive with the headlamps switched on.
in the exterior mirrors are misted The headlamps are demisted after a short distance.
up on the inside.
The headlamp housing is not X Have the headlamps checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
sealed and moisture has been
able to enter.
Windscreen wipers
The windscreen wipers are jam- Leaves or snow, for example, may X For safety reasons, you should remove the key from the ignition
med. be obstructing the windscreen lock.
wiper movement. The wiper X Remove the cause of the obstruction.
motor has been deactivated.
X Switch the windscreen wipers back on.
The windscreen wipers fail com- The windscreen wiper drive is X Select another wiper speed on the combination switch.
pletely. malfunctioning. X Have the windscreen wipers checked at a qualified specialist work-
shop.
299
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 300

Practical advice
Troubleshooting
Windows
A side window will not close. An object has become trapped X Remove the object(s).
between the window and the door X Close the side window.
frame.
There are objects in the window X Remove the objects.

guide rail which are preventing X Close the side window.
the window from being raised.
You cannot see the cause. X Close the side window with increased force or without the anti-
entrapment feature (Y page 108).
Mirrors
An exterior mirror has been Vehicles with exterior mirrors that cannot be folded in/out electri-
pushed out of position. cally:
X Push the mirror into the correct position manually.
Vehicles with electrically folding exterior mirrors*:

X Press the mirror-folding button* (Y page 91) repeatedly until you
hear a distinct click.
The mirror housing is engaged again and you can adjust the mirror
as usual (Y page 91).
* optional
300
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 301

Practical advice
Troubleshooting
Key
You cannot lock or unlock the The key batteries are discharged X To do this, point the tip of the key at the driver's door handle from
vehicle using the key. or nearly discharged. close range and try to unlock or lock the vehicle again.
If this does not work:
X Lock or unlock the vehicle using the emergency key element
(Y page 306).
X Check the key batteries (Y page 310) and replace them if neces-
sary (Y page 310).
The key is faulty. X Lock or unlock the vehicle using the emergency key element
(Y page 306).
X Have the key checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
The battery charge indicator lamp The key batteries are discharged. X Change the batteries (Y page 310).
of the key does not go on during
the test.
You have lost a key. X Have the key cancelled at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.
X If necessary, have the manual locks changed too.
You have lost the emergency key X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.
element. X If necessary, have the manual locks changed too.
Z
301
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 302

Practical advice
Troubleshooting
The key cannot be turned in the The key has been in position 0 for X Remove the key and reinsert it into the ignition lock.
ignition lock. a considerable time. X Check the starter battery and recharge it if necessary
(Y page 329).
X Start the engine.
The on-board voltage is too low. X Switch off non-essential consumers, e.g. seat heating* or interior
lighting, and try to turn the key again.
X Check the starter battery and recharge it if necessary
(Y page 329).
or
X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 333).
or
* optional
302
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 303

Practical advice
Troubleshooting
KEYLESS GO*
You cannot lock or unlock the The KEYLESS GO key batteries X Lock or unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of the
vehicle using the KEYLESS GO are discharged or nearly dis- key. To do this, point the tip of the key at the driver's door handle
key. charged. from close range and try to unlock or lock the vehicle again.
X Lock or unlock the vehicle using the emergency key element
(Y page 306).
X Check the KEYLESS GO key batteries (Y page 310) and replace
them if necessary (Y page 310).
There is a fault with KEYLESS GO. X Lock or unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of the
key. To do this, point the tip of the key at the driver's door handle
from close range and try to open the vehicle again.
X Have the KEYLESS GO key checked at a qualified specialist work-
shop.
There is interference from a pow- X Lock or unlock the vehicle using the emergency key element
erful source of radio waves. (Y page 306).
The battery check lamp in the The KEYLESS GO key batteries X Change the batteries (Y page 310).
KEYLESS GO key does not light are discharged.
up when tested.
* optional
303
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 304

Practical advice
Troubleshooting
The vehicle cannot be started A door is open. The key therefore X Close the door and try to start the vehicle again.
using the KEYLESS GO key and cannot be detected so easily.
the KEYLESS GO button. The KEY-
LESS GO key is in the vehicle. You did not depress the brake X Depress the brake and press the KEYLESS GO button.
when starting the engine.
There is interference from a pow- X Start your vehicle using the KEYLESS GO key in the ignition lock.
erful source of radio waves.
You have lost the KEYLESS GO X Have the KEYLESS GO key cancelled at a Mercedes-Benz Service
key. Centre.
X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.
X If necessary, have the manual locks changed too.
Auxiliary heating*
The auxiliary heating is not work- The fuel level is down to the X Refuel at the nearest filling station.
ing. reserve level.
The battery is not sufficiently X Charge the battery.

charged.
The auxiliary heating is faulty. X Have the auxiliary heating checked at a qualified specialist work-
shop.
* optional
304
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 305

Practical advice
Troubleshooting
The auxiliary heating cannot be The remote control display shows X Change your position in relation to the vehicle, moving closer if
switched on or off using the FAIL and the ¢ symbol. necessary.
remote control. The signal transmission between X Make another attempt to switch the auxiliary heating on or off using
the remote control and the vehi- the remote control.
cle is faulty.
The remote control display shows X Refuel at the nearest filling station.
FAIL and the ¡ symbol. X Have the auxiliary heating checked at a qualified specialist work-
There is not enough fuel in the shop.
tank, or the auxiliary heating is
faulty.
Parking up the vehicle
The vehicle is to be left parked up Damage resulting from non-use X Visit a qualified specialist workshop and seek advice.
for longer than six weeks. may occur if the vehicle is parked X Disconnect the battery (Y page 331).
up for long periods.
305
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 306

Practical advice
Locking/unlocking in an emergency
Locking/unlocking in an emergency Releasing and removing the emergency Unlocking the vehicle
key element
Emergency key If the vehicle can no longer be unlocked cen-
trally with the key or the KEYLESS GO key*:
If the vehicle can no longer be unlocked or
X Remove the emergency key element from
locked with the key or the KEYLESS GO
key*, use the emergency key element. the key (Y page 306).
If you use the emergency key element to
unlock and open the driver's door or the boot
lid (Saloon), the anti-theft alarm system* will
be triggered (Y page 62).
There are several ways to turn off the alarm:
X Press the k or j button on the key.
or 1 Release catch
X Insert the key into the ignition lock. 2 Emergency key element
or X Push release catch 1 in the direction of

X Press the KEYLESS GO button* on the the arrow and at the same time remove $ To unlock
selector lever. The KEYLESS GO key* must emergency key element 2 from the key.
be in the vehicle. X Insert the emergency key element into the
lock of the driver's door as far as it will go.
or
X Lock or unlock the vehicle using KEYLESS
X Turn the emergency key element anti-
clockwise to position $.
GO*. The KEYLESS GO key* must be out-
side the vehicle. The door is unlocked.
i On right-hand-drive vehicles, turn the

emergency key element clockwise.
X Turn the emergency key element back and
remove it.
* optional
306
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 307

Practical advice
Locking the vehicle X Insert the emergency key element into the
lock of the driver's door as far as it will go.
If the vehicle can no longer be locked cen-
trally with the key or the KEYLESS GO key*: X Turn the emergency key element clockwise
as far as it will go to position $.
X Open the driver's door.
X Close the front-passenger door, the rear i On right-hand-drive vehicles, turn the
doors and the boot lid/tailgate. emergency key element anti-clockwise.
X Press the locking button (Y page 70). X Turn the emergency key element back and
X Check whether the locking knobs on the remove it.
doors are still visible. Press the locking X Check whether the doors and the boot lid/
knobs down manually if necessary. tailgate are locked. Boot lock
$ To unlock the boot
Remove the emergency key element from X Insert the emergency key element fully into
X Opening/closing the boot
the key (Y page 306). the boot lock.
To unlock the boot X Turn the emergency key element anti-
clockwise as far as it will go to position
! The boot lid swings upwards when $ and pull the boot lid handle.
opened. Therefore, make sure that there is The boot is unlocked.
enough space above the boot lid.
X Turn the emergency key element back and
If the boot can no longer be unlocked with the remove it.
key or the KEYLESS GO key*:
X Remove the emergency key element from
the key (Y page 306).
$ To lock
Z
* optional
307
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 308

Practical advice
Opening the boot manually (remote Opening the tailgate
boot lid closing feature*)
If the tailgate cannot be opened, use the
emergency release on the inside of the tail-
gate.
i On vehicles with a folding bench seat*
you can use the handle to open the tailgate
from the inside (Y page 72).
To close the boot lid

1 Recess
To open the boot lid X Pull the boot lid down using recess 1.
1 Handle
X If necessary, close the boot lid from the
X Lift the boot lid by handle 1. outside by pushing down the edge.
Closing the boot manually (remote boot

lid closing feature*) 1 Release catch
2 Release catch cover
G Risk of injury
Make sure that nobody can become trap- ! The tailgate swings upwards and to the
ped as you close the boot lid. rear when opened. Therefore, make sure
that there is sufficient clearance above and
i Do not leave the key in the boot. You behind the tailgate.
could otherwise lock yourself out.
* optional
308
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 309

Practical advice
Resetting triggered NECK-PRO head restraints

X Pull cover 2 off the tailgate trim. X Hold the cover open at an angle of approx- Resetting triggered NECK-PRO head
X Push release catch 1 to the left as far as imately 45 °. restraints
the stop and open the tailgate. X Insert a screwdriver or similar imple-
ment 1 into the opening. If the NECK-PRO head restraints are triggered
in an accident, you must reset the head
X Press implement 1 downwards and simul- restraints on the driver's and front-passenger
Releasing the parking lock manually taneously move the selector lever out of seats. Otherwise, the additional protection
In the event of an electrical fault, it is possible position P. will not be available in the event of another
to release the selector lever lock manually to X Remove implement 1. rear-end collision. You can recognise when
move it out of position P, e.g. if you wish to head restraints have been triggered by the
The selector lever can now be moved freely
tow the vehicle away. fact that they have moved forwards and can
until it is returned to position P.
no longer be adjusted.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have
NECK-PRO head restraints checked at a quali-
fied specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-
Benz Service Centre, following a rear-end
collision.
i If you have problems resetting the head
restraints, have this work carried out at a
qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
Releasing the parking lock manually
1 Screwdriver or similar implement
X Open the stowage compartment in the

centre console.
X Remove cup holder*.
Z
* optional
309
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 310

Practical advice
Changing the batteries

Changing the batteries Key or KEYLESS GO key*
Notes
Checking the batteries
It is advisable to have the batteries replaced
at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. at a X Press the j or k button.
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. The batteries are in order if the battery
charge indicator lamp lights up briefly.
G Risk of poisoning
Batteries contain toxic and caustic sub-
stances. For this reason, keep batteries Changing the batteries
away from children. You require two CR 2025 3 V cell batteries.
1 Resetting tool If a battery is swallowed, consult a doctor X Remove the emergency key element from
2 To press back head restraint cushion immediately. the key (Y page 306).
3 Guide
X Take resetting tool 1 out of the glove com- Do not dispose of batteries with the house-
partment. hold rubbish. They contain highly toxic sub-
X Insert resetting tool 1 into guide 3 stances.
between the head restraint cushion and the Take discharged batteries to a qualified
rear head restraint cover. specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz
X Press resetting tool 1 downwards until Service Centre, or to a special collection
point for old batteries.
you hear the head restraint deployment
mechanism engage.
X Pull out resetting tool 1.
1 Emergency key element
X Firmly press back head restraint cushion
2 until it engages. 2 Battery tray
X Repeat this procedure for the second head

restraint.
* optional
310
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 311

Practical advice
Changing the bulbs

X Insert emergency key element 1 into the Auxiliary heating* remote control Changing the bulbs
opening in the key and push in the direction
of the arrow. One 6V pin battery, type 2CR11108 is Notes on changing bulbs
required.
Battery tray 2 is released. Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect of
X Pull battery tray 2 out of the key. vehicle safety. You must therefore make sure
that all bulbs function correctly at all times.
G Risk of injury
Bulbs and lamps can be very hot. You
should therefore allow them to cool down
before you change them. Otherwise, you
could be burned if you touch them.
Keep bulbs out of the reach of children.
Otherwise, they could damage them, for
example, and injure themselves.
1 Battery
Never use a bulb which has been dropped.
2 Battery cover Such a bulb may explode and injure you.
1 Batteries H7 bulbs are pressurised and could explode
X Prise apart the side arms of battery cover
2 and slide off battery cover 2. when you change them, particularly if they
X Remove old batteries 1 from the battery
are very hot. You should therefore wear eye
tray. X Remove old battery 1. protection and gloves when you are chang-
X Insert the new batteries beneath the con- X Insert the new battery. Observe the polarity ing them.
tact spring with the positive terminal facing signs on the back of the remote control
upwards. Use a lint-free cloth to do so. when doing so. G Risk of injury
X Push the battery tray back into the key Xenon bulbs are under high voltage. You
X Slide battery cover 2 back onto the
housing until the battery tray engages. could get an electric shock and be seriously
remote control.
or even fatally injured if you touch the elec-
X Check the function of all key buttons on the X Use the remote control to check the vehi- tric contacts on xenon bulbs. Do not, there-
vehicle. cle's auxiliary heating functions. fore, remove the cover on xenon bulbs. Z
* optional
311
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 312

Practical advice
Changing the bulbs

Do not change xenon bulbs yourself, but ! Do not change the LEDs yourself. You
have them replaced at a qualified specialist could otherwise damage the LEDs or parts
workshop which has the necessary special- of the vehicle.
ist knowledge and tools to carry out the
work required.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use Overview
purpose. In particular, work relevant to
safety or on safety-related systems must be
carried out at a qualified specialist work-
shop.
G Risk of injury
HiP bulbs are pressurised and may explode
when you change them, thereby injuring
you.
Do not change HiP bulbs yourself; have
them replaced at a qualified specialist
workshop which has the necessary special- Estate
ist knowledge and tools to carry out the
work required.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use
safety or on safety-related systems must be Saloon
shop.
312
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 313

Practical advice
Changing the bulbs

Front bulbs Rear bulbs Before changing bulbs
Bulb Type Bulb Type You can replace the following bulbs:
RDipped-beam headlamps (vehicles with
1 Additional turn LEDs35 6 Third brake LED35 halogen headlamps)
signal lamp lamp
RMain-beam headlamp
2 Turn signal lamp PY 21 W 7 Rear foglamp HiP35 RReplacing the bulb in the side lamp/park-
ing lamp (vehicles with halogen headlamps)
3 Dipped-beam H7 55 W36 Side lamp/park- HiP35
RTurn signal lamp (front)
headlamp or ing lamp
RLicence plate lamp
D1S 35 W*37 Reversing lamp HiP35
Observe the following points:
4 Main-beam H7 55 W Brake lamp HiP35 RUse only the bulb types specified here.
headlamp
or RTo prevent a short-circuit, switch off the
Side lamp/park- W 5 W LED*35 lights before changing a bulb.
ing lamp or ROnly hold bulbs with a clean, lint-free cloth.
Turn signal lamp HiP35
LED*35 RDo not work with wet or greasy fingers.
8 Licence plate C5W RIf
5 Front foglamp H11 55 W35 the new bulb still does not light up, con-
lamp
sult a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
i Have the headlamp setting checked reg-

ularly at a qualified specialist workshop,
e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
35 These bulbs must be replaced at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
36 Vehicles Z
with halogen headlamps.
37 Vehicles with xenon headlamps*: always have these bulbs changed at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
* optional
313
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 314

Practical advice
Changing the bulbs

Changing the front bulbs X Pull out the bulb holder. X Turn bulb holder 3 anti-clockwise and pull
X Change the bulb. it out.
X Insert the bulb holder into the headlamp X Pull the bulb out of bulb holder 3.
and turn it clockwise until it engages. X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder 3.
X Place housing cover 4 back on and turn it X Insert bulb holder 3 into the headlamp
clockwise until it engages. and turn it clockwise until it engages.
Replacing the bulbs in the main-beam Replacing the bulbs in the turn signal
headlamp lamps
X Switch off the lights. X Switch off the lights.
Halogen or bi-xenon* headlamps X Open the bonnet. X Open the bonnet.
1 Bulb holder for turn signal Turn bulb holder 2 anti-clockwise and
X X Turn bulb holder 1 anti-clockwise and
2 Bulb holder for main-beam headlamp remove it together with the bulb. remove it along with the bulb.
3 Bulb holder for side/parking lamp X Pull the bulb out of bulb holder 2. X Turn the bulb anti-clockwise, applying
4 Housing cover for dipped-beam headlamp slight pressure, and remove it from bulb
(halogen/bi-xenon headlamps)
X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder 2.
holder 1.
X Insert bulb holder 2 into the headlamp
and turn it clockwise until it engages. X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder 1 and
Replacing dipped-beam headlamps turn it clockwise.
(vehicles with halogen headlamps)
Replacing the bulb in the side lamp/ X Insert bulb holder 1 into the headlamp
X Switch off the lights. and turn it clockwise until it engages.
parking lamp (vehicles with halogen
X Open the bonnet. headlamps)
X Turn housing cover 4 anti-clockwise and X Switch off the lights.
remove it.
X Open the bonnet.
X Turn the bulb holder anti-clockwise until it
is released.
* optional
314
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 315

Practical advice
Replacing the wiper blades

Changing the rear bulbs Replacing the wiper blades Removing
Windscreen wiper blades
Changing the bulbs in the licence plate
lamps G Risk of accident
The windscreen will not longer be properly
wiped if the wiper blades are worn. This
could prevent you from observing the traffic
conditions, thereby causing an accident.
Replace the wiper blades twice a year, ide-
ally in spring and autumn.
G Risk of accident
The wiper arms could start moving and
Moving the wiper blades to a vertical posi-
cause an injury if you leave the windscreen
tion
wipers switched on.
Licence plate lamps (Saloon) Remove the key from the ignition lock Vehicles without KEYLESS GO*
1 Screws before replacing the wiper blades. X Make sure that the key is in position 1 or
X Switch off the lights. 2 in the ignition lock.

! Make sure that you touch only the wiper
X Open the boot lid. X Set the windscreen wipers to posi-
arm of the windscreen wiper to avoid dam-
tion u (Y page 106) on the combination
X Remove screws 1. aging the windscreen wiper blades.
switch.
X Remove the licence plate lamp. X When the wiper arms have reached a ver-
X Replace the bulb. tical position, turn the key to position
X Insert the licence plate lamp. M and remove it from the ignition lock.
X Replace and tighten screws 1.
Z
* optional
315
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 316

Practical advice
Replacing the wiper blades

X Fold the wiper arm away from the wind- Removing the wiper blades Rear window wiper blade (Estate)
screen until it engages.
G Risk of injury
X Set the wiper blade at right angles to the
wiper arm. The wiper arm could be set in motion and
injure you if the windscreen wipers are
Vehicles with KEYLESS GO* switched on.
Remove the key from the ignition lock
X Switch off the engine.
before replacing the wiper blade.
X Take your foot off the brake pedal.
X Set the windscreen wipers to posi-
Removing
tion u (Y page 106) on the combination
switch.
X Press the KEYLESS GO button repeatedly X Remove the wiper blade from the retainer
until the windscreen wipers start. on the wiper arm in the direction of the
arrow.
X When the wiper arms have reached a ver-
tical position, press the KEYLESS GO but-
ton. Fitting
X Fold the wiper arm away from the wind- X Slide the new wiper blade into the retainer
screen until it engages. on the wiper arm in the opposite direction
X Set the wiper blade at right angles to the to the arrow.
wiper arm. X Turn the wiper blade parallel to the wiper 1 Wiper blade
arm. 2 Tab
X Fold the wiper arm back onto the wind- 3 Retainer
screen. 4 Removing
* optional
316
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 317

Practical advice
Flat tyre
X Remove the key from the ignition lock. Flat tyre Vehicles with automatic transmission*
X Fold the wiper arm away from the rear win- Your vehicle may be equipped with: X Move the selector lever to P.
dow until it engages. Ra TIREFIT kit (Y page 255)
X Turn wiper blade 1 at a right angle to wiper Ra For all vehicles
"Minispare" emergency spare
arm.
wheel* (Y page 255) X All occupants must get out of the vehicle.
X Press tab 2 and push wiper blade 1 off Ra collapsible emergency spare Make sure that they are not endangered as
the retainer in the direction of arrow 4. they do so.
wheel* (Y page 255)
X Remove wiper blade 1. Ra X Make sure that no one is near the danger
spare wheel* (Y page 255)
Rthe
area whilst a wheel is being changed. Any-
MOExtended run-flat sys-
Fitting one who is not directly assisting in the
tem* (Y page 328) wheel change should, for example, stand
X Insert the new wiper blade into retainer behind the barrier.
3 in the opposite direction to arrow 4
until tab 2 engages. Preparing the vehicle X Switch off the engine.
X Make sure that wiper blade 1 is seated i Vehicle preparation is not necessary on
X Remove the key from the ignition lock.
correctly. vehicles with MOE tyres*. X Place the warning triangle (Y page 252) or
X Turn wiper blade 1 parallel to the wiper X Stop your vehicle as far away from traffic warning lamps at a suitable distance.
arm. as possible on solid, non-slippery, level Observe legal requirements.
X Fold the wiper arm back onto the rear win- ground. G Risk of injury
dow. X Switch on the hazard warning lamps. The jack is designed only to raise the vehi-
X Firmly depress the parking brake. cle for a short time while a wheel is being
changed.
If you intend to work under the vehicle, it
Vehicles with manual transmission must be placed on stands.
X Shift to either first or reverse gear.
Z
* optional
317
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 318

Practical advice
Flat tyre
Make sure that the jack is placed on a firm, Rif there are cuts or punctures in the tyre
non-slip, level surface. Do not use wooden greater than 4 mm
blocks or similar as jacking supports. Oth- Rif the wheel rim is damaged
erwise, the jack will not be able to achieve
Rif you have driven at very low tyre pres-
its load-bearing capacity due to the restric-
ted height. sures or on a flat tyre
Do not start the engine at any time while Do not drive any further. Consult a qualified
the wheel is being changed. specialist workshop which has the neces-
Do not lie under the vehicle when it is being sary specialist knowledge and tools to carry
supported by the jack. If you do not raise out the work required.
the vehicle as described, it could slip off the Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use 1 Driver's field of vision sticker
jack (e.g. if the engine is started or a door a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this 2 Wheel sticker
or the boot lid/tailgate is opened or closed) purpose. In particular, work relevant to
and you could sustain serious injuries. safety or on safety-related systems must be X Affix part 1 of the sticker within the driv-
carried out at a qualified specialist work- er's field of vision.
shop.
X Affix part 2 of the sticker near the valve
Using the TIREFIT kit on the wheel with the defective tyre.
X Do not remove any foreign objects which
You can use the TIREFIT kit to seal small have penetrated the tyre, e.g. screws or G Risk of injury
punctures, particularly those in the tyre tread. nails. TIREFIT must not come into contact with
You can use TIREFIT in outdoor temperatures X Remove TIREFIT, the accompanying "max. your skin, eyes or clothing.
down to -20 °C.
80 km/h" sticker and the electric air pump
G Risk of accident from the stowage well underneath the
In the following situations, your safety is at boot/luggage compartment floor
particular risk and TIREFIT is unable to pro- (Y page 254).
vide breakdown assistance:
318
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 319

Practical advice
Flat tyre
RIf TIREFIT comes into contact with your i Your vehicle may be equipped with one of X Open flap 2 on the electric air pump.
eyes or skin, immediately rinse thor- two different air pumps. Version 1 can be X Pull connector 5 and air pump hose 6
oughly with clean water. identified by the flap, behind which the from the housing.
RChange
hose with the pressure gauge and cable are
out of clothing which has come X Screw air pump hose 6 onto flange 7 of
located; version 2 has a pressure gauge
into contact with TIREFIT immediately. TIREFIT sealant filler bottle 1.
integrated in the electric air pump.
RIf an allergic reaction occurs, consult a X Place TIREFIT sealant filler bottle 1 head
doctor immediately. downwards into recess 3 of the electric
Version 1
Keep TIREFIT away from children. air pump.
RIf TIREFIT is swallowed, immediately
rinse your mouth out thoroughly with
water and drink plenty of water.
RDo not induce vomiting. Consult a doctor
immediately.
RDo not inhale TIREFIT fumes.
i If TIREFIT leaks out, allow it to dry. It can

then be removed like a layer of film.
If you get TIREFIT on your clothing, have it Version 1
cleaned as soon as possible with perchloro- 1 TIREFIT sealant filler bottle 8 Filler hose
ethylene. 2 Flap 9 Valve
G Risk of injury 3 Recess
X Remove the cap from valve 9 on the faulty
Comply with the manufacturer's safety 4 On/off switch tyre.
instructions shown on the sticker on the 5 Electric connector with cable
electric air pump. 6 Air pump hose
7 Flange
Z
319
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 320

Practical advice
Flat tyre
X Press on/off switch 4 on the electric air G Risk of accident
pump to I. If a pressure of 1.8 bar is not achieved after
The electric air pump is switched on. The five minutes, the tyre is too badly damaged.
tyre is inflated. Do not drive any further. Consult a qualified
specialist workshop which has the neces-
i First, TIREFIT is pumped into the tyre. The
sary specialist knowledge and tools to carry
pressure can briefly rise to around 5 bar.
out the work required. Mercedes-Benz rec-
Do not switch off the electric pump dur- ommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz
ing this phase. Service Centre for this purpose. In particu-
X Let the electric pump run for five minutes. lar, work relevant to safety or on safety-
a Pressure release screw The tyre should then have a pressure of at related systems must be carried out at a
b Pressure gauge least 1.8 bar. qualified specialist workshop.
Make sure pressure release screw a on If a tyre pressure of 1.8 bar is reached:
X ! Do not operate the electric air pump for
pressure gauge b is fully closed. X Press on/off switch 4 on the electric air
longer than six minutes without a break.
Otherwise, it may overheat. pump to 0.
X Screw filler hose 8 onto valve 9.
The air pump can be operated again once The electric air pump is switched off.
X Insert plug 5 into the socket of the ciga- it has cooled down. X Disconnect the electric air pump and stow
rette lighter* (Y page 209) or into a 12V it away.
If a pressure of 1.8 bar is not reached after
power socket in your vehicle
five minutes: X Fold up the warning triangle and stow it
(Y page 210).
X Switch off and disconnect the electric air away.
X Turn the key to position 1 (Y page 76) in
pump and drive the vehicle forwards or X Pull away immediately.
the ignition lock. backwards approximately 10 m. This distributes the TIREFIT more evenly
This distributes the TIREFIT more evenly. around the tyre.
X Remove TIREFIT filler bottle 1 from the X Stop after driving for approximately ten
electric pump. minutes and check the tyre pressure with
X Pump up the tyre again. the electric air pump.
* optional
320
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 321

Practical advice
Flat tyre
G Risk of accident G Risk of accident Version 2
If the tyre pressure is now lower than Do not exceed the maximum speed of 80
1.3 bar, the tyre is too badly damaged. Do km/h.
not drive any further. Consult a qualified The “max. 80 km/h” sticker must be affixed
specialist workshop which has the neces- within the driver's field of vision.
sary specialist knowledge and tools to carry The vehicle's handling characteristics may
out the work required. Mercedes-Benz rec- be affected.
ommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz
Service Centre for this purpose. In particu- H Environmental note
lar, work relevant to safety or on safety- Have the used TIREFIT kit disposed of pro-
related systems must be carried out at a fessionally, e.g. at a Mercedes-Benz
qualified specialist workshop. Service Centre.
1 TIREFIT sealant filler bottle
X If the tyre pressure is still at least 1.3 bar, X Have the TIREFIT kit replaced every four 2 Recess
correct it (see fuel filler flap for values). years at a qualified specialist workshop, 3 On/off switch
To increase the tyre pressure: switch on e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. 4 Electric connector with cable
the electric air pump.
5 Air pump hose
To reduce the tyre pressure: open pres-
6 Flange
sure release screw a on pressure
gauge b. X Pull connector with cable 4 and air pump
X Drive to the nearest workshop and have the hose 5 from the housing.
tyre changed there. X Screw air pump hose 5 onto flange 6 of
X Have the TIREFIT kit replaced as soon as TIREFIT filler bottle 1.
possible at a qualified specialist workshop, X Place TIREFIT sealant filler bottle 1 head
e.g. at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. downwards into recess 2 of the electric
air pump.
Z
321
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 322

Practical advice
Flat tyre
X Press on/off switch 3 on the electric air G Risk of accident
pump to I. If a pressure of 1.8 bar is not achieved after
The electric air pump is switched on. The five minutes, the tyre is too badly damaged.
tyre is inflated. Do not drive any further. Consult a qualified
specialist workshop which has the neces-
i First, TIREFIT is pumped into the tyre. The
sary specialist knowledge and tools to carry
pressure can briefly rise to around 5 bar.
out the work required. Mercedes-Benz rec-
Do not switch off the electric pump dur- ommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz
ing this phase. Service Centre for this purpose. In particu-
X Let the electric pump run for five minutes. lar, work relevant to safety or on safety-
7 Valve The tyre should then have a pressure of at related systems must be carried out at a
8 Filler hose least 1.8 bar. qualified specialist workshop.
X Remove the cap from valve 7 on the faulty ! Do not operate the electric air pump for If a tyre pressure of 1.8 bar is reached:
tyre. longer than six minutes without a break. X Press on/off switch 3 on the electric air
Otherwise, it may overheat. pump to 0.
X Screw filler hose 8 onto valve 7.
The air pump can be operated again once The electric air pump is switched off.
X Insert plug 4 into the socket of the ciga- it has cooled down. X Disconnect the electric air pump and stow
rette lighter* (Y page 209) or into a 12V If a pressure of 1.8 bar is not reached after it away.
power socket in your vehicle five minutes:
(Y page 210). X Fold up the warning triangle and stow it
X Switch off and disconnect the electric air away.
X Turn the key to position 1 in the ignition pump and drive the vehicle forwards or
lock.
X Pull away immediately.
backwards approximately 10 m.
This distributes the TIREFIT more evenly
This distributes the TIREFIT more evenly. around the tyre.
X Remove TIREFIT filler bottle 1 from the X Stop after driving for approximately ten
electric pump. minutes and check the tyre pressure with
X Pump up the tyre again. the electric air pump.
* optional
322
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 323

Practical advice
Flat tyre
G Risk of accident To increase the tyre pressure: switch on Changing a wheel and fitting the spare
If the tyre pressure is now lower than the electric air pump. wheel*
1.3 bar, the tyre is too badly damaged. Do To reduce the tyre pressure: press yellow
not drive any further. Consult a qualified pressure release button 9 next to pres- G Risk of accident
specialist workshop which has the neces- sure gauge a. The wheel dimensions and tyre size of the
sary specialist knowledge and tools to carry spare wheel*, the emergency spare
X Drive to the nearest workshop and have the
out the work required. Mercedes-Benz rec- wheel* and standard wheels may differ
tyre changed there.
ommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz from one another.
Service Centre for this purpose. In particu- X Have the TIREFIT kit replaced as soon as Your vehicle's handling characteristics will
lar, work relevant to safety or on safety- possible at a qualified specialist workshop, be altered when a "Minispare"/collapsible
related systems must be carried out at a e.g. at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
emergency spare wheel* is fitted. Adapt
qualified specialist workshop. G Risk of accident your style of driving accordingly.
Do not exceed the maximum speed of 80 The "Minispare"/collapsible emergency
km/h. spare wheel* may only be used as a tem-
The “max. 80 km/h” sticker must be affixed porary measure. Do not exceed the maxi-
within the driver's field of vision. mum speed of 80 km/h and do not
The vehicle's handling characteristics may deactivate ESP®.
be affected. Never drive the vehicle with more than one
“Minispare”/collapsible emergency spare
H Environmental note wheel* fitted.
Have the used TIREFIT kit disposed of pro-
fessionally, e.g. at a Mercedes-Benz G Risk of accident
Service Centre. Have the “Minispare”/collapsible emer-
9 Pressure release button gency spare wheel* or the spare wheel*
a Pressure gauge X Have the TIREFIT kit replaced every four replaced with a new wheel as soon as pos-
years at a qualified specialist workshop, sible at a qualified specialist workshop
X If the tyre pressure is still at least 1.3 bar, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. which has the necessary specialist knowl-
correct it (see fuel filler flap for values). edge and tools to carry out the work Z
* optional
323
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 324

Practical advice
Flat tyre
required. Mercedes-Benz recommends is diagonally opposite the wheel you wish Rslip off the jack
that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service to change. Rinjure you or others
Centre for this purpose. In particular, work X On downhill gradients: place chocks or Rbe damaged
relevant to safety or on safety-related sys-
similar under both wheels of the other axle.
tems must be carried out at a qualified It is thus important to ensure that the jack
specialist workshop. is positioned correctly in the respective
Raising the vehicle jacking points. Before positioning the jack,
remove any dirt that may have collected in
Preparing the vehicle the jacking points.
X Prepare the vehicle as described
The jacking points for the jack are located
(Y page 317).
behind the wheel housings of the front wheels
X If a trailer is coupled, uncouple it. and in front of the wheel housings of the rear
X Place the wheels in the straight-ahead posi- wheels.
tion.
X Take out the following from the stowage
area beneath the boot/luggage compart-
ment floor:
Rthe "Minispare"/collapsible emergency 1 Wheel wrench
spare wheel* or the spare wheel* X Using wheel wrench 1, loosen the bolts on
Rthe vehicle tool kit the wheel you wish to change by about one
Rthe full turn. Do not unscrew the bolts com-
wheel chock
pletely.
Rthe jack
G Risk of accident 1 Jacking point
X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling If you fail to position the jack correctly, the 2 Jack
away. vehicle may:
3 Crank
On level ground: place chocks or similar
under the front and rear of the wheel that X Position jack 2 at jacking point 1.
* optional
324
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 325

Practical advice
Flat tyre
G Risk of accident
If a wheel hub thread is damaged, you must
not drive the vehicle any further. Consult a
qualified specialist workshop which has the
to carry out the work required. Mercedes-
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre or Service
24h for this purpose. In particular, work rel-
evant to safety or on safety-related systems
1 Centring pin must be carried out at a qualified specialist
X Make sure that the base of the jack is posi- workshop.
tioned directly under jacking point 1. X In place of the wheel bolt, screw centring
X Turn crank 3 until the tyre is raised a max- pin 1 from the vehicle tool kit into the G Risk of accident
imum of 3 cm from the ground. thread. Only use wheel bolts that have been
designed for the wheel and the vehicle. For
X Unscrew the uppermost wheel bolt com- X Unscrew the remaining wheel bolts fully.
safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-
pletely. mends that you only use wheel bolts which
! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on a
dirty surface. This could cause damage to have been approved for Mercedes-Benz
the bolt and wheel hub threads. vehicles. Other bolts could work loose.
Do not tighten the wheel bolts completely
X Remove the wheel. while the vehicle is still jacked up. The vehi-
cle could topple off the jack.
Fitting a new wheel
G Risk of accident
Replace damaged or corroded wheel bolts.
Never oil or grease wheel bolts.
Z
325
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 326

Practical advice
Flat tyre
X Take the electric air pump out of the stow-
age well under the boot/luggage compart-
ment floor.
1 Wheel bolts for all wheels supplied by the

X Tighten the wheel bolts until they are fin-
factory
ger-tight.
X Clean the wheel and wheel hub contact
X Unscrew the centring pin.
surfaces. 1 Flap
X Tighten the last wheel bolt until it is finger- 2 On/off switch
X Place the "Minispare"/collapsible emer- tight.
gency spare wheel* or the spare wheel 3 Electric connector with cable
onto the centring pin and push it on. 4 Air pump hose with pressure gauge and
Inflating the collapsible emergency pressure release screw
spare wheel* with the electric air pump 5 Union nut
G Risk of accident X Open flap 1.
Pump up the collapsible emergency spare
wheel before lowering the vehicle, as you
X Pull connector 3 and air hose 4 out of
could otherwise damage the wheel rim. the housing.
X Make sure that the pressure release screw
The electric air pump is located in the stow- on the pressure gauge is closed.
age well under the boot/luggage compart-
ment floor. X Remove the cap from the valve on the tyre.
* optional
326
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 327

Practical advice
Flat tyre
X Screw union nut 5 on air hose 4 onto the X Open the pressure release screw on the G Risk of accident
valve. pressure gauge until the tyre pressure is Have the tightening torque checked imme-
X Insert plug 3 into the cigarette lighter correct. diately after a wheel is changed. The wheels
socket* (Y page 209) or into a 12V socket X Disconnect the electric air pump and stow could work loose if they are not tightened
in your vehicle (Y page 210). it away. to a torque of 130 Nm.
X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in X Turn the jack back to its initial position and
the ignition lock. Lowering the vehicle
store it and the rest of the vehicle tool kit
X Press on/off switch 2 on the electric air X Lower the vehicle. To do this, turn the crank in the boot/luggage compartment.
pump to I. of the jack anti-clockwise until the vehicle
is standing firmly on the ground again. Vehicles with the "Minispare"/collapsible
The electric air pump is switched on. The emergency spare wheel*:
tyre is inflated. X Place the jack to one side.
X Pack the faulty wheel in the protective film
X When a tyre pressure of 3.5 bar has been provided with the "Minispare"/collapsible
reached, press 0 on the electric air pump emergency spare wheel* and transport the
switch. wheel in the boot/luggage compartment.
The electric air pump is switched off.
or
! Do not operate the electric air pump for X Depending on the size of the wheel, you
longer than six minutes without a break. may also be able to secure the faulty wheel
Otherwise, it may overheat. in the spare wheel well. In this case, you
The air pump can be operated again once will have to remove the stowage well casing
it has cooled down. from the spare wheel well and stow it
securely in the boot/luggage compart-
If the tyre pressure is higher than 3.5 bar: 1 – 5 Wheel bolts ment.
X Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a cross- i Do not activate the tyre pressure moni-
wise pattern in the sequence indicator* until the deflated tyre has been
ted (1 to 5). The tightening torque must removed from the vehicle. Z
be 130 Nm.
* optional
327
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 328

Practical advice
Flat tyre
MOExtended run-flat system* i A TIREFIT kit* is available from any quali- Ryou see smoke and smell rubber
fied specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes- RESP®
The MOExtended run-flat system must only is intervening constantly
Benz Service Centre.
be used in conjunction with the tyre pressure Rthere are tears in the sidewalls of the tyre
loss warning system or the tyre pressure G Risk of accident
After driving in run-flat mode, you must
monitor*. The handling characteristics of your vehicle
have the rims checked for damage at a
deteriorate in run-flat mode, for example:
! The maximum permissible distance which qualified specialist workshop which has the
Rwhen cornering
can be driven in run-flat mode depends on necessary specialist knowledge and tools
the load in the vehicle. It is 50 km if the Rwhen braking to carry out the work required. The faulty
vehicle is partially laden and 30 km if fully Rwhen accelerating rapidly tyre must be replaced in every case.
laden. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use
The maximum range that can be driven in Adapt your driving style accordingly and
emergency operation is measured from the avoid sudden changes in direction and sud-
point at which the pressure loss warning den acceleration, as well as driving over
safety or on safety-related systems must be
message appears in the multi-function dis- obstacles (i.e. kerbs, potholes), and driving
play. off-road. This is particularly the case when
shop.
the vehicle is heavily laden.
You must not exceed a maximum speed of
80 km/h. The maximum permissible distance that i On a vehicle with MOExtended tyres, only
can be driven in run-flat mode depends to MOExtended spare tyres should be used.
i Vehicles featuring the MOExtended run- a large extent on the loads placed on the These must be of the size specified for the
flat system are not equipped with the vehicle. It can be shorter due to high vehicle.
TIREFIT kit*. speeds, a heavy load, sudden acceleration
and/or manoeuvring, the road surface con-
It is therefore recommended to additionally
dition, outside temperature, etc., or further
equip your vehicle with the TIREFIT kit* if you drive carefully and conservatively.
when fitting tyres that do not feature run-
flat properties, e.g. winter tyres. Do not continue to drive in run-flat mode if:
Ryou hear banging noises
Rthe vehicle starts to shake
* optional
328
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 329

Practical advice
Battery
Battery Battery acid is caustic. Centre or a special collection point for old
Avoid contact with the batteries.
Notes on the battery skin, eyes or clothing.
In order for the battery to achieve the maxi- Wear suitable protective G Risk of injury
mum possible service life, it must always be clothing, in particular Mercedes-Benz recommends that, for
sufficiently charged. gloves, an apron and a safety reasons, you only use batteries
Have the battery charge checked more fre- face mask. which have been tested and approved for
quently if you use the vehicle mainly for short Immediately rinse acid your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. These bat-
trips or if you leave it standing idle for a splashes off with clean teries provide increased impact protection
lengthy period. water. Consult a doctor if to prevent vehicle occupants from suffering
necessary. acid burns should the battery be damaged
To prevent damage from corrosion, only
in the event of an accident.
replace the battery with one that has a central Wear eye protection.
ventilation cover. To prevent acid burns, observe the follow-
ing safety notes when handling batteries:
Consult a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre if
RDo not lean over batteries.
you wish to leave your vehicle parked up for
a long period of time. Keep children away. RDo not place any metal objects on a bat-
G Risk of injury tery. You could otherwise cause a short

circuit and the battery's highly flammable
Comply with safety precautions and take
Observe this Owner's gas mixture could ignite.
protective measures when handling batter-
ies. Manual. RMake sure that you do not create an elec-
Risk of explosion trostatic charge, e.g. by wearing syn-

thetic clothing or as a result of friction on
H Environmental note fabrics. Therefore, you should not pull or
Do not dispose of batteries with the house- slide the battery over carpets or other
Fire, naked flames and synthetic materials.
hold rubbish. Dispose of defective batteries
smoking are prohibited
in an environmentally responsible manner. RNever touch the battery first. To dis-
when handling the bat-
Take them to a Mercedes-Benz Service charge a possible electrostatic charge,
tery. Avoid creating Z
sparks.
329
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 330

Practical advice
Battery
step out of the vehicle first and touch the 4 Breather hose
bodywork.
RDo not wipe the battery using a cloth. The
i On vehicles with a spare tyre*, the battery
is located in the recess on the right-hand
battery may explode as a result of elec-
side.
trostatic charge or due to flying sparks.
! Switch the engine off and remove the key

before unscrewing or disconnecting the
terminal clamps from the battery. You may
otherwise destroy electronic components
such as the alternator. Saloon: battery in the boot
1 Electrostatic protection
i Mercedes-Benz recommends that you 2 Battery
have all work involving the battery, e.g.
removing, charging and replacing, carried
out at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g.
a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Estate: battery under the cover in the luggage com-
partment on the right-hand side
X Pull the cover upwards and remove it.
Installation location of the battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a battery in the
boot. It is located under the cover in the spare
wheel well.
X Remove the luggage well (Y page 192).
Saloon
1 Negative terminal
2 Positive terminal (under cover)
3 Cell cap
* optional
330
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 331

Practical advice
Battery
4 Breather hose Disconnecting the battery
G Risk of accident
Electrostatic protection If the battery is disconnected:
G Risk of injury Rthe brake boosting effect will not be avail-
Only use rechargeable batteries with elec- able. Greater braking force will then be
trostatic protection fitted. The electrostatic required and the brake pedal travel will
protection prevents the creation of sparks be longer. If necessary, depress the
due to electrostatic buildup, thereby pre- brake pedal with maximum force.
venting the highly explosive mixture of Ryou can no longer turn the key in the igni-
Estate gases in the battery from igniting. tion and, on vehicles with KEYLESS
1 Electrostatic protection GO*, pressing the KEYLESS GO button*
2 Battery i You can obtain the electrostatic protec- will have no effect
tion from any Mercedes-Benz Service Rthe selector lever is locked in position P
Centre. on vehicles with automatic transmis-
X To remove: pull the electrostatic protec- sion*
tion upwards and remove.
X To fit: push the electrostatic protection ! Always disconnect the battery in
firmly onto the battery. the order described below. Never swap the
terminal clamps. You may otherwise dam-
age the vehicle electronics.
X Firmly depress the parking brake and shift
the selector lever to position P on vehicles
Estate with automatic transmission*.
1 Positive terminal (under cover) X Switch off all electrical consumers.
2 Negative terminal X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition Z
3 Cell cap lock and remove it.
* optional
331
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 332

Practical advice
Battery
X Open the boot/luggage compartment. Estate Charging and fitting the battery
X Remove the cover (Y page 256).
G Risk of injury
X Remove the battery cover. Only charge the battery in a well-ventilated
X Remove the negative terminal clamp from area. As the battery is being charged, gases
the battery. can escape and generate minor explosions.
This may injure you and other persons or
X Remove the cover from the positive termi-
cause damage to the paintwork or acid cor-
nal clamp.
rosion on the vehicle.
X Remove the positive terminal clamp from You can obtain information about battery
the battery. chargers which allow the battery to be
X Disconnect the breather hose. charged when still installed from a qualified
1 Spacer specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz
2 Battery Service Centre.
Removing the battery 3 Strap
G Risk of injury
Saloon X Disconnect the battery (Y page 331). There is a risk of acid burns during the
charging process due to the gases which
X Disconnect the battery (Y page 331). X Loosen the bolt which holds the battery in
escape from the battery. Do not lean over
place.
X Loosen the bolt which holds the battery in the battery during the charging process.
place. X Release strap 3 and remove the battery.
X Release the strap and remove the battery. X Remove spacer 1 from the breather hose ! Only charge the installed battery with a
on the battery. battery charger which has been tested and
approved by Mercedes-Benz. These battery
chargers allow the battery to be charged
while it is still installed. Otherwise, the vehi-
cle's electronic system may be damaged.
! Only use battery chargers with a maxi-

mum charging voltage of 14.8 V.
332
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 333

Practical advice
Jump-starting
X Charge the battery. Observe the notes in Reconnecting the battery Jump-starting
the operating instructions for your battery
charger. ! Always reconnect the battery in the Jump-starting your vehicle
sequence described below. Never swap the
X Refit the charged battery. If your vehicle's battery is discharged, the
terminal clamps. You may otherwise dam-
To do this, follow the steps described in engine can be jump-started from another
age the vehicle electronics.
"Removing the battery" (Y page 332) in vehicle or from an external battery using jump
reverse order. X Switch off all electrical consumers. leads.
X Connect the positive terminal clamp and Observe the following points:
! Do not fit refillable batteries without elec- secure the cover. RJump-starting may only be performed when
trostatic protection. The electrostatic dis- the engine and catalytic converter are cold.
charge could otherwise cause the battery X Connect the negative terminal clamp.
RDo not start the engine if the battery is fro-
to explode. The battery acid released could X Connect the breather hose. Make sure that
cause damage to your vehicle. zen. Let the battery thaw first.
a cell cap is fitted between the battery and
the breather hose. RJump-starting may only be performed from
Further information on electrostatic protec-
tion (Y page 331). batteries with a nominal voltage of 12 V.
X Refit the electrostatic protection if neces-
sary (Y page 331). ROnly use jump leads which are protected
G Risk of injury
against polarity reversal and which have a
Battery acid is caustic. Avoid contact with i If the battery power supply has been inter- sufficient cross-section and insulated ter-
the skin, eyes or clothing. rupted (e.g. if it has been reconnected), you minal clamps.
must carry out the following tasks:
RSet the time (Y page 135). i Jump leads which are protected against
polarity reversal and further information
RReset the sliding/tilting sunroof* about jump-starting can be obtained from
(Y page 182). any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
RReset the function for folding the exterior
mirrors in/out automatically* by folding ! Avoid repeated and lengthy starting
the mirrors out once (Y page 91). attempts.
Never start the vehicle using a rapid battery
Z
charger.
* optional
333
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 334

Practical advice
Jump-starting
G Risk of injury Saloon necting the jump lead to the donor battery
There is a risk of acid burns when jump- first.
starting a vehicle due to the gases which X Start the engine.
escape from the battery. Do not lean over X When the engine is running, switch on a few
the battery while the engine is being jump- electrical consumers, e.g. the blower. Do
started. not switch on the lights.
G Risk of explosion X First disconnect the jump lead from nega-
Gases escaping from the battery during tive terminals 1 and 4, then from positive
jump-starting may cause minor explosions. terminals 2 and 3 each time beginning
Avoid creating sparks. Keep naked flames with your vehicle's battery.
away from the battery, and do not smoke. X Have the battery checked at a qualified
Comply with safety precautions and take 1 Negative terminal on your vehicle specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz
protective measures when handling batter- 2 Positive terminal on your vehicle Service Centre.
ies. You will find these under “Battery” in 3 Positive terminal of donor battery
the index. 4 Negative terminal of donor battery
X Make sure that the two vehicles do not X If your vehicle is being jump-started by
touch. another vehicle, allow the other vehicle's
X Depress the parking brake. engine to idle.
X Connect positive terminal 2 on your vehi-
X Manual transmission: engage neutral. cle to positive terminal 3 of the donor
X Automatic transmission*: move the battery using the jump lead, beginning with
selector lever to P. your own battery.
X All vehicles: switch off all electrical con- X Connect negative terminal 4 of the donor
sumers. battery to negative terminal 1 of your
vehicle's battery using the jump lead, con-
* optional
334
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 335

Practical advice
Jump-starting
Estate X Remove the jump lead from earth point
1 on your own vehicle and from the neg-
ative terminal of the donor vehicle first,
then from the positive terminals, beginning
with your vehicle's battery.
X Have the battery checked at a qualified
specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz
Service Centre.
1 Earth point on your vehicle Jump-starting another vehicle

1 Cover 2 Positive terminal on your vehicle (under You can jump-start another vehicle which has
cover) a flat battery. Observe the following points:
2 Rotary catches
ROnly 12 V batteries can be jump-started.
X If your vehicle is being jump-started by
X Turn three rotary catches 2 through a RDo not jump-start frozen batteries. Allow
another vehicle, allow the other vehicle's
quarter turn. engine to idle. the battery to thaw first.
X Remove cover 1 forwards. X Connect the positive terminals of the two RObserve the requirements for the other
batteries using the jump lead, beginning vehicle.
with your own battery. ROnly use jump leads which are protected
X Connect the negative terminal of the donor against polarity reversal and which have a
battery to the body earth point using the sufficient cross-section and insulated ter-
jump lead, connecting the jump lead to the minal clamps.
negative terminal of the donor battery first.
G Risk of acid burns
X Start the engine. There is a risk of acid burns when jump-
X When the engine is running, switch on a few starting a vehicle due to the gases which
electrical consumers, e.g. the blower. Do escape from the battery. Do not lean over Z
not switch on the lights.
335
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 336

Practical advice
Jump-starting
the battery while the engine is being jump- X Switch off all electrical consumers.
started. X Start the engine and allow it to idle.
G Risk of explosion
Gases escaping from the battery during
jump-starting may cause minor explosions.
Avoid creating sparks. Keep naked flames
away from the battery, and do not smoke.
Comply with safety precautions and take
protective measures when handling batter-
ies. You will find these under “Battery” in Estate
the index. 1 Positive terminal of your vehicle's battery
2 Negative terminal of your vehicle's bat-
! You must not use the jump-start connec- Saloon tery
tors in the engine compartment to jump- 1 Negative terminal of your vehicle's bat-
start another vehicle. The jump-start con- tery X Connect the positive terminals of the two
nectors are not suitable for jump-starting batteries using the jump lead, connecting
2 Positive terminal of your vehicle's battery
another vehicle. The vehicle could be dam- the jump lead to the donor battery first.
aged by this. X Connect the negative terminals of the bat-
X Make sure that the two vehicles do not teries using the jump lead, connecting the
touch. jump lead to the donor battery first.
X Depress the parking brake. X Start the engine.
X Vehicles with manual transmission: engage X First disconnect the jump lead from the
neutral. negative terminals and then from the posi-
tive terminals, beginning with the other
X Vehicles with automatic transmission*: vehicle's battery.
move the selector lever to P.
* optional
336
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 337

Practical advice
Towing and tow-starting

Towing and tow-starting RVehicles with an automatic transmission*
G Risk of accident
The vehicle is braked when HOLD is activa- must not be tow-started.
Points to remember
ted. Therefore, deactivate HOLD if the vehi- RIf the engine does not start, try jump start-
G Risk of accident cle is to be towed. ing (Y page 333).
If you tow the vehicle, you must use a rigid If you tow or tow-start another vehicle, its RIf it is not possible to jump-start the vehicle,
towing bar if: weight must not exceed the maximum per- have it towed to the nearest qualified spe-
Rthe engine is not running missible gross vehicle weight of your vehi- cialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz
cle. Service Centre.
Rthere is a brake system malfunction
It is better to have the vehicle transported RIf the vehicle has suffered transmission
Rthe voltage supply or the vehicle's elec-
trical system is damaged than to have it towed. damage, only tow it with the propeller shaft
When towing, observe the legal requirements disconnected.
The electric power steering and the brake
in all countries concerned. RThe automatic transmission* selector lever
force boosting effect do not work when the
engine is not running. Greater braking force ! When towing, pull away slowly and with- must be in the N position when towing the
will then be required and the brake pedal out jerking. If the tractive power is too high, vehicle away.
travel will be longer. If necessary, depress the vehicles could be damaged. Do not use RIf you are towing the vehicle over a consid-
the brake pedal with maximum force. the towing eye for recovery. erable distance, this must only be done
Do not tow the vehicle if the key cannot be with the rear axle raised.
turned in the ignition lock. If this is the case, ! You may tow the vehicle for a maximum
RThe ignition must be switched off if you are
the steering is locked and the vehicle can- of 50 km. A towing speed of 50 km/h must
not be exceeded. towing the vehicle with the front/rear axle
not be steered. ®
raised. Intervention by ESP could other-
If you tow or tow-start another vehicle, its With towing distances over 50 km, the
wise damage the brake system.
weight must not exceed the maximum per- entire vehicle needs to be lifted up and
transported. RVehicles with 4MATIC* may not be towed
missible gross vehicle weight of your vehi-
cle. with the front or rear axle raised.
! Only secure the tow cable or towing bar RBefore towing the vehicle, make sure that
to the towing eyes. You may otherwise
the battery is connected and charged. Oth-
damage the vehicle.
erwise: Z
* optional
337
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 338

Practical advice

- you cannot switch on the ignition right-hand side of the vehicle when viewed in Opening the rear cover
- you cannot move the selector lever the direction of travel.
to N (on vehicles with automatic trans-
mission*)
- you have no support when braking
i Switch off the automatic locking feature

before the vehicle is towed (Y page 137).
You could otherwise be locked out when
pushing or towing the vehicle.
1 Cover
Fitting the towing eye 1 Cover
X Press cover 1 back in the direction of the
Opening the front cover X Push cover 1 back in the direction of the arrow.
arrow along its entire lower edge.
The mountings for the removable towing eyes X Take cover 1 off the opening.
are located in the bumpers. They are located
X Take cover 1 off the opening.
at the front and rear under the covers on the Securing the towing eye
X Take the towing eye and the wheel wrench
from the vehicle tool kit (Y page 254).
X Screw in the towing eye clockwise to the
stop.
X Insert the wheel wrench handle into the
towing eye and tighten.
* optional
338
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 339

Practical advice

Towing the vehicle Vehicles with automatic transmission* X Tow the vehicle or let it roll.
! You may tow the vehicle for a maximum X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition X Shift to a suitable gear and bring the clutch
of 50 km. A towing speed of 50 km/h must lock. pedal up slowly. Do not depress the accel-
not be exceeded. erator pedal.
X Move the selector lever to N.
With towing distances over 50 km, the The engine is started.
entire vehicle needs to be lifted up and
transported. Tow-starting (emergency engine
starting) Removing the towing eye
! Vehicles with 4MATIC* may not be towed X Take the wheel wrench from the vehicle
with the front or rear axle raised. Please note:
tool kit (Y page 254).
RVehicles with an automatic transmission*
! The engine must be switched off (key in must not be tow-started. X Insert the wheel wrench handle into the
ignition lock in position 0 or position 1) if towing eye and turn it anti-clockwise.
RThe battery must be connected.
the vehicle is being towed with the rear axle X Unscrew the towing eye.
RThe engine and catalytic converter must be
raised or if the parking brake is being tested
cold. X Replace the cover and press it until it
on a dynamometer. Intervention by ESP®
RAvoid repeated and lengthy starting engages.
could otherwise damage the brake system.
attempts. X Return the towing eye and the wheel
wrench to the vehicle tool kit.
lock. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition
X Shift to neutral. lock.
X Fully depress the clutch pedal.
X Shift to neutral.
* optional
339
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 340

Practical advice
Fuses
Transporting the vehicle Fuses ! Only use fuses that have been approved
for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and which
The towing eyes can be used to pull the vehi- Notes on changing fuses have the correct fuse rating for the system
cle onto a trailer or transporter for transport- concerned. Otherwise, components or sys-
ing purposes. The fuses in your vehicle serve to close down
faulty circuits. If a fuse blows, all the compo- tems could be damaged.
! Only lash the vehicle down by the wheels nents on the circuit and their functions will The fuses are located in various fuse boxes:
or wheel rims, not by parts of the vehicle fail. RMain fuse box on the driver's side of the
such as axle or steering components. The Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of
vehicle could otherwise be damaged. dashboard
the same rating, which you can recognise by
RFuse box in the boot/luggage compart-
the colour and value. The fuse ratings are lis-
ted in the fuse allocation chart. A Mercedes- ment on the left-hand side of the vehicle
Benz Service Centre will be happy to advise
X Shift to neutral. you. Fuse allocation chart
G Risk of fire The fuse allocation chart is in the main fuse
Vehicles with automatic transmission* Only use fuses that have been approved for box in the dashboard.
X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition Mercedes-Benz vehicles and which have
lock. the correct fuse rating for the systems con-
cerned. Do not attempt to repair or bridge Before changing a fuse
X Move the selector lever to N.
faulty fuses. Otherwise, a circuit overload X Park the vehicle.
could cause a fire. Have the cause traced
and rectified at a qualified specialist work- X Switch off all electrical consumers.
shop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. X Remove the key from the ignition lock.
If the newly inserted fuse also blows, have the
cause traced and rectified at a qualified spe-
cialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz
Service Centre.
* optional
340
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 341

Practical advice
Fuses
Main fuse box X Remove cover 1 from the dashboard Fuse box in the boot or luggage com-
using a flat, blunt object 2. partment
The main fuse box is located on the driver's
side of the dashboard. X Pull cover 1 in the direction of the arrow
by hand and remove it. Saloon
X To close: clip in cover 1 at the front. The fuse box is located in the boot behind the
trim on the left-hand side when viewed in the
X Fold cover 1 inwards until it engages. direction of travel.
1 Main fuse box cover

2 Flat, blunt object
! Do not use a pointed object, such as a

screwdriver, to open the fuse box in the 1 Catches
dashboard. You could otherwise damage 2 Cover
the dashboard.
X To open: open the boot lid.
X To open: open the driver’s door.
X Turn both catches 1 anti-clockwise.
X Insert a flat, blunt object into the recess as
a lever 2. X Remove cover 2.
X To close: insert and engage cover 2.
X Close the boot lid.
Z
341
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 342

Practical advice
Fuses
Estate
The fuse box is located in the luggage com-
partment behind the side trim on the left-
hand side when viewed in the direction of
travel.
1 Release button
2 Cover
X To open: open the tailgate.

X Press release button 1.
X Fold cover 2 down in the direction of the
arrow.
X To close: insert and engage cover 2.
X Close the tailgate.
342
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 343

Technical data
Introduction to technical data ......... 344

Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts ......... 344
Vehicle electronics ........................... 345
Vehicle identification plates ............ 346
Engine ................................................ 348
Performance ...................................... 352
Tyres and wheels .............................. 356
Vehicle dimensions .......................... 366
Vehicle weights ................................. 369
Trailer coupling* ............................... 375
Service products and capacities ..... 377
Frequencies for garage door open-
ers* .................................................... 391
343
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 344

Technical data
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts

Introduction to technical data Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts Mercedes-Benz parts and conversion parts
and accessories that have been approved for
i The technical data was determined in Mercedes-Benz tests genuine parts and con- your vehicle.
accordance with EU directives. All data version parts and accessories which have H Environmental note
applies to the vehicle's standard equip- been specifically approved for your vehicle for Daimler also supplies reconditioned
ment. The data may therefore differ for their reliability, safety and suitability. Despite assemblies and parts which are of the same
vehicles with optional equipment. You can ongoing market research, Mercedes-Benz is quality as new parts and to which the same
obtain further information from a unable to evaluate other parts. Mercedes- warranty applies.
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Benz therefore accepts no responsibility for
the use of such parts in Mercedes-Benz vehi- Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts and approved
cles, even if they have been independently or conversion parts and accessories are availa-
officially approved. ble from Mercedes-Benz Service Centres.
In Germany and some other countries, certain There, you can also receive advice about tech-
parts are only officially approved for installa- nical modifications and have the parts pro-
tion or modification if they comply with legal fessionally fitted.
requirements. All genuine Mercedes-Benz Always quote the vehicle identification num-
parts meet this requirement. The use of non- ber and the engine number when ordering
approved parts may invalidate the vehicle's genuine parts. You will find these numbers on
general operating permit. This is the case if: the vehicle data card in the Service Booklet
Rthey cause a change of the vehicle type or on your vehicle's identification plates
from that for which the vehicle's general (Y page 346).
operating permit was granted
Rother road users could be endangered
Rthe emission or noise levels are adversely
affected
The use of non-approved parts could affect
your vehicle's operating safety. Mercedes-
Benz therefore recommends genuine
344
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 345

Technical data
Vehicle electronics
Vehicle electronics Retrofitting electrical and electronic Rthey do not have an exterior aerial
equipment Rthe exterior aerial is not a low-reflection
Tampering with the engine electron-
ics Electrical and electronic equipment can jeop- aerial
ardise the operating safety of your vehicle. If Rthe exterior aerial has been fitted incor-
G Risk of accident equipment of this kind is retrofitted, it must rectly
Only have work on the engine electronics be type-approved and bear the e mark. The
and related components carried out at a e mark may be obtained from the equipment
G Risk of injury
qualified specialist workshop which has the manufacturer or an authorised testing centre.
necessary specialist knowledge and tools Excessive electromagnetic radiation may
! Damage or consequential damage arising also cause damage to your health and the
from fitting equipment not approved health of others. Using an exterior aerial
by Mercedes-Benz is not covered by the takes into account current scientific dis-
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this pur-
Mercedes-Benz warranty. cussions relating to the possible health haz-
pose. In particular, work relevant to safety
or on safety-related systems must be car- If you wish to install two-way radios in the ards that may result from electromagnetic
ried out at a qualified specialist workshop. vehicle, you must obtain formal approval. fields.
The vehicle's roadworthiness could other- Mercedes-Benz approves the installation of For this reason, only have the exterior aerial
wise be affected. two-way radios if such equipment is installed fitted at a qualified specialist workshop
professionally and a low-reflection exterior which has the necessary specialist knowl-
! Only have work done on the engine elec- aerial is used. edge and tools to carry out the work
tronics and its associated parts, such as The transmission output of the two-way radio required. Mercedes-Benz recommends
control units, sensors and connector leads, must not exceed the maximum transmission that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service
carried out at a qualified specialist work- outputs listed. Centre for this purpose. In particular, work
shop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service relevant to safety or on safety-related sys-
G Risk of accident tems must be carried out at a qualified
Centre. Otherwise, vehicle components
Two-way radios may interfere with the vehi- specialist workshop.
may wear more quickly and your vehicle's
cle electronics and thereby jeopardise the
warranty and operating permit may be inva-
operational safety of the vehicle and your i Mercedes-Benz recommends the use of
lidated.
own safety if: an approved exterior aerial. This ensures
optimal reception quality for mobile tele- Z
345
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 346

Technical data
Vehicle identification plates

phones/wireless devices in the vehicle. Vehicle identification plates
This also ensures that interference
between these devices and the vehicle's Vehicle identification plate with vehi-
electronics is kept to a minimum. If instal- cle identification number (VIN) and
led, the exterior aerial conducts the elec- paint code number
tromagnetic fields transmitted by a mobile The vehicle identification plate is located at
phone to the exterior of the vehicle. the bottom of the door frame on the front-
passenger side.
Frequency range Maximum trans-
mission output
(watts)
Vehicle identification plate (example)
Short wave 100 1 Vehicle identification plate
(< 50 MHz) 2 Vehicle manufacturer
4 m waveband 20 3 EU type approval number
4 Vehicle identification number (VIN)
2 m waveband 50 5 Maximum permissible gross vehicle
70 cm waveband 35 weight
6 Maximum permissible towing weight
25 cm waveband 10 1 Vehicle identification plate
7 Maximum permissible front axle load
X Open the driver's door. 8 Maximum permissible rear axle load
! If electrical or electronic equipment You will see vehicle identification plate 9 Paint code number
which does not comply with the above 1.
installation conditions is operated inside
the vehicle, the vehicle's operating permit
may be invalidated (EU Directive
95/54/EC) - Automotive EMC directive)
346
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 347

Technical data
Vehicle identification plates

Vehicle identification number (VIN) Engine number
In addition to the information on the vehicle The engine number is stamped on the engine
identification plate, the vehicle identification block (crankcase). More information can be
number (VIN) is also stamped onto the vehicle obtained from any Mercedes-Benz Service
body. It is located on the floor in front of the Centre.
front-passenger seat.
1 Floor covering
2 Vehicle identification number (VIN)
X Slide the front-passenger seat to its rear-

most position.
X Fold floor covering 1 upwards.
You will see the vehicle identification num-
ber (VIN) 2.
347
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 348

Technical data
Engine
Engine
E 200 KOMPRESSOR E 230 E 280 E 280 4MATIC
Rated output 135 kW (183 bhp) 150 kW (203 bhp) 170 kW (231 bhp) 170 kW (231 bhp)
At engine speed 5,500 rpm 6,100 rpm 6,000 rpm 6,000 rpm
Rated torque 250 Nm 245 Nm 300 Nm 300 Nm
At engine speed 2,800 – 5,000 rpm 2,900 – 5,500 rpm 2,500 – 5,000 rpm 2,500 – 5,000 rpm
Number of cylinders 4 6 6 6
Displacement 1,796 cm3 2,496 cm3 2,996 cm3 2,996 cm3
Maximum engine speed 6,300 rpm 6,500 rpm 6,500 rpm 6,500 rpm
E 350 E 350 4MATIC E 500 E 500 4MATIC
At engine speed 2,400 – 5,000 rpm 2,400 – 5,000 rpm 2,800 – 4,800 rpm 2,800 – 4,800 rpm
348
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 349

Technical data
Engine
E 350 E 350 4MATIC E 500 E 500 4MATIC
Maximum engine 6,500 rpm 6,500 rpm 6,500 rpm 6,500 rpm
speed
E 63 AMG E 200 CDI E 220 CDI E 280 CDI
Rated torque 630 Nm 340 Nm 400 Nm 400 Nm (440 Nm38)
At engine speed 5,200 rpm 1,800 – 2,600 rpm 2,000 rpm 1,400 – 3,200 rpm
(1,400 - 2,800 rpm38)
speed
Z
38 Only on vehicles with automatic transmission.
349
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 350

Technical data
Engine
E 280 CDI 4MATIC E 320 CDI E 320 CDI 4MATIC E 420 CDI
At engine speed 1,400 – 2,800 rpm 1,600 – 2,400 rpm 1,600 – 2,800 rpm 2,200 rpm
speed
E 350 CGI E 300 Bluetec
Rated output 215 kW (292 bhp) 155 kW (211 bhp)
At engine speed 6,400 rpm 3,400 rpm
Rated torque 365 Nm 540 Nm
At engine speed 3,000 – 5,100 rpm 1,600 – 2,400 rpm
Number of cylinders 6 6
350
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 351

Technical data
Engine
Displacement 3,498 cm3 2,987 cm3
Maximum engine 6,750 rpm 4,500 rpm

speed
351
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 352

Technical data
Performance
Performance
Speeds
7-speed E 230 E 280 E 350 E 500 E 63 AMG

Automatic transmis-
sion*
Maximum speed Saloon 240 km/h 248 km/h 250 km/h 250 km/h 250 km/h
Estate – 238 km/h 250 km/h 250 km/h 250 km/h
7-speed E 280 CDI E 320 CDI E 420 CDI E 350 CGI E 300 Bluetec
Automatic transmis-
sion*
Maximum speed Saloon 238 km/h 250 km/h 250 km/h 250 km/h 244 km/h
Estate 230 km/h 240 km/h – 250 km/h –
5-speed E 200 KOMPRESSOR E 280 4MATIC E 350 4MATIC E 500 4MATIC

Automatic transmis-
sion*
Maximum speed Saloon 232 km/h 244 km/h 250 km/h 250 km/h
Estate 222 km/h 232 km/h 245 km/h 250 km/h
* optional
352
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 353

Technical data
Performance
5-speed E 200 CDI E 220 CDI E 280 CDI 4MATIC E 320 CDI 4MATIC
Automatic transmis-
sion*
Maximum speed Saloon 211 km/h 225 km/h 234 km/h 244 km/h
Estate 200 km/h 218 km/h 226 km/h 236 km/h
6-speed E 200 KOMPRESSOR E 230 E 280

Manual transmission
Maximum speed Saloon 236 km/h 248 km/h 250 km/h
Estate 225 km/h 233 km/h 246 km/h
6-speed E 200 CDI E 220 CDI E 280 CDI

Manual transmission
Maximum speed Saloon 214 km/h 227 km/h 241 km/h
Estate 202 km/h 218 km/h 231 km/h
* optional
353
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 354

Technical data
Performance
Acceleration from 0 to 100 km/h
6-speed manual Saloon 9.1 seconds 8.9 seconds 7.3 seconds –

transmission
Estate 9.5 seconds 9.9 seconds 8.1 seconds –
5-speed automatic Saloon 9.4 seconds – – 7.8 seconds

transmission
Estate 9.7 seconds – – 8.3 seconds
7-speed automatic Saloon – 9.1 seconds 7.3 seconds –

transmission
Estate – 9.9 seconds 7.9 seconds –
E 350 E 350 4MATIC E 500 E 500 4MATIC
5-speed automatic Saloon – 7.1 seconds – 5.5 seconds

transmission
Estate – 7.4 seconds – 5.7 seconds
7-speed automatic Saloon 6.9 seconds – 5.3 seconds –

transmission
Estate 7.1 seconds – 5.4 seconds –
354
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 355

Technical data
Performance
E 200 CDI E 220 CDI E 280 CDI
6-speed manual Saloon 9.9 seconds 8.4 seconds 8.6 seconds

transmission
Estate 10.5 seconds 9.1 seconds 9.1 seconds
5-speed automatic Saloon 9.9 seconds 8.6 seconds –

transmission
Estate 10.7 seconds 9.1 seconds –
7-speed automatic Saloon – – 7.6 seconds

transmission
Estate – – 8.2 seconds
5-speed automatic Saloon 8.2 seconds – 7.4 seconds –

transmission
Estate 9.0 seconds – 8.1 seconds –
7-speed automatic Saloon – 6.8 seconds – 6.1 seconds

transmission
Estate – 7.3 seconds – –
E 350 CGI E 300 Bluetec E 63 AMG
7-speed automatic Saloon 6.8 seconds 7.2 seconds 4.5 seconds

transmission
Estate 7.0 seconds – 4.6 seconds
Z
355
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 356

Technical data
Tyres and wheels

Tyres and wheels i Further information about tyres and
wheels can be obtained from any
! For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz rec- Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
ommends that you only use tyres which
You will find a table of tyre pressures on the
have been approved by Mercedes-Benz
inside of your vehicle's fuel filler flap . You
specifically for your vehicle. These tyres are
will find further information about tyre pres-
specially adapted for use with the control
sures in the "Operation" section
systems, such as ABS or ESP®, and are (Y page 229).
marked as follows:
RMO = Mercedes-Benz Original
RMOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Exten-

ded* (with run-flat characteristics)
If you use other tyres, Mercedes-Benz can-
not accept any responsibility for damage
which may occur. Information about tyres
can be obtained from any Mercedes-Benz
Service Centre.
! If you fit tyres other than those tested and

recommended by Mercedes-Benz, charac-
teristics such as handling, noise levels and
fuel consumption, etc. could be adversely
affected. In addition, when driving with a
load, dimensional variations and different
tyre deformation characteristics could
cause the tyres to come into contact with
the bodywork and axle components. This
could result in damage to the tyres or the
vehicle.
* optional
356
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 357

Technical data
Tyres and wheels

Tyres
Saloon
E 200 KOMPRESSOR/ E 230/E 280/E 280 4MATIC E 300 Bluetec/E 350/

E 200 CDI/E 220 CDI E 350 4MATIC/E 350/CGI/
E 280 CDI/E 280 CDI 4MATIC/
E 320 CDI/E 320 CDI 4MATIC
Both axles Summer tyres 205/60 R16 92V 205/60 R16 92W –
Winter tyres39 205/60 R16 92H M+S 205/60 R16 92H M+S –
Wheels39 7J x 16 H2 ET 33 7J x 16 H2 ET 33 –
Both axles Summer tyres 225/55 R16 95V 225/55 R16 95W 225/55 R16 95W
Winter tyres 225/55 R16 95H M+S 225/55 R16 95H M+S 225/55 R16 95H M+S
Wheels 7.5J x 16 H2 ET 42 or 7.5J x 16 H2 ET 42 or 7.5J x 16 H2 ET 42 or

8J x 16 H2 ET 36 8J x 16 H2 ET 36 8J x 16 H2 ET 36
Z
39 Not in conjunction with sports package* optional equipment.
* optional
357
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 358

Technical data
Tyres and wheels
All models except E 63 AMG E 63 AMG
Both axles Summer tyres40 245/45 R17 95W –
Summer tyres40,41 245/45 R17 95W MOExtended –
Winter tyres40 245/45 R17 99V XL M+S –
Winter tyres40, 41, 42 245/45 R17 99V XL M+S MOExtended –
Winter tyres – 245/40 R18 97V XL M+S
Wheels 8J x 17 H2 ET 38 or 8.5J x 18 H2 ET 38
8.5J x 17 H2 ET 38
40 Only in conjunction with sports suspension*, AIRMATIC DC* or AVANTGARDE suspension*.

41 Tyres with run-flat characteristics and only in conjunction with the tyre pressure loss warning system or tyre pressure monitor* activated.
42 Not available directly from the factory. Further information can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
* optional
358
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 359

Technical data
Tyres and wheels

Estate
E 200 KOMPRESSOR/E 200 CDI/E 220 CDI/ E 230/E 280/E 280 4MATIC/E 350/
E 280 CDI/E 280 CDI 4MATIC/E 320 CDI/ E 350 CGI/E 350 4MATIC
E 320 CDI 4MATIC
Both axles Summer tyres 225/55 R16 95W 225/55 R16 95Y
Winter tyres 225/55 R16 95H M+S 225/55 R16 95H M+S
Wheels 7.5J x 16 H2 ET 42 or 7.5J x 16 H2 ET 42 or

8J x 16 H2 ET 36 8J x 16 H2 ET 36
Both axles Summer tyres43 245/45 R17 95W 245/45 R17 95Y
Summer tyres43, 44 245/45 R17 95W MOExtended 245/45 R17 95Y MOExtended
Winter tyres43 245/45 R17 99V XL M+S 245/45 R17 99V XL M+S
Winter tyres43, 44, 45 245/45 R17 99V XL M+S MOExtended 245/45 R17 99V XL M+S MOExtended
Wheels 8J x 17 H2 ET 38 or 8J x 17 H2 ET 38 or
8.5J x 17 H2 ET 38 8.5J x 17 H2 ET 38
43 Only in conjunction with sports suspension*, AIRMATIC DC* or AVANTGARDE suspension*.

44 Tyres Z
with run-flat characteristics and only in conjunction with the tyre pressure loss warning system or tyre pressure monitor* activated.
45 Not available directly from the factory. Further information can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
* optional
359
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 360

Technical data
Tyres and wheels
E 500/E 500 4MATIC E 63 AMG
Both axles Summer tyres 245/45 R17 95Y –
Summer tyres46 245/45 R17 95Y MOExtended –
Winter tyres 245/45 R17 99V XL M+S 245/40 R18 97V XL M+S47
46 Tyres with run-flat characteristics and only in combination with the tyre pressure loss warning or tyre pressure monitor* activated.
47 Estate: a maximum speed of 220 km/h is permitted with winter tyres.
* optional
360
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 361

Technical data
Tyres and wheels

E 500/E 500 4MATIC E 63 AMG
Winter tyres46 , 48 245/45 R17 99V XL M+S MOExtended –
Wheels 8J x 17 H2 ET 38 or 8.5J x 18 H2 ET 38
8.5J x 17 H2 ET 38
AMG equipment*
All models except 4MATIC vehicles

4MATIC vehicles and E 63 AMG
Front axle Summer tyres 245/40 ZR 18 245/40 ZR 18 97Y XL
Winter tyres 245/40 R 18 97V XL M+S 245/40 R 18 97V XL M+S
Light-alloy wheels 8.5J x 18 H2 ET 38 8.5J x 18 H2 ET 38
Rear axle Summer tyres49 265/35 ZR 18 XL 245/40 ZR 18 97Y XL
Light-alloy wheels 9J x 18 H2 ET 39 8.5J x 18 H2 ET 38
46 Tyreswith run-flat characteristics and only in combination with the tyre pressure loss warning or tyre pressure monitor* activated.
48 Not Z
available directly from the factory. Further information can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
49 Use of snow chains not possible.
* optional
361
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 362

Technical data
Tyres and wheels

All models except 4MATIC vehicles
4MATIC vehicles and E 63 AMG
Winter tyres50, 51 245/40 R 18 97V XL M+S 245/40 R 18 97V XL M+S
50 Use of snow chains only possible on rear axle.

51 Estate: the maximum permissible speed with winter tyres is 225 km/h.
362
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 363

Technical data
Tyres and wheels

Performance Package*
E 63 AMG mixed tyres E 63 AMG Performance Package*

(Saloon and Estate)
Front axle Summer tyres 245/40 ZR 18 245/40 ZR 18
Rear axle Summer tyres52 265/35 ZR 18 XL 265/35 ZR 18 XL
Light-alloy wheels 9J x 18 H2 ET 39 9.5J x 18 H2 ET 44
Both axles Winter tyres53, 54 245/40 R 18 97V XL M+S 245/40 R 18 97V XL M+S

53 Use Z
of snow chains only possible on rear axle.
54 Estate: the maximum permissible speed with winter tyres is 220 km/h.
* optional
363
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 364

Technical data
Tyres and wheels

Sports package*
All models except 4MATIC vehicles: 4MATIC vehicles:

4MATIC vehicles and E 63 AMG Saloons Estates
Front axle Summer tyres 245/40 R18 93Y 245/40 R18 93Y 245/40 R18 97Y XL
Light-alloy 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 38 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 38 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 38

wheels
Rear axle Summer tyres 265/35 R18 97Y XL 245/40 R18 93Y 245/40 R18 97Y XL
Light-alloy 9J x 18 H2 ET 39 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 38 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 38

wheels
Both axles Winter tyres 245/40 R18 97V XL M+S 245/40 R18 97V XL M+S 245/40 R18 97V XL M+S55
Light-alloy 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 38 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 38 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 38

wheels
55 Estate: a maximum speed of 225 km/h is permitted with winter tyres.
364
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 365

Technical data
Tyres and wheels

Spare wheel*
Your vehicle may be equipped with TIREFIT, a "Minispare"/collapsible emergency spare wheel* or a spare wheel* depending on the country,
the engine and the wheels fitted.
! The spare wheel* must be inflated to the maximum tyre pressure given in the table on the inside of the fuel filler flap.
i Vehicles with MOExtended tyres (tyres with run-flat characteristics) are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory.
All models except E 63 AMG E 63 AMG
"Minispare" emer- Tyres T 155/70 R17 110M –

gency spare wheel*56
Tyre pressure 4.2 bar –
Wheels 4.0B x 17 H2 ET 34 –
Collapsible emer- Tyres – 175/55 - 18 95P XL

gency spare wheel*56
Tyre pressure – 3.5 bar
Wheels – 6.0B x 18H2 ET 25
Z
* optional
365
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 366

Technical data
Vehicle dimensions
Vehicle dimensions
Vehicle length Saloon 4,852 mm 4,852 mm 4,852 mm 4,852 mm

(ECE)
Estate 4,884 mm 4,884 mm 4,884 mm 4,884 mm
Vehicle width with Saloon 2,063 mm 2,063 mm 2,063 mm 2,063 mm

exterior mirrors
folded out Estate 2,063 mm 2,063 mm 2,063 mm 2,063 mm
Vehicle height Saloon 1,483 mm 1,483 mm 1,483 mm 1,498 mm
Estate 1,506 mm 1,506 mm 1,506 mm 1,509 mm
Wheelbase Saloon 2,854 mm 2,854 mm 2,854 mm 2,854 mm
Estate 2,854 mm 2,854 mm 2,854 mm 2,854 mm
E 350 E 350 4MATIC E 500 E 500 4MATIC

(ECE)
Estate 4,884 mm 4,884 mm 4,884 mm 4,884 mm

exterior mirrors
366
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 367

Technical data
Vehicle dimensions
E 350 E 350 4MATIC E 500 E 500 4MATIC
Estate 1,506 mm 1,509 mm 1,500 mm 1,513 mm
Estate 2,854 mm 2,854 mm 2,854 mm 2,854 mm

(ECE)
Estate 4,919 mm 4,884 mm 4,884 mm 4,884 mm

exterior mirrors
Estate 1,500 mm 1,506 mm 1,506 mm 1,506 mm
Estate 2,854 mm 2,854 mm 2,854 mm 2,854 mm
367
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 368

Technical data
Vehicle dimensions

(ECE)
Estate 4,884 mm 4,884 mm 4,884 mm –

exterior mirrors
folded out Estate 2,063 mm 2,063 mm 2,063 mm –
Estate 1,509 mm 1,506 mm 1,509 mm –
Estate 2,854 mm 2,854 mm 2,854 mm –
Vehicle length Saloon 4,852 mm 4,852 mm

(ECE)
Estate 4,884 mm –
Vehicle width with Saloon 2,063 mm 2,063 mm

exterior mirrors
folded out Estate 2,063 mm –
368
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 369

Technical data
Vehicle weights
Vehicle height Saloon 1,484 mm 1,484 mm
Estate 1,506 mm –
Wheelbase Saloon 2,854 mm 2,854 mm
Estate 2,854 mm –
Vehicle weights
The unladen weight includes the driver (68 kg), luggage (7 kg) and all fluids (fuel tank 90% full). Items of optional equipment increase the
unladen weight and reduce the maximum payload. Specific data on weight is to be found on the vehicle identification plate (Y page 346).
E 200 E 230 E 280 E 280 4MATIC
KOMPRESSOR
Unladen weight Saloon 1,580 kg 1,650 kg 1,660 kg 1,780 kg

(in accordance
with EC direc- Estate 1,720 kg 1,775 kg 1,785 kg 1,905 kg
tive)
Maximum per- Saloon 2,105 kg 2,175 kg 2,185 kg 2,305 kg

missible gross
vehicle weight Estate 2,295 kg 2,350 kg 2,360 kg 2,480 kg
369
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 370

Technical data
Vehicle weights
E 200 E 230 E 280 E 280 4MATIC
KOMPRESSOR

missible front
axle load Estate 975 kg 1,005 kg 1,005 kg 1,110 kg

missible rear
axle load Estate 1,320 kg 1,345 kg 1,355 kg 1,370 kg
Towing a trailer Saloon 1,195 kg 1,225 kg 1,235 kg 1,250 kg
Estate 1,395 kg 1,420 kg 1,430 kg 1,430 kg
Maximum roof 100 kg 100 kg 100 kg 100 kg

load
Maximum boot 100 kg 100 kg 100 kg 100 kg

load 57
E 350 E 350 4MATIC E 500 E 500 4MATIC

(in accordance
tive)
57 On vehicles with AIRMATIC and on the Estate it is important to observe the maximum permissible rear axle load.
370
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 371

Technical data
Vehicle weights
E 350 E 350 4MATIC E 500 E 500 4MATIC

missible gross

missible front

missible rear
Estate 1,430 kg 1,430 kg 1,430 kg 1,430 kg

load

load 58
Z
371
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 372

Technical data
Vehicle weights

(in accordance
tive)

missible gross

missible front

missible rear
Towing a trailer Saloon – 1,195 kg 1,195 kg 1,230 kg
Estate – 1,385 kg 1,385 kg 1,410 kg

load

load 59
372
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 373

Technical data
Vehicle weights

(in accordance
with EC direc- Estate 1,965 kg 1,885 kg 1,980 kg –
tive)

missible gross
vehicle weight Estate 2,540 kg 2,460 kg 2,555 kg –

missible front
axle load Estate 1,170 kg 1,080 kg 1,175 kg –

missible rear
axle load Estate 1,370 kg 1,380 kg 1,380 kg –
Estate 1,430 kg 1,430 kg 1,430 kg –

load

load 60
Z
373
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 374

Technical data
Vehicle weights
Unladen weight Saloon 1,720 kg 1,735 kg

(in accordance
with EC direc- Estate 1,840 kg –
tive)
Maximum per- Saloon 2,245 kg 2,260 kg

missible gross
vehicle weight Estate 2,415 kg –

missible front
axle load Estate 1,035 kg –

missible rear
axle load Estate 1,380 kg –
Towing a trailer Saloon 1,255 kg 1,235 kg
Estate 1,435 kg –
Maximum roof 100 kg 100 kg

load
Maximum boot 100 kg 100 kg

load 61
374
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 375

Technical data
Trailer coupling*
Trailer coupling* Saloon Estate
Mounting dimensions
G Risk of accident
Only have a trailer coupling retrofitted at a
qualified specialist workshop which has the
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this pur-
pose. In particular, work relevant to safety
or on safety-related systems must be car-
ried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
! If you have a trailer tow hitch retrofitted,

changes to the cooling system may be nec-
essary, depending on the vehicle type.
If you have a trailer tow hitch retrofitted,
observe the anchorage points on the chas-
sis frame. Anchorage points for the trailer coupling Anchorage points for the trailer coupling
1 Anchorage points 1 Anchorage points
2 Overhang dimension 2 Overhang dimension
For trailer tow hitches fitted at the factory, the For trailer tow hitches fitted at the factory, the
overhang dimension is 1,234 mm. overhang dimension is 1,264.5 mm.
* optional
375
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 376

Technical data
Trailer coupling*
Trailer loads
All models except E 200

E 200/E 23062 E 230
Permissible trailer load, braked63 Saloon 1,900 kg 1,700 kg64
Estate
Vehicles with manual transmission 1,900 kg 1,700 kg64
Vehicles with automatic transmission* 2,100 kg 2,100 kg
Permissible trailer load, unbraked Saloon 750 kg 750 kg
Estate 750 kg 750 kg
Maximum drawbar noseweight65 Saloon 76 kg 76 kg
Estate 84 kg 84 kg
62 The E 63 AMG model cannot be used to tow a trailer.

63 At a minimum gradient-climbing capability of 12% from a standstill
64 At a minimum gradient-climbing capability of 8 %: 1,900 kg
65 The drawbar noseweight is not included in the trailer load.
* optional
376
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 377

Technical data
Service products and capacities

Service products and capacities You can recognise service products approved eyes or open wounds. See a doctor imme-
by Mercedes-Benz by the following inscrip- diately if any service product is swallowed.
Notes on service products and capaci- tion on the containers:
ties RMB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51) H Environmental note
Service products are: RMB Approval (e.g. MB Approval 229.51) Dispose of service products in an environ-
Rfuels (e.g. petrol, diesel) mentally-responsible manner.
Other designations or recommendations that
Rlubricants (e.g. engine oil, transmission oil) relate to a level of quality or a specification in
Rcoolant accordance with an MB Approval have not
Fuels
necessarily been approved by Mercedes-
Rbrake fluid Benz. G Risk of explosion
Rwindscreen washer fluid You can obtain further information from any Fuel is highly flammable. Fire, naked flames
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. and smoking are therefore prohibited when
use those products which have been tested G Risk of injury handling fuels.
and specially approved by Mercedes-Benz for When handling, storing and disposing of Switch off the engine and the auxiliary heat-
your vehicle and are listed in the Mercedes- any service products, please observe the ing* before refuelling.
Benz Owner's Manual in the relevant chapter relevant regulations, as you could other-
since: wise endanger yourself and others. G Risk of injury
Rparts and service products are matched Do not allow fuel to come into contact with
Keep service products away from children.
Rdamage caused by the use of non-approved skin or clothing.
To protect your health, do not allow service
service products is not covered by the war- products to come into contact with your Allowing fuels to come into direct contact
ranty with your skin or inhaling fuel vapours is
damaging to your health.
Tank capacity
* optional
377
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 378

Technical data

Saloon Estate
E 200 KOMPRESSOR66 /E 230 65 l 70 l
E 280 /E 280 4MATIC 65 l (80 l)67 70 l (80 l)67
E 350/E 350 4MATIC 80 l 80 l
E 500/E 500 4MATIC 80 l 80 l
E 63 AMG 80 l 80 l
E 300 Bluetec66 65 l –
E 200 CDI66 65 l –
E 220 CDI66 65 l 70 l
E 280 CDI/E 280 CDI 4MATIC 65 l (80 l)67 70 l (80 l)67
E 320 CDI/E 320 CDI 4MATIC 80 l 80 l
E 420 CDI 80 l –
E 350 CGI 80 l 80 l
Of which reserve fuel Approximately 8 – 9 l Approximately 8 – 9 l

AMG vehicles Approximately 14 l Approximately 14 l
66 80 l fuel tank available as optional equipment.

67 80 l fuel tank available as optional equipment for the CLASSIC equipment level.
378
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 379

Technical data

! Do not use petrol to refuel vehicles with a Rat very low temperatures H Environmental note
diesel engine. Do not use diesel to refuel Rin urban traffic CO2 (carbon dioxide) is the gas which sci-
vehicles with a petrol engine. Never mix
Ron short trips entists believe to be principally responsible
diesel with petrol. Even small amounts of
for global warming (the greenhouse effect).
the wrong fuel result in damage to the Rwhen towing a trailer Your vehicle's CO2 emissions are directly
injection system. Damage resulting from Rin mountainous terrain
adding the wrong fuel is not covered by the related to fuel consumption and therefore
warranty. The consumption figures have been deter- depend on:
mined in accordance with EU Directive Refficient use of the fuel by the engine
More information about refuelling and fuels 80 / 1268 / EEC test conditions. Rdriving style
can be found in the "Operation" section.
i Only for certain countries: the current Rother non-technical factors, such as envi-
consumption and emissions values of your ronmental influences or road conditions
Introduction to fuel consumption vehicle can be found in the COC papers
(EC-CERTIFICATE OF CONFORMITY). These You can minimise your vehicle's CO2 emis-
The vehicle will use more fuel than usual in sions by driving carefully and having it serv-
the following situations: documents are supplied when the vehicle
is delivered. iced regularly.
! Do not use any special additives, as they

can cause malfunctions and engine dam-
age. Damage resulting from the use of such
additives is not covered by the Mercedes-
Benz warranty.
379
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 380

Technical data
Fuel consumption
The fuel consumption figures stated have been determined in accordance with the currently valid EU guidelines and the data does not relate
to a single vehicle. These values may be different under normal operating conditions.
Manual transmission E 200 KOMPRESSOR E 230 E 280
Urban Saloon 11.7 – 12.2 l/100 km 13.3 – 13.5 l/100 km 13.4 – 13.6 l/100 km
Estate 12.4 – 12.6 l/100 km 13.8 – 13.9 l/100 km 13.7 – 13.9 l/100 km
Extra-urban Saloon 6.3 – 6.7 l/100 km 6.9 – 7.0 l/100 km 6.9 – 7.1 l/100 km
Overall (NEDC) Saloon 8.2 – 8.8 l/100 km 9.2 – 9.4 l/100 km 9.3 – 9.5 l/100 km
CO2 emissions Saloon 195 – 210 g/km 220 – 223 g/km 222 – 227 g/km
Estate 212 – 217 g/km 229 – 233 g/km 229 – 234 g/km
380
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 381

Technical data

Manual transmis- E 200 CDI E 220 CDI E 280 CDI
sion
Automatic trans- E 200 KOMPRESSOR E 230 E 280

mission*
Z
381
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 382

Technical data

Automatic trans- E 200 KOMPRESSOR E 230 E 280
mission*
Automatic trans- E 280 4MATIC E 350 CGI E 300 Bluetec

mission*
Estate 14.3 – 14.6 l/100 km 13.1 – 13.6 l/100 km –
Estate 8.0 – 8.3 l/100 km 6.5 – 7.0 l/100 km –
Estate 10.3 – 10.6 l/100 km 8.9 – 9.4 l/100 km –
Estate 246 – 253 g/km 213 – 224 g/km –
* optional
382
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 383

Technical data

Automatic trans- E 350 E 350 4MATIC E 500
mission*
Urban Saloon 14.0 – 14.4 l/100 km 14.5 – 14.9 l/100 km 16.9 l/100 km
Estate 14.1 – 14.6 l/100 km 14.7 – 15.3 l/100 km 17.3 l/100 km
Extra-urban Saloon 7.2 – 7.8 l/100 km 8.0 – 8.3 l/100 km 8.2 l/100 km
Overall (NEDC) Saloon 9.7 – 10.2 l/100 km 10.4 – 10.7 l/100 km 11.5 l/100 km
CO2 emissions Saloon 231 – 244 g/km 247 – 255 g/km 273 g/km
Estate 236 – 248 g/km 253 – 261 g/km 280 g/km
Automatic trans- E 500 4MATIC E 63 AMG E 200 CDI

mission*
Urban Saloon 17.8 l/100 km 22.3 l/100 km 9.0 – 9.8 l/100 km
Estate 18.2 l/100 km 22.6 l/100 km 9.5 – 10.1 l/100 km
Extra-urban Saloon 9.2 l/100 km 9.8 l/100 km 5.2 – 5.5 l/100 km

Z
* optional
383
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 384

Technical data

Automatic trans- E 500 4MATIC E 63 AMG E 200 CDI
mission*
Overall (NEDC) Saloon 12.3 l/100 km 14.3 l/100 km 6.5 – 7.1 l/100 km
CO2 emissions Saloon 293 g/km 341 g/km 173 – 186 g/km
Estate 300 g/km 345 g/km 187 – 199 g/km
Automatic trans- E 220 CDI E 280 CDI E 280 CDI 4MATIC

mission*
* optional
384
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 385

Technical data

Automatic trans- E 320 CDI E 320 CDI 4MATIC E 420 CDI
mission*
Urban Saloon 10.3 – 10.6 l/100 km 10.5 – 10.7 l/100 km 13.2 l/100 km
Estate 10.6 – 11.0 l/100 km 11.0 – 11.6 l/100 km –
Extra-urban Saloon 5.6 – 6.0 l/100 km 6.4 – 6.6 l/100 km 7.0 l/100 km
Estate 5.9 – 6.4 l/100 km 6.8 – 6.9 l/100 km –
Overall (NEDC) Saloon 7.3 – 7.6 l/100 km 7.9 – 8.1 l/100 km 9.3 l/100 km
Estate 7.6 – 8.1 l/100 km 8.3 – 8.6 l/100 km –
CO2 emissions Saloon 194 – 202 g/km 210 – 215 g/km 246 g/km
Estate 202 – 215 g/km 220 – 228 g/km –
Engine oil
A list of engine oils tested and approved in accordance with the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service Products is available from any
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Approval by Mercedes-Benz is also often indicated by the MB Sheet Number on the oil container. The table
shows which MB Sheet number applies to which engine:
* optional
385
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 386

Technical data

E 200 E 230 E 280 E 350 E 500 E 63 AMG
KOMPRESSOR E 280 E 350 E 500
4MATIC 4MATIC 4MATIC
E 350 CGI
MB Sheet number 229.3/229.31 229.3/229.5 229.3/229.5 229.3/229.5 229.3/229.5 229.568

229.5/229.51
E 200 CDI E 220 CDI E 280 CDI E 320 CDI E 420 CDI
E 280 CDI E 320 CDI E 300 Bluetec
4MATIC 4MATIC
MB Sheet number 228.51/229.31/ 228.51/229.31/ 228.51/229.31/ 228.51/229.31/ 228.51/229.31/

With a diesel partic- 229.51 229.51 229.51 229.51 229.51
ulate filter
MB Sheet number 228.3/228.5/ 228.3/228.5/ 228.3/228.5/ 228.3/228.5/ —

Without a diesel 228.51/ 228.51/ 228.51 228.51
particle filter69 229.3/229.31/ 229.3/229.31/ 229.3/229.31/ 229.3/229.31/
229.5/229.51 229.5/229.51 229.5/229.51 229.5/229.51
i In the event that the: Rengine oil brand corresponding to the oil used in your engine
Rgrade (MB Sheet number) is not available, you can use a different
mineral or synthetic engine oil approved by
RSAE classification (viscosity) Mercedes-Benz.
68 Restriction: only SAE XW-40 engine oils may be used.

386
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 387

Technical data

Mixing oils reduces the benefits of high- mechanical assemblies. The use of lubri- ! Engine oils for vehicles without a diesel
grade engine oil. cant additives limits warranty claims. particle filter may also be used temporarily
in vehicles with a diesel particle filter if the
! Do not use lubricant additives, since they engine oil listed is not available. You must
lead to increased wear and damage to the then have an oil change carried out as soon
as possible.
Capacities
The following values refer to an oil change including the oil filter.
Engine with oil filter E 200 E 230 E 500 E 63 AMG

KOMPRESSOR E 280 E 500 4MATIC
E 280 4MATIC E 300 Bluetec
E 350
E 350 4MATIC
E 350 CGI
Replacement amount 5.5 l 8.0 l 8.5 l 8.8 l
Engine with oil filter E 200 CDI E 280 CDI 4MATIC E 280 CDI E 420 CDI
E 220 CDI E 320 CDI 4MATIC E 320 CDI
Replacement amount 6.5 l 8.5 l 8.5 l 10.5 l
387
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 388

Technical data

Coolant If antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor is present in
the correct concentration, the boiling point of
The coolant is a mixture of water and anti- the coolant will be around 130 °C.
freeze/corrosion inhibitor. It performs the
The antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor concentra-
following tasks:
tion in the cooling system should:
Ranti-corrosion protection
Rbe at least 50%. This will protect the cooling
Rantifreeze protection system against freezing down to around –
Rraising the boiling point 37 °C.
Rnot exceed 55% concentration (antifreeze
i When the vehicle is first delivered, it is protection down to –45 °C), otherwise heat
topped up with a coolant that will ensure will not be effectively dissipated.
adequate antifreeze and corrosion protec-
tion. If the vehicle has lost coolant, top it up with
equal amounts of water and antifreeze/cor-
! Only top up with coolant that has been rosion inhibitor. Mercedes-Benz recom-
premixed with the desired quantity of anti- mends using an antifreeze/corrosion inhibi-
freeze protection. You could otherwise tor which has been approved for Mercedes-
damage the engine. Benz.
There is more information about coolant ! The cooling system contains a filling
and topping it up on Mercedes-Benz Spec- which must be renewed after 15 years, or
ifications for Service Products Sheet after 250, 000 km at the latest. Have the
310.1. renewal confirmed in the Service Booklet.
The warranty is only valid if you top up with
! Always use a suitable coolant mixture,
an antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor which
even in countries where high temperatures
has been approved by Mercedes-Benz, and
prevail.
observe the recommended mixing ratios.
Otherwise, the cooling system will not be
sufficiently protected from corrosion, and
the boiling point will be too low.
388
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 389

Technical data

Capacities
The following values indicate the total cooling system capacities.
E 200 E 230 E 350 CGI E 500 E 63 AMG
KOMPRESSOR E 280 E 500 4MATIC
E 280 4MATIC
E 350
E 350 4MATIC
Coolant 9.2 l 10.0 l 12.0 l 11.3 l 11.8 l
Amount of antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor required for antifreeze protection
Down to –37 °C 4.6 l 5.0 l 6.0 l 5.7 l 5.9 l

(approx. 50%)
Down to –45 °C 5.1 l 5.5 l 6.6 l 6.2 l 6.5 l

(approx. 55%)
389
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 390

Technical data
E 200 CDI E 220 CDI E 280 CDI E 320 CDI E 420 CDI
E 280 CDI E 320 CDI
4MATIC 4MATIC
E 300 Bluetec
Coolant 10.2 l 10.2 l 13.0 l 13.0 l 15.3 l
Amount of antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor required for antifreeze protection
Down to –37 °C 5.1 l 5.1 l 6.5 l 6.5 l 7.7 l

(approx. 50%)
Down to –45 °C 5.6 l 5.6 l 7.2 l 7.2 l 8.4 l

(approx. 55%)
Brake fluid Have the brake fluid renewed every two Windscreen washer system
years with a brake fluid that has been
Over a period of time, the brake fluid absorbs The washer fluid reservoir holds approxi-
approved by Mercedes-Benz and have this
moisture from the air; this lowers its boiling mately 4.5 litres; on vehicles with the head-
confirmed in the Service Booklet.
point. lamp cleaning system* it holds 7 litres.
G Risk of accident i There is usually a notice in the engine The headlamp cleaning system* and the
If the boiling point of the brake fluid is too compartment to remind you when the next windscreen washer system are both supplied
low, vapour pockets may form in the brake brake fluid change is due. from the washer fluid reservoir.
system when the brakes are applied hard X At temperatures above freezing point:
(e.g. when driving downhill). This would Top up the washer fluid reservoir with a
impair braking efficiency. mixture of water and windscreen washer
concentrate (Y page 226).
X At temperatures below freezing point:
* optional
390
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 391

Technical data
Frequencies for garage door openers*

Top up the washer fluid reservoir with a
mixture of water, antifreeze and wind-
screen washer concentrate (Y page 226).
Adapt the mixing ratio to the outside tem-
peratures.
G Risk of fire
Windscreen washer concentrate is highly
flammable. Fire, naked flames and smoking
are prohibited when windscreen washer
concentrate is being handled.
Country Radio registration number Frequency range MHz
Egypt W-KLE-17 / 08 March 06 27, 30, 40, 418, 433, 868
Andorra 20 July 27, 30, 40, 433, 868
Australia 28 June 27, 30, 40, 433, 868
Barbados Registration not required 27, 40, 433, 868
Belgium Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE18 May 05 27, 40, 433, 868
Chile 38447/F-23 No.3.3634 40, 433
Denmark Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE20 April 05 27, 40, 433, 868
Z
* optional
391
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 392

Technical data

Germany Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE7519301 29 April 05 27, 40, 433, 868
Estonia Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE11 May 05 27, 40, 433, 868
Finland Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE10668 13 May 05 27, 40, 433, 868
France Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE10668 13 May 05 27, 30, 40, 433, 868
French Guyana Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE10668 13 May 05 27, 30, 40, 433, 868
Gibraltar Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE13 May 05 (UK) 27, 40, 418, 433, 868
Greece Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE11409/18/4/2005 18 May 05 27, 40, 433, 868
United Kingdom Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE18 May 05 27, 40, 418, 433, 868
Guadeloupe Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE10668 13 May 05 27, 30, 40, 433, 868
Ireland Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE18 May 05 27, 40, 433, 868
Iceland Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE18 May 05 27, 40, 433, 868
Italy DGPGSR/II/347487/FOR/15347 27, 40, 433, 868

DGPGSR/II/347487/FOR/15348
* optional
392
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 393

Technical data

Jordan TRC/LPD/2005/23 27, 30, 40, 433, 868
Canary Islands 000438/2005, 000439/2005 27, 40, 433, 868

000440/2005, 000441/2005
000445/2005, 000446/2005
000447/2005, 3 June 2005
Croatia SDR 224/06 27, 40, 433, 868
Kuwait 5 October 2005 27, 30, 40, 418, 433, 868
Latvia 2920/O&M/2006 / 26 April 06 27, 40, 433, 868
Lebanon Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE 27.4-1B-1609 6 May 05 27, 40, 433, 868
Liechtenstein Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE 14357 27 May 05 27, 40, 433, 868
Lithuania Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE27.4-1B-1609 6 May 05 27, 40, 433, 868
Luxembourg Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE150405/9538 24 May 05 27, 40, 433, 868
Malta Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE18 May 05 27, 40, 433, 868
Martinique Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE11 July 05 27, 30, 40, 433, 868
Monaco Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE10668 13 May 05 27, 40, 433, 868
New Zealand 20 March 06 27, 30, 40, 433

Z
* optional
393
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 394

Technical data

The Netherlands Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE18 May 05 27, 40, 433, 868
Norway Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE05/02424-SA644 18 May 05 27, 40, 433, 868
Austria Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE18 May 05 27, 40, 433, 868
Poland Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE21 April 05 27, 40, 433, 868
Portugal ANCOM-S08399/05 27, 40, 433, 868
Reunion Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE11 July 05 27, 40, 433, 868
Romania Article 6.4 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE 27, 30, 40, 433, 868
Russia 13 May 05 433
Saudi Arabia 11_02_05/5024-5-6 418, 433
Sweden Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE18 May 05 27, 40, 433, 868
Switzerland Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE14357 27 May 05 27, 40, 433, 868
Slovakia Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE 27, 40, 433, 868

Slovak
206/11/2005 4 May 05
Slovenia Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE 500-1/2005-437 9 May 05 27, 40, 433, 868
* optional
394
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 395

Technical data

Spain 000438/2005, 000439/2005, 000440/2005 27, 40, 433, 868

000441/2005, 000445/2005, 000446/2005
000447/2005
South Africa 11 October 2005 27, 40, 433
Syria 279/4/14 / 05 March 06
Czech Republic General Licence GL-30/R/2000 Reg. No. 844 13 May 05 27, 40, 433
Hungary Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE18 May 05 27, 40, 433, 868
United Arab Emirates 1623/5/10-2/26/76 433
Cyprus Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE5 May 05 27, 40, 433, 868
* optional
395
211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 396

396

Mercedes e Class Estate 2008 s211 Owners Manual 01

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Mercedes e Class Estate 2008 s211 Owners Manual 01

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Disclaimer

Internal use only

211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 1

211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 2

Practical advice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251

Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343

211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 3

1, 2, 3 ... System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Air pump, electric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255

211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 4

Automatic transmission Display Removing/fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332 Brake lamps

211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 5

Tail pipes (AMG vehicles) . . . . . . . . 247 Child seat Cornering light

211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 6

Service display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 ADAPTIVE BRAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 E

211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 7

Emergency unlocking Exterior lighting Foglamps

211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 8

G NECK-PRO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 9

Checking the battery . . . . . . . . . . . 310 Lashing eyelets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Locking

211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 10

Manual gearshift program . . . . . . . . 118 Mirror N

211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 11

Navigation menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Parking lamps PRE-SAFE® System

211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 12

Rear-view mirror Restraint System Seat belt

211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 13

Shift ranges Speedometer Centre console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 14

Switching off the alarm Thermatic Trailer loads

211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 15

Tyre pressures Vehicle battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 Wheels

211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 16

Protection of the environment

211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 17

211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 18

RThe "Technical data" section in this manual

RNational road traffic regulations

211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 19

Exterior view ....................................... 20

211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 20

211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 21

1 Luggage compartment/ 8 Exterior mirrors 91

Fuel requirements 219 b Front lights 311

211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 22

211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 23

211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 24

211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 25

1 Overhead control panel 34 6 Instrument cluster h Adjusts the steering wheel

211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 26

211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 27

a Coolant warning lamp 287 l Automatic transmission*:

211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 28

211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 29

a Coolant warning lamp 287 l Automatic transmission*:

211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 30

Multi-function steering wheel

1 j Press briefly to k scrolling through the

211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 31

4 Vehicles with automatic

5 Deactivates Parktronic* 160

6 Sets AIRMATIC DC* 157

211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 32